JP7844136B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine capable of providing gaming experiences.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, manage various types of random numbers using hardware-based random number generation and software-based random number generation (for example, Patent Document 1). A pachinko machine, exemplified by this type, has a control mechanism that displays a normal background during the first waiting period after the variable display of symbols has finished, and then displays a demonstration display during the second waiting period after the first waiting period has ended (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Patent No. 6124313 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-22196

There was room to improve the marketability of a gaming machine having the functions and configurations of both Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 described above.

This invention addresses these problems and aims to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

To achieve the above objective, the gaming machine according to the present invention is:
A gaming machine that, upon fulfilling the activation conditions, displays variable special identification information and can be controlled to a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
In multiple performance modes, including a first performance mode and a second performance mode, it is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
The variable display of the performance identification information is capable of being displayed such that the period of time it takes for the transparency of the performance identification information to change from a first value to a second value differs depending on whether the start condition is met in the first performance mode or in the second performance mode.
The operation mode of the variable display of the performance identification information in the first performance mode and the operation mode of the variable display of the performance identification information in the second performance mode can be displayed differently.
When the aforementioned demonstration display is displayed and the activation condition is met, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value.
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means, which is different from the first light-emitting means and is provided in correspondence with the performance operation means.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means can be controlled using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the first light-emitting means can be controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the first and second periods, the second light-emitting means can be controlled using a luminance data table different from the background display luminance data table and the demonstration display luminance data table.
If a specific error occurs during gameplay, the first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the first light-emitting means controls the first light-emitting means by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information.
The demonstration display brightness data table includes brightness data for controlling the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting pattern when it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The number of luminance data points constituting the specified error luminance data table and the number of luminance data points constituting the demonstration display luminance data table are different.
The luminance data constituting the demonstration display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured to be different in terms of the light emission operation mode of the light emission means as seen by the player.
It is characterized by the following:
Furthermore, gaming machines relating to other embodiments are,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
A means of updating random values,
A first display means capable of performing variable display of special identification information,
A second display means capable of performing variable display of ordinary identification information,
It comprises a third display means capable of displaying information related to the performance,
In response to the display result by the first display means, the type of the advantageous state is determined.
In response to the display result by the second display means, a change mode is determined that changes the starting area to a guided state that facilitates the passage of the game medium.
The update means is,
The first random number used to determine the display result by the first display means and the second random number used to determine the display result by the second display means can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process.
The first random value and the second random value can be updated using a common internal storage means.
The aforementioned first random value is determined by the fact that the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number.
The second random number is defined as a prime number, where the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number.
The third display means is,
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene displaying the title name, and a scene displaying a warning.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the text of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text with animation.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed in animation when playing the gaming machine.
The animated display of the company name for the gaming machine is more emphasized than the animated display of warning text when playing the gaming machine.
The animation display of the title name of the gaming machine is characterized by being more emphasized than the animation display of warning text when playing the gaming machine.
In this configuration, it becomes possible to update the random values appropriately. Furthermore, although there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as the company name, machine title, and warnings. By displaying each with its own dedicated animation, we can emphasize them, and by emphasizing the animations in the scenes displaying the company name and machine title compared to the warning scenes, we can highlight the company name and machine title, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

This is a front view of a pachinko game machine. This is a diagram showing the configuration of various control boards and other components. This figure shows an example of a random number generator used for gaming. This flowchart shows the main processing for game control. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This figure shows an example of the configuration of a special pattern process jump table. This is a flowchart showing the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This includes a flowchart illustrating an example of the process for controlling the performance. This figure shows an example configuration of a microcomputer used for game control. This figure shows an example of an address map. This figure shows some examples of the main address settings included in the function setting register area. This figure shows some examples of the main address settings included in the function control register area. This diagram illustrates an example of settings for random numbers used in games. This is a diagram to explain the random number update period. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for responding to the start of power supply. This figure shows an example of the configuration of the function setting register storage value table. This diagram shows an example of the configuration of an RWM access protection register. This flowchart shows an example of power outage processing. This diagram illustrates an example of using the data structure. This flowchart shows an example of a random number update process. This diagram illustrates an example of using the data structure. This flowchart shows an example of a random number update process for changing initial values. This flowchart shows an example of the random number update process for determining initial values. This flowchart shows an example of the process of passing through the start switch. This diagram illustrates an example of using the data structure. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This diagram illustrates an example of using the data structure. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol detection process. This diagram illustrates an example of using the data structure. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for setting special pattern information. This flowchart shows an example of the process for selecting jackpot information data. This diagram illustrates an example of using the data structure. This diagram illustrates an example of using the data structure. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for setting the variation pattern. This is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process for selecting a table of patterns that vary during a hit. This is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process for selecting a table of variable patterns when a loss occurs. This diagram illustrates an example of the configuration of a variation pattern type distribution table. This diagram illustrates an example of the configuration of a variation pattern distribution table. This diagram illustrates an example of the configuration of a variation pattern distribution table. This diagram illustrates an example of the configuration of a variation pattern distribution table. This is a flowchart illustrating an example of a typical pattern processing method. This diagram illustrates an example of using the data structure. This flowchart shows an example of gate switch passage processing. This flowchart shows an example of normal processing for regular symbols. This diagram illustrates an example of using the data structure. This is a front view showing a gaming machine according to an embodiment. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This diagram illustrates the effects control commands. This is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. This is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot types. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received when a prize is won at the start. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining whether a player has entered the competition at the start of the competition. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of a demo performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of a demo performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of a demo performance control process. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the second performance mode, and (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the third performance mode. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the first performance mode. This figure shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns, following Figure 32. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the third performance mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first performance mode, and (B) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the second and third performance modes. This diagram shows the flow of the SP Reach animation in a low base state. This diagram shows the flow of the SP Reach animation in a high base state. (A) is a diagram showing the start and end conditions for displaying the demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the demo movie display. This diagram shows examples of how each part operates during the demo video. This is a diagram illustrating the transitions in the demo performance while waiting for customers. This figure shows an example of how the demo movie display works. This figure shows an example of how the demo movie display works. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display in the first scene (company name), (B) is an example of the display in the fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) is an example of the display in the fourth scene (warning 2). This diagram compares the display patterns of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2), the number of reserved symbols, and the small symbols. This diagram shows the illumination patterns of the lamps corresponding to the game state. (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement of lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A). Figures (A1) to (A8) show examples of operation when a customer waiting demo is performed after the variable display of the first special symbol in a low base state has finished. Figures (A4) to (A5) show the main parts of Figure 47. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a low base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a low base state. Figures (B1) to (B8) show examples of how customer waiting demo effects work in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a high base state. This diagram shows an example of how a pachinko machine operates when it starts up in a cold start state and then a customer waiting demo sequence begins. This is a timing chart showing the sequence of events from when a pachinko machine starts up in a cold start state until the customer waiting demo begins. This diagram shows an example of how a pachinko machine operates when it starts up with a hot start in a low base state, and then a customer waiting demo sequence begins. This timing chart shows the sequence of events from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a low base state, to when the customer waiting demo performance begins. This diagram shows an example of how a pachinko machine operates when it starts up with a hot start in a high base state, and then the customer waiting demo sequence begins. This timing chart shows the sequence of events from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a high base state, to when the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figures (A) to (E) show examples of operation when the demo movie display ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events that occur when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events that occur when the demo movie display ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed, under high base conditions. Figures (A) to (E) show examples of operation when the demo movie display starts and ends upon winning a prize in a low base state. Figures (A) to (G) show details of the high base state of the display mode in Figure 63. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends with the first win in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends when the second start is awarded, under low base conditions. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends with the second start and winning when the game is in a high base state. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends with the first win in a high base state. Figures (A) to (C) show examples of operation when the demo movie display is terminated by steering wheel operation in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events when the demo movie display ends due to steering input in a low base state. Figures (A) to (C) show examples of operation when the demo movie display is terminated by menu operation in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events when a demo movie display ends due to menu operation in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events when the demo movie display ends via menu operation in a high base state. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device in response to a prize win, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of erroneous operation of the payout device in response to a prize win. This figure shows an example of how the system works when a bulb failure error occurs during a customer-waiting demo. This is a diagram to explain priority layers. This diagram shows the process when an error occurs during a customer waiting demo performance that starts in a low base state. This diagram shows the process when an error occurs during a customer waiting demo performance that starts in a high base state. This is a diagram to explain the mechanism of output to the LED driver. This diagram illustrates an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. This diagram illustrates an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management in the child table. This figure shows an example of a parent table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a child table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a grandchild table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a grandchild table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a grandchild table that makes up a lamp data table. This diagram shows the lamp data table used when not playing (only the white flashing button and red flashing button are used during gameplay). Lamp Data Table: Background This diagram shows the settings of the normal parent table. Lamp Data Table: Background This diagram shows the settings of a normal child table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for a typical grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for a typical grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the child table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for the button that lights up white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for the button that lights up white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the button that lights up white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings in the parent table for the button that blinks white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for the button that blinks white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the button that blinks white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings in the parent table for the red blinking button. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for the button that blinks red. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for the button that blinks red. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for initialization notifications. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the child table for initialization notification. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table of the initialization notification. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for errors. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the error child table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table for errors. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. Figures (A1) to (A4) show examples of how text is displayed and how light is emitted in each scene. (A) is a diagram showing examples of actions in the first scene, (B) is in the third scene, and (C) is in the fourth scene. This is a comparison table showing text animation displays. (A) and (B) are diagrams used to explain analogous colors. This diagram illustrates the timing of the demo movie display. Figures (A) to (G) show details of the high base state of the display mode in Figure 63.

(Basic explanation)
First, we will explain the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. In the example shown in Figure 1, they are located on the right side of the game area. Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can each perform variable displays of multiple types of special symbols as special identification information. Special symbols are also called "special symbols." The variable display of special symbols is also called a "special symbol game." Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are constructed using 7-segment LEDs or similar. Special symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9," symbols indicating "-," and other arbitrary lighting patterns. The special symbols may also include patterns where all LEDs are turned off.

"Variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner. Similarly, for other symbols such as performance symbols, small symbols, and regular symbols, "variable display" also refers to the display of multiple types of symbols in a variable manner. Performance symbols are also called decorative symbols or ornamental symbols. Variable display is also called variable display, or simply variable. Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, and transforming, enlarging, or shrinking one or more symbols. Variations may also include flashing the display of a certain symbol. In variable displays of special symbols and regular symbols, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In variable displays of performance symbols, multiple types of performance symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated display, or one or more performance symbols are transformed, enlarged, or shrunk. In variable displays of any symbol, a predetermined symbol is displayed as the final display result. A stopped display is also called a derived display, or simply derived. In variable display, the symbol that is ultimately stopped and displayed is also called the final stop symbol or confirmed symbol. In special symbol games, the final stop symbol is also called the confirmed special symbol. The display result of the variable display includes the display result of the special symbol and is also called the variable display result. The display result of the special symbol is also called the special symbol display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol variation time, which is the variation time of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display time. The special symbol variation time can be set to different times corresponding to the variation patterns of the special symbol, for which multiple patterns are pre-prepared.

The special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols." The special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols." A special symbol game using the first special symbols is also called a "first special symbol game." A special symbol game using the second special symbols is also called a "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs the variable display of special symbols.

A regular symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2. In the example shown in Figure 1, it is located on the left side of the game area. The regular symbol display unit 20 can perform variable displays of regular symbols, which are multiple types of regular identification information distinct from special symbols. Regular symbols are also called "regular symbols." The variable display of regular symbols is also called a "regular symbol game." The regular symbol display unit 20 is constructed using 7-segment LEDs or the like. Regular symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9," symbols indicating "-", and other arbitrary lighting patterns. Regular symbols may include patterns in which some or all of the multiple LEDs are lit, or patterns in which all of the multiple LEDs are turned off. The final stopping symbol in a regular symbol game is also called a confirmed regular symbol. The display result of the regular symbols is also called a regular symbol display result. The execution time during which the regular symbols are variably displayed in a regular symbol game is also called the regular symbol variation time. The regular symbol variation time can be set to different durations corresponding to the variation patterns of the regular symbols, for which multiple patterns are pre-defined.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 may be configured using any mechanism capable of forming any image, such as an LCD (liquid crystal display), organic EL (electroluminescence), dot matrix LED, projector and screen, stereoscopic image projection device, or other similar devices. The image display device 5 can display various types of visual effects. Furthermore, the image display device 5 is not limited to visual effects; it can also display any control-related images, such as inspection images or setting images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of performance symbols can be performed in synchronization with the first special game and the second special game. Performance symbols are display symbols that show numbers, etc., and are multiple types of decorative identification information that are different from special symbols and ordinary symbols. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in Figure 1, there are performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for the "left," "center," and "right," respectively, and variable display of performance symbols is performed in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, for example, by scrolling or updating the performance symbols vertically. Synchronization of the variable display is sufficient if the timing at which the variation of the symbols starts and the timing at which the variation ends and the symbols finally stop are the same for different types of symbols. The final stopped symbol in the variable display of performance symbols is also called a confirmed performance symbol, confirmed decorative symbol, or confirmed ornamental symbol. The variable display of the performance symbols is synchronized with the first and second special symbol games, so the duration of the variable display of the performance symbols is the same as the duration of the special symbol variation.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with display areas capable of displaying performance images corresponding to pending displays and active displays. A pending display corresponds to a variable display that is not yet executed and is pending. An active display corresponds to a variable display that is currently being executed. Pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays. The display area for pending displays is also called the pending display area. The display area for active displays is also called the active display area. The number of pending variable displays is also called the pending memory count. The pending memory count corresponding to the first special game is also called the first pending memory count. The pending memory count corresponding to the second special game is also called the second pending memory count. The sum of the first and second pending memory counts is also called the total pending memory count.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in Figure 1, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. Above the normal symbol display device 20 shown in Figure 1, a normal symbol hold indicator 25C, also composed of multiple LEDs, is provided. The normal symbol hold indicator 25C displays the normal symbol hold memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The normal symbol hold memory count corresponds to the hold memory count for the normal symbol game.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball entry device 6A and a variable prize ball entry device 6B are provided. The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening that is always kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter, by means of a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The variable prize ball entry device 6B forms a second starting prize entry opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a standard electric mechanism solenoid 81 shown in Figure 2, as a standard electric mechanism. The variable prize ball entry device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type mechanism with a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the standard electric mechanism solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the second starting prize entry opening is in a closed state where game balls cannot enter, or in a normally open state where it is difficult for game balls to enter. The variable prize ball entry device 6B, when the standard electric mechanism solenoid 81 is in the ON state, causes the movable wing piece to tilt, thereby opening the second starting prize entry point to either an open state allowing game balls to enter or an enlarged open state facilitating game ball entry. The open state allowing game balls to enter or the enlarged open state facilitating entry is also called the first variable state. The closed state where game balls cannot enter or the normal open state where entry is difficult is also called the second variable state. Note that the variable prize ball entry device 6B only needs to be capable of changing between the first and second variable states, and is not limited to those equipped with an electric tulip-type mechanism.

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed by the prize ball entry device 6A, this is also called a first starting prize. When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B, this is also called a second starting prize. A game ball that enters the first starting prize entry opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in Figure 2. A game ball that enters the second starting prize entry opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in Figure 2. Based on the occurrence of a first starting prize, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as 3, are dispensed, and the first reserved memory count can be updated to increment by 1. However, if the first reserved memory count has reached its upper limit, the first reserved memory count will not be updated even if a first starting prize occurs. When the first reserved memory count is incremented by 1, the first starting condition is met, and the first special symbol game, in which the first special symbol display device 4A variably displays special symbols, becomes executable. Based on the occurrence of a second starting win, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as three, are dispensed, and the second reserve memory count can be updated to increment by one. However, if the second reserve memory count has reached its maximum limit, the second reserve memory count will not be updated even if a second starting win occurs. When the second reserve memory count is incremented by one, the second starting condition is met, and the second special symbol game, in which the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays special symbols, becomes playable.

A general prize entry point 10 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2, which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in Figure 1, general prize entry points 10 are provided at two locations in the lower left of the game area. When a game ball enters either of the general prize entry points 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as 10, are dispensed.

In the game area formed by the game board 2, a first path and a second path are provided as flow paths for the game balls. The first path is mainly provided in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The area to the left of the image display device 5 is also called the left game area or left play area. The area to the right of the image display device 5 is also called the right game area or right play area. The left game area and the right game area can be distinguished, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area or by the arrangement of the game pins. Launching the game ball towards the left game area in order to send the game ball down the first path is also called left-handed play. Launching the game ball towards the right game area in order to send the game ball down the second path is also called right-handed play. The first path is also called the left-handed play path. The second path is also called the right-handed play path. The first and second routes may be composed of different routes, or they may be routes that share a portion of each other.

In response to the operation of the ball launching handle on the ball launching device, game balls are launched from the device and driven into the game area. When a game ball is driven into the game area and guided down the first path to the left-hand game area, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the second path in the right-hand game area. Similarly, when a game ball is driven into the game area and guided down the second path to the right-hand game area, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the first path in the left-hand game area.

The prize ball entry device 6A is installed in the first path in the left-side game area, allowing game balls flowing down the first path to enter. The variable prize ball entry device 6B is installed in the second path in the right-side game area, allowing game balls flowing down the second path to enter. The variable prize ball entry device 6B may also allow game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side game area to enter. The variable prize ball entry device 6B may be positioned so that game balls flowing down the second path in the right-side game area can enter more easily than game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side game area.

The second path in the right-hand game area is provided with a passage gate 41 and a special variable prize ball device 50. The passage gate 41 forms a passage area through which game balls can pass. Game balls that pass through the passage gate 41 are detected by the gate switch 21 shown in Figure 2. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal reserve memory count can be updated, and the variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display 20 becomes possible as a normal symbol game. The passage gate 41 can be configured as a normal symbol activation opening into which game balls can enter. In this case, the gate switch 21 can be configured as a normal symbol activation opening switch capable of detecting game balls that have entered the normal symbol activation opening.

The special variable prize ball device 50, as a special electric mechanism, forms a large prize opening that can be changed between a closed and open state by a large prize opening solenoid 82. The upper part of the special variable prize ball device 50 has a guide passage with a width in the front-to-back direction sufficient for game balls to pass through. This guide passage slopes downward from right to left, and walls are provided on both the front and back sides of the extended passage. A mechanism entrance, which serves as the large prize opening, is formed in the center of the guide passage. In the special variable prize ball device 50, a movable member 52, which can move in the front-to-back direction, is provided as a large prize opening opening/closing member at a position where the large prize opening can be opened and closed. In the special variable prize ball device 50, a fixed member 53 is provided in the portion of the guide passage where the large prize opening is not formed, forming a fixed passage.

The movable member 52 is driven by the large prize opening solenoid 82 and is capable of moving forward and backward to open and close the prize opening, which is the entry point for the prize mechanism. In the special variable prize ball device 50, game balls that enter the interior from the large prize opening are detected by the count switch 23. Inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a V prize area 51 is provided as a prize area through which game balls can pass. In addition, a normal area different from the V prize area 51 is provided inside the special variable prize ball device 50. Above the V prize area 51, a plate-shaped distribution member is provided as a V prize opening opening/closing member, which can switch the V prize area 51 between an open state and a closed state. The distribution member is driven by the specific area solenoid 83 and is capable of moving forward and backward to open and close the V prize area 51. When the V prize area 51 is in the open state, game balls can pass through, and when it is in the closed state, game balls cannot pass through. Game balls that pass through the V-winning area 51 are detected by the specific area switch 24. Game balls that do not pass through the V-winning area 51 pass through the normal area. Both game balls that pass through the V-winning area 51 and game balls that pass through the normal area without passing through the V-winning area 51 are detected by the discharge switch 26 and then discharged to the outside of the special variable prize ball device 50.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with a windmill and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots. Speakers 8L and 8R for playing sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for lighting effects are provided around the periphery of the game area. The game effect lamps 9 include LEDs. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2.

A ball-launching handle is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by the player to launch the game balls towards the game area using the ball-launching device. The ball-launching handle is also called an operating knob. A ball-launching tray is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, which holds game balls dispensed as prize balls and game balls dispensed by a designated ball-dispensing machine, allowing them to be supplied to the ball-launching device. The ball-launching tray is also called the upper tray. Below the upper tray is a prize ball storage tray, where prize balls dispensed when the upper tray is full flow down and are stored. The prize ball storage tray is also called the lower tray.

A stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A can be grasped and tilted by the player, and is equipped with a trigger button that the player can push and pull. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A shown in Figure 2. The push button 31B can be pressed by the player. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B shown in Figure 2. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and push button 31B are used as detection means to detect actions such as player operations, but other detection means may also be used.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started by the regular symbol display 20. However, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period when the previous regular symbol game is in progress, the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be immediately executed, so the regular symbol game based on that passage is held in reserve until a predetermined upper limit, such as "4", is reached. In the regular symbol game, when a specific regular symbol, such as a regular symbol winning symbol, is displayed as a confirmed regular symbol, the display result of the regular symbol becomes "regular symbol win". Conversely, when a regular symbol other than a regular symbol, such as a regular symbol losing symbol, is displayed as a confirmed regular symbol, the display result of the regular symbol becomes "regular symbol loss". When it is a "regular symbol win", the variable prize ball device 6B is opened or wide-open for a predetermined period of time. At this time, the second starting prize entry point opens or expands to an open state.

When a game ball passes through the first starting entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game can be started by the first special symbol display device 4A. When a game ball passes through the second starting entry opening formed in the variable prize ball entry device 6B, the second special symbol game can be started by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, if a special symbol game is in progress, or if the game is controlled to be in a jackpot or minor jackpot state, even if a game ball enters the starting entry opening and a starting entry occurs, the special symbol game based on that starting entry cannot be immediately executed. Therefore, the special symbol game based on that starting entry is held up to a predetermined upper limit, such as "4". In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol, such as a jackpot symbol, is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes "jackpot". In contrast, if a designated special symbol different from the jackpot symbol, such as a minor win symbol, stops and is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol will be "minor win." Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot or minor win symbol, such as a losing symbol, stops and is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol will be "loser." Furthermore, if a special symbol different from the jackpot, minor win, or losing symbol, such as a time-saving symbol, stops and is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol may be "time-saving." The special symbols do not necessarily include time-saving symbols. That is, the display result of the special symbol does not necessarily include "time-saving."

In the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is advantageous for the player. In the jackpot game state, the large prize slot formed in the special variable prize ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until the earlier of the following timings: the expiration of a predetermined period, such as 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, or the timing when the number of game balls that have entered the large prize slot reaches a predetermined number. The predetermined period during which the large prize slot can be controlled to be open is the upper limit period for which the large prize slot can be opened in one round, and is also called the upper limit period of opening. One cycle in which the large prize slot is open in the jackpot game state is called a round or round game. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeated until a predetermined upper limit is reached, such as 15 times or 2 times. In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain prize balls by getting game balls into the large prize slot. Therefore, the jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot state, and the longer the maximum period of play, the more advantageous it is for the player.

When the display result of a special symbol is "Big Win," it includes multiple types of big wins. For example, the opening mode of the big prize slot (such as the number of rounds and the maximum opening period), and the game state after the big win game state (such as normal state, time-saving state, and probability-changing state) can be set to multiple different types, and a big win type is specified corresponding to each setting. These multiple big win types may include some or all of the types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls, or they may include big win types with similar amounts of prize balls. Controlling the game state to a big win based on the display result of a special symbol being "Big Win" is also called a symbol big win, a big win due to a special symbol, a variable display big win, or a direct hit big win.

In the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbol is "minor win," the game is controlled to a minor win game state. In the minor win game state, the large prize slot formed in the special variable prize ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the minor win game state, the large prize slot may be opened in the same opening manner as in the jackpot game state for some jackpot types. The large prize slot only needs to be able to open in the same manner by having the same number of openings and opening period. Alternatively, in the minor win game state, the large prize slot may be opened in a different opening manner than in the jackpot game state. Similar to jackpot types, there may be multiple minor win types when the display result of the special symbol is "minor win." Jackpot types and minor win types are also collectively referred to as win types. The operation of opening and closing the large prize slot in the minor win game state is also called the starting operation. When the game is in a minor win state, the special variable ball entry device 50's large prize entry point opens, and when a game ball passes through the V-entry area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, the conditions for a big win are met, and the game can be controlled to a big win state. The control to a big win state based on a V-entry occurring when a game ball passes through the V-entry area 51 during a minor win state is also called a "minor win via big win."

After a jackpot game state ends, the game state can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variation state, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Furthermore, in the special symbol game, after the special symbol display result is "time-saving," the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without being controlled to a jackpot game state. The time-saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol game, controlled by the second special symbol display device 4B, is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. A game state in which the second special symbol game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to pass through and enter the second starting prize entry point than in the normal state. The control of whether or not the game ball is likely to pass through the second starting prize entry point is also called base control. Base control in the normal state is also called normal base control or low base control. Base control in the time-saving state includes high base control. In addition to high base control, the time-saving state may also include medium base control. Medium base control is a base control system where the game ball is more likely to pass through the second starting prize entry point than with low base control, but less likely to pass through than with high base control. The game state in which medium base control is used is also called the medium base state. The game state in which high base control is used is also called the high base state. High base control is also called high open control.

In the normal state, the medium base state, and the high base state, it is possible to display the time-saving symbol as a result of the special symbol display. However, in the medium base state and the high base state, even if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a result of the special symbol display, no base control based on that time-saving symbol is performed, and no new control to transition to the medium base state or high base state is initiated. In the time-saving state, time-saving control is possible, which shortens the average variable display time compared to the normal state. For this reason, the time-saving state is also called the time-reduced state.

The time-saving state is a state in which the efficiency of special symbol variations, especially the second special symbol, is improved, and is therefore included in the category of special states that are advantageous to the player, distinct from the jackpot game state. When the game state is a probability variation state, in addition to time-saving control, probability variation control is possible, which increases the probability of the special symbol display result being a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. For this reason, the probability variation state is also called a probability variation state. The probability variation state is a state in which the efficiency of special symbol variations is improved and "jackpots" are more likely, so it is included in the category of special states that are advantageous to the player, distinct from the jackpot game state. The time-saving state and probability variation state continue until one of the predetermined termination conditions is met, such as the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games or the game being controlled to the next jackpot game state. The state where the execution of a predetermined number of special symbol games is the termination condition is also called a "count cut." A time-saving state with a count cut is also called a count cut time-saving state. A probability variation state with a count cut is also called a count cut probability variation state.

The normal game state is a game state that is not included in advantageous states such as the jackpot game state, predetermined states such as the minor win game state, or special states such as the time-saving state or the probability variation state. The normal state is a game state in which the probability of the display result being "normal win" in the normal game and the probability of the display result being "jackpot" in the special game are controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko machine 1. The initial setting state of the pachinko machine 1 is the control state after the initial setting process is executed without executing the predetermined recovery process after power-on, for example, when a system reset has been performed.

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called the high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called the low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called the low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is also called the low probability high base state, the probability variation state is also called the high probability high base state, and the normal state is also called the low probability low base state. A state that is both high probability and low base is also called the high probability low base state. Note that pachinko machine 1 may not include the probability variation state as a game state.

After the minor win state ends, there are two possibilities: the game may be controlled to a major win state based on the occurrence of a V-win, or the game state may not change from the state before the minor win state if a V-win does not occur. However, if the display result of the special symbol game is "minor win" and the special symbol game is executed for a predetermined number of times in the count limit, the control of the time-saving state or probability-changing state may end, and the game may return to the normal state. Note that the pachinko machine 1 may not include the minor win state as a game state. That is, the display result of the special symbols may not include "minor win".

The game state may be controlled to a time-saving state if a time-saving condition based on the number of times the variable display is executed is met. Such a time-saving state is also called a rescue time-saving state. The time-saving condition only needs to be met if, after powering on the pachinko machine 1, after a jackpot occurs, or after the display result of the special symbol game becomes "time-saving," the game state is not controlled to a new jackpot game state or time-saving state even after executing the variable display a specific number of times.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. These effects include effects that notify the progress of the game and effects that enhance the excitement of the game. These effects include displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting up the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, vibrating the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, or any combination of some or all of these, and can be executed using any effect device.

The effects that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game include the variable display of effect symbols. In response to the start of the first special game or the second special game, the variable display of effect symbols starts in the "left," "center," and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. When the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result in the first or second special game stops and is displayed, the confirmed effect symbol that will be the display result in the variable display of effect symbols stops and is displayed. The confirmed effect symbol is composed of a combination of three effect symbols corresponding to the "left," "center," and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of effect symbols, the display mode in the variable display of effect symbols may become a reach mode. A reach mode is a mode in which the effect symbols that have stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute part of a jackpot combination, and the variation of the effect symbols that have not yet stopped continues. When the display pattern of the reel symbols in the animation becomes a "reach" pattern, it is also said that a "reach" has been achieved.

The machine can execute a reach animation in response to the variable display of the animation symbols becoming a reach animation. Pachinko machine 1 can execute multiple types of reach animations such that the proportion of "jackpot" results differs depending on the animation animation mode. The proportion of "jackpots" corresponding to the animation animation mode is also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation. Reach animations include, for example, normal reaches and super reaches, which have a higher jackpot reliability than normal reaches. Furthermore, depending on the execution time of the reach animation, it may also include short reaches and long reaches, which have a longer execution time than short reaches.

When the display result of the special symbols is a "jackpot," the confirmed winning symbols, which are predetermined jackpot combinations, are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the winning symbols. For example, identical winning symbols, such as a winning symbol showing the number "7," are lined up and stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in the "left," "center," and "right" winning symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the case of a "probability-increasing jackpot," which is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot game state ends, odd-numbered winning symbols, such as a winning symbol showing the number "7," may be lined up and stopped and displayed. In the case of a "non-probability-increasing jackpot," which is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot game state ends, even-numbered winning symbols, such as a winning symbol showing the number "6," may be lined up and stopped and displayed. A "non-probability-increasing jackpot" is also called a "normal jackpot." In this case, odd-numbered winning symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols. Even-numbered symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols or regular symbols. It is also possible to have a promotion sequence that results in a "probability-increasing jackpot" after a reach sequence using non-probability-increasing symbols.

When the display result of the special symbols is a "minor win," the predetermined combination of winning symbols for the minor win is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, identical symbols, such as symbols showing numbers other than "7," may be displayed together on the predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same winning symbols may be displayed whether the display result of the special symbols is a "big win" or a "minor win."

When the special symbol display result is a "miss," the variable display of the performance symbols may not result in a reach pattern, and the display result may simply stop. In this case, the performance symbol display result will show a confirmed performance symbol that is not a reach combination. A display result where a confirmed performance symbol that is not a reach pattern is simply stopped is also called a "non-reach miss." When the special symbol display result is a "miss," the variable display of the performance symbols may result in a reach pattern, and the display result may stop after the reach animation is executed. In this case, the performance symbol display result will show a confirmed performance symbol that is not a big win combination or a small win combination. A display result where a confirmed performance symbol of a reach combination is simply stopped after a reach pattern has been created is also called a "reach miss."

The Pachinko game machine 1 can execute various effects, including variable display-compatible displays such as hold displays and active displays. In addition, for example, a pre-announcement effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot can be executed while the display of the effect symbols is variable. The pre-announcement effect may include a variable pre-announcement effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-announcement effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot corresponding to the variable display that is currently pending execution. The pre-announcement effect may also be capable of executing a change effect that alters the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays, such as hold displays and active displays, to a mode different from the normal mode.

On the screen of the image display device 5, it may be possible to perform a pseudo-consecutive display by temporarily pausing the variable display of the display symbols during the variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making one variable display appear as multiple variable displays. The pseudo-consecutive display may be set so that the probability of a big win is higher when the number of re-spins (after temporarily pausing and then resuming the variable display of the display symbols) is greater than when the number of re-spins is less. The variable display of the display symbols may include cases where the pseudo-consecutive display is performed before the reach state is reached, and cases where the pseudo-consecutive display is performed after the reach state is reached. Furthermore, the pseudo-consecutive display may be possible at multiple timings during the variable display of the display symbols.

During control of a jackpot game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot-inducing animation that notifies the player of the jackpot state. This animation may include an animation that notifies the number of rounds and an upgrade animation that suggests or notifies an improvement in the advantage level of the jackpot state. During control of a minor win game state, it is possible to execute a minor win-inducing animation that notifies the player of the minor win state. By executing a common animation during both the jackpot and minor win state control, it may be possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize whether the current game state is a jackpot or a minor win.

In non-game states where no special feature games or other activities are being played and the game is not progressing, demonstration images can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. These demonstration images are also called demo images. The display of demo images is also called a demo display. The performance using the demo display is also called a customer-waiting demo performance.

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17, and the like, as shown in Figure 2. In addition, various other boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are located on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The progress of the game includes the execution of special symbol games with reserve management, the execution of regular symbol games with reserve management, and the execution of various game states such as jackpot game states, minor jackpot game states, time-saving states, and probability variation states, as well as transitions between game states. The main board 11 comprises a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.

The game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and can be configured to include a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. Some or all of the ROM 101, RAM 102, and random number circuit 104 may be externally connected to the game control microcomputer 100, or they may be built into the game control microcomputer 100. The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The various switches for detecting game balls include, for example, a gate switch 21, starter switches such as the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and an outlet switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed through or entered, causing the switch to be turned on. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply solenoid drive signals from the game control microcomputer 100 to the ordinary electric prize solenoid 81, the large prize winning slot solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signals can be any signals that turn on each solenoid.

The ROM 101 in the game control microcomputer 100 is a non-volatile memory device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data stored in the ROM 101 includes variable patterns, performance control commands, and table data that constitutes tables used for various settings, judgments, and decisions. The RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is a temporary memory device that provides a work area and a stack for saving data used for game control. The RAM 102 should be a backup RAM that saves the contents of part or all of the storage area so that they can be recovered within a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The RAM 102 is also called RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of the RAM 102 includes a storage area capable of storing various data used for game control, such as counters, timers, buffers, and storage areas for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 can control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 by executing processes corresponding to the programs stored in the ROM 101.

The random number circuit 104 in the game control microcomputer 100 counts numerical data representing various random values used to control the progress of the game, in an updatable manner. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. Some or all of the game random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or by software such as a computer program executed by the CPU 103.

Figure 3 shows an example of random numbers used for gameplay. The random numbers used for gameplay include MR1-1 for determining special symbols, MR1-2 for winning symbols, MR1-3 as the initial value for winning symbols, MR2-1 for regular winning symbols, MR2-2 as the initial value for regular winning symbols, MR3-1 for regular symbol variation patterns, MR3-2 for selecting losing animations, MR3-3 for selecting variation pattern types, and MR3-4 for variation patterns.

The random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols is used to determine whether the display result of a special symbol is a "jackpot" or a "minor win". The random number MR1-2 for winning symbols is used to select a confirmed special symbol from multiple special symbols, such as the jackpot symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "jackpot", or the minor win symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "minor win". The random number MR1-3, which is the initial value for winning symbols, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR1-2. The random number MR2-1 for normal symbol winning symbols is used to select a confirmed normal symbol from multiple normal symbols to be displayed when the display result is a "normal symbol win" in the variable display of normal symbols. The random number MR2-2, which is the initial value for normal symbol winning symbols, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR2-1. Random number MR3-1 for normal symbol variation patterns is used to determine the variation pattern of the normal symbols from one of several pre-prepared patterns. Random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation is used to select whether or not the variable display of the animation symbols will result in a "reach" when the display result of the special symbols is a "lose". Random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type is used to select the variation pattern type of the special symbols. The variation pattern type of the special symbols is a group of special symbol variation patterns that have been pre-classified based on, for example, the animation type during the variable display of the animation symbols, and it is sufficient for it to be configured to include one or more variation patterns. Random number MR3-4 for variation patterns is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbols.

The CPU 103 reads and references various tables from the ROM 101 when performing various judgments and decisions based on random values, such as numerical data indicating the value of a random number used for gameplay. Even when random values are not used, the CPU may read and reference the necessary tables from the ROM 101 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings.

The I/O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100 includes an input port into which various signals are input and an output port into which various signals are output. The various signals input to the I/O 105's input port only need to include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110. The various signals output from the I/O 105's output port only need to include signals for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal symbol hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals for driving the normal electric mechanism solenoid 81, the big prize slot solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc.

The main board 11, as part of its operation to control the progress of the game using the game control microcomputer 100, outputs performance control commands corresponding to the progress of the game, which can be transmitted to the performance control board 12. Performance control commands are commands that specify or notify the progress of the game, etc. Performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. Performance control commands should include commands that specify various decision results on the main board 11, such as the display result of the special feature game, the type of win, the variation pattern, etc.; commands that specify the status of the game, such as the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big prize slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved items, the game state, etc.; and commands that specify the occurrence of errors, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and has the function of controlling the performance based on the received commands. The performance control board 12 can control various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, such as the driving of the movable parts 32, and also includes various notifications, such as error notifications and power outage recovery notifications. The performance control board 12 comprises a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs processing to control the execution of performances in conjunction with the display control unit 123 by executing programs stored in the ROM 121. This processing is necessary to realize the various functions of the performance control board 12 and includes determining which performances to execute. The CPU 120 for performance control uses various data stored in the ROM 121, such as data from various tables, and uses the RAM 122 as its main memory. The CPU 120 for performance control may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute performances based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and any signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation is acceptable.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and controls the execution of effects mainly related to display based on the execution instructions for effects from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying video signals corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies sound specification signals to the sound control board 13 and lamp signals to the lamp control board 14. The sound specification signals specify the sound to be output by speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signals specify the lighting and extinguishing modes of the game effect lamp 9. By supplying sound specification signals and lamp signals, it becomes possible to output sound from speakers 8L and 8R and to light up or extinguish the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be capable of supplying signals to operate the movable body 32 to the motor or solenoid of the movable body 32, or to the driver circuit that drives the movable body 32. A separate driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided, in addition to the performance control board 12.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values used to control the execution of various effects. The random numbers used to control the execution of effects are also called effect random numbers. These effect random numbers may be updated by software, such as a computer program, executed by the effect control CPU 120. When the effect control CPU 120 performs various judgments and decisions based on random values, such as numerical data representing the value of the effect random numbers, it reads and refers to various tables from the ROM 121. Even when random values are not used, the effect control CPU 120 may read and refer to the necessary tables from the ROM 121 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings.

The I/O 125 comprises an input port for receiving, for example, performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for detection signals supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for detection signals supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output port of the I/O 125 may include an output terminal for video signals supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for sound specification signals supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for lamp signals supplied to the lamp control board 14.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the sound specification signal from the display control unit 123, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the sound specified by the sound specification signal from speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal from the display control unit 123, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns the game effect lamp 9 on or off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the audio output from speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on signals from the display control unit 123. Note that the control of audio output and turning on and off of lamps, such as supplying sound specification signals and lamp signals, and the control of the movable body 32, such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32, may be partially or entirely executed by the performance control CPU 120. Other boards besides the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As shown in the example configuration in Figure 2, multiple sub-boards may be provided for each function, or, unlike the example configuration in Figure 2, one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source such as a commercial power supply to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, DC 12V or DC 5V). The pachinko game machine 1 can be switched on and off by operating the power switch 91. The switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 receives the reset signal, power off signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using any of the following: a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, let's explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the CPU 103 executes the main processing for game control.

Figure 4 is a flowchart of the main game control process P_MAIN executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. When the main game control process P_MAIN shown in Figure 4 is started, the CPU 103 executes the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON (step S1), followed by the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK (step S2). The power supply start response process P_POWER_ON in step S1 can perform initial settings of the game control microcomputer 100 in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko game machine 1. The initial settings of the game control microcomputer 100 should include initialization of output ports, setting of interrupt vectors, setting of built-in device registers, and setting of specific registers. The RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2 includes a checksum calculation process. The checksum data obtained as a result of the process is compared with the data stored in the checksum buffer. If the two data match, it is determined that the contents of the RAM 102 are normal.

Next, it is determined whether or not predetermined recovery conditions have been met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in the off state, there is normal stored data in the checksum buffer, and the stored contents in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM, are normal. When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, for example, if the clear switch 92 on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery conditions have not been met. The checksum buffer stores the checksum data calculated by the checksum calculation process when the backup determination time was measured by the backup monitoring timer during the previous power outage. If the timing value of the backup monitoring timer does not match a specific value corresponding to the backup determination time, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery conditions have not been met. The backup data can be any stored data in the game work area of the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, based on the results of the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2, which confirmed or inspected the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors, it is necessary to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET is executed (Step S4). The backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET uses the backup command transmission table to enable the transmission of corresponding performance control commands from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 during backup. Furthermore, the backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET enables initialization by clearing the process code, timer, counter, and flags specified in the backup setting table.

If the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization setting process P_INIT_SET is executed (Step S5). The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET makes it possible to transfer clear data to the game work area, which is the working area in RAM 102. This initializes the game work area in RAM 102. Then, the initialization setting process P_INIT_SET uses the initialization command transmission table to enable the transmission of corresponding performance control commands from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 during initialization. Furthermore, the initialization setting process P_INIT_SET enables initialization by clearing the buffers, timers, pointers, and counters specified by the initialization setting table.

Subsequently, the control start setting process P_STACON is executed (step S6). The control start setting process P_STACON may include a wait process. The wait process ensures that sub-boards such as the performance control board 12 can be reliably started up by executing a loop process until a set waiting time has elapsed. The control start setting process P_STACON may also include a specific count command transmission process or a chip individual number information command transmission process. The specific count command transmission process enables the transmission of a performance control command specifying the count value of a specific count counter from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the power is turned on. The specific count counter is provided at a predetermined address in the RAM 102 and only needs to be able to count the remaining number of executions until the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number corresponding to the time reduction condition. The chip individual number information command transmission process enables the transmission of a performance control command specifying the stored value of the chip individual number register from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The individual chip number register should be included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100 and should be capable of storing a different value assigned to each chip as the individual chip number.

The control start setting process P_STACON may include startup-time out-of-area processing. The startup-time out-of-area processing is executed by reading a program stored in the non-game program area of the ROM 101 in response to the start-up of the pachinko machine 1 due to the start of power supply. The startup-time out-of-area processing may be, for example, a performance display RWM initial value setting process. The performance display RWM initial value setting process allows setting initial values for initial display using the 7-segment LEDs that constitute the performance display monitor. The performance display monitor may be, for example, mounted on the main board 11 and capable of displaying information related to the setting value and base value. The setting value can be changed to one of several levels, such as six levels, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a setting change state where its settings can be changed, allowing the probability of the special symbol display result being a "jackpot" to be set. The base value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls dispensed when a game ball passes through each prize slot (such as the starting prize slot, general prize slot, and major prize slot) by the number of game balls launched into the game area.

Following the control start setting process P_STACON in step S6, the timer interrupt counter is set (step S7). In step S7, the PTC counter output value is set so that a periodic timer interrupt occurs at predetermined intervals, for example, every 4 milliseconds. Afterward, the main game control process P_MAIN enters a loop. In this loop, interrupts are disabled (step S8), the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT is executed (step S9), the loop-out-of-loop processing P_REGOUT is executed (step S10), interrupts are enabled (step S11), and the process returns to step S8. Then, when the interrupt is enabled, each time an interrupt request signal is input from the PTC to the CPU 103, the CPU 103 becomes capable of executing the timer interrupt process. This allows the CPU 103 to execute the timer interrupt process at predetermined intervals, for example, every 4 milliseconds.

Figure 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control. In the timer interrupt process P_PCT shown in Figure 5, the power-off process P_POWER_OFF is executed (step S51). Next, it is determined whether the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is "0" or not (step S52). The fraudulent activity monitoring flag is set to "1," corresponding to the ON state, when magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor or when radio waves are detected by the frame radio wave sensor. In all other cases, the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is set to "0," corresponding to the OFF state.

If the fraud monitoring flag is "1" (step S52; No), the game stop process P_GAME_STOP is executed (step S53). The game stop process P_GAME_STOP only needs to initialize the output port and turn off the connection confirmation signal output. The connection confirmation signal is transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board, and if it is in the off state, the payout process on the payout control board is stopped.

If the fraud monitoring flag is "0" (Step S52; Yes), the switch process P_SW is executed (Step S54), the switch error notification process P_CON_CHK is executed (Step S55), the random number update process P_RANDOM is executed (Step S56), and the random number update process for initial value determination P_TFINIT is executed (Step S57). Furthermore, the special symbol process P_TPROC is executed (Step S58), the normal symbol process P_FPROC is executed (Step S59), the information output process P_JYOUHOU is executed (Step S60), the prize ball process P_PAY is executed (Step S61), and the display process P_HYOUZI is executed (Step S62). In addition, other timer interrupt handling processes are executed (Step S63). After that, the timer interrupt process P_PCT is terminated after the interrupt enable is set (Step S64).

Step S51, the power-off process P_POWER_OFF, checks the power confirmation signal transmitted from the power supply board 17 and enables the execution of checksum calculation processing during power-off. Step S54, the switch process P_SW, checks the state of the input port and enables updating of the switch-on buffer, etc. Step S55, the switch error notification process P_CON_CHK, updates the count value of the sensor-on counter specified by, for example, the switch error notification judgment table, and enables error notification display when the count value reaches the sensor abnormal error judgment value. Step S56, the random number update process P_RANDOM, enables software-based random numbers among the random numbers used for gameplay to be updated by software. Step S57, the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT, enables software-based random numbers among the random numbers used for gameplay to be updated as the initial random number value.

Step S58, the special symbol process processing P_TPROC, includes processing related to the variable display of special symbols and the game state, such as managing the execution and holding of special symbol games, controlling the jackpot game state and the minor jackpot game state, and controlling the game state. Step S59, the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC, includes processing related to the variable display of normal symbols and the state control of the second start prize slot, such as managing the execution and holding of normal symbol games based on detection signals from the gate switch 21, and controlling the opening and closing of the variable prize ball device 6B based on "normal symbol win". Step S60, the information output processing P_JYOUHOU, sets the information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, such as jackpot information, start information, and probability variation information. Jackpot information indicates the number of times a jackpot has occurred. Start information indicates the number of start prizes. Probability variation information indicates the number of times the game entered a probability variation state. Step S61's prize ball processing P_PAY includes prize ball command output counter increment processing and prize ball control processing. The prize ball command output counter increment processing uses the prize ball count table to determine if a switch is ON. Upon ON detection, it updates the prize ball command output counter and the prize ball information output counter. The prize ball control processing selects the processing corresponding to the prize ball process code and controls the system to dispense prize balls based on the detection of game balls. Step S62's display processing P_HYOUZI configures the display settings for the first reserve indicator 25A, the second reserve indicator 25B, the general-purpose reserve indicator 25C, and various other status indicator lights.

Figure 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S58 shown in Figure 5 as the special pattern process P_TPROC. In the special pattern process P_TPROC, the CPU 103 sets the first start prize response flag (step S101). The first start prize response flag setting reflects the state of the first start port switch 22A included in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103 by executing a logical operation instruction, etc. At this time, if the zero flag in the flag register is on, it indicates that the first start prize response flag is off. Conversely, if the zero flag is off, it indicates that the first start prize response flag is on. Next, the first start port prize table is set by a transfer instruction to set the table pointer (step S102). After that, it is determined whether or not the first start prize response flag is on (step S103). If the flag for the first start-up prize is ON (Step S103; Yes), the start-up switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON is executed (Step S104).

If the first start-up prize flag is off in step S103 (step S103; No), or after the start-up switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON in step S104, the second start-up prize flag is set (step S105). The second start-up prize flag is set by reflecting the state of the second start-up switch 22B contained in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103 through the execution of a logical operation instruction, etc. At this time, if the zero flag in the flag register is on, it indicates that the second start-up prize flag is off. Conversely, if the zero flag is off, it indicates that the second start-up prize flag is on. Next, the second start-up prize table is set by a transfer instruction to set the table pointer (step S106). After that, it is determined whether or not the second start-up prize flag is on (step S107). If the flag for the second start-up prize is ON (step S107; Yes), the start-up switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON is executed (step S108).

Step 104, the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON, uses the first start gate entry table set in step S102 to update the first reserve memory count and the total reserve memory count by 1 if the first reserve memory count is less than the upper limit. It then extracts the random numbers MR1-1 for special symbol determination, MR3-2 for losing animation selection, MR3-3 for variation pattern type selection, and MR3-4 for variation pattern, stores them in their respective random number buffers, and transfers them to the first special symbol reserve buffer. Furthermore, using the first reserve memory information specification command transmission table, the first reserve memory information specification command, which specifies the first reserve memory count, is made available for transmission from the main board 11 to the animation control board 12. Finally, a value indicating "1" as the start gate entry specification value is stored in the start gate entry buffer.

In step S108, the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON uses the second start gate entry table set in step S106 to update the second reserve memory count and the total reserve memory count by 1 if the second reserve memory count is less than the upper limit. It then extracts the random numbers MR1-1 for special symbol determination, MR3-2 for losing animation selection, MR3-3 for variation pattern type selection, and MR3-4 for variation pattern, stores them in their respective random number buffers, and transfers them to the second special symbol reserve buffer. Furthermore, using the second reserve memory information specification command transmission table, the second reserve memory information specification command, which specifies the second reserve memory count, is made available for transmission from the main board 11 to the animation control board 12. Finally, a value indicating "2" as the start gate entry specification value is stored in the start gate entry buffer.

In steps S104 and S108, a common start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON can be executed. However, the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON in step S104 uses the first start gate entry table set in step S102, while the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the second start gate entry table set in step S106. Thus, the common start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON is executed using different start gate entry tables. Therefore, different data settings and controls are possible through common processing depending on whether the game ball enters the first start gate entry or the second start gate entry. Note that the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON may include entry animation processing using extracted random numbers for gameplay.

If the second start-up prize-winning flag is off in step S107 (step S107; No), or after the start-up switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON in step S108, the special symbol process processing jump table is set by a transfer command that sets a pointer (step S109). The special symbol process processing jump table is an address management table that allows the selection and execution of processing corresponding to the read value of the special symbol process code. The special symbol process code can be updated to one of 00[H] to 0B[H] in accordance with the progress of game control in the pachinko game machine 1, and is also called the special symbol process code. Here, [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. Note that [B] may also indicate a binary number.

Following step S109, a transfer command to read stored data loads the special symbol process code (step S110). Next, by executing the 2-byte data selection process P_ABXEXEC (step S111), the address of the process selected corresponding to the special symbol process code is obtained. This obtained address is set as a pointer. After this, a subroutine call command executes the process pointed to by the pointer (step S112), making the process selected corresponding to the special symbol process code executable. Once the selected process completes and a return command returns to the special symbol process process P_TPROC, this special symbol process process P_TPROC also terminates, and a return command returns to the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT.

Figure 7 shows an example configuration TT01 of the special symbol process processing jump table used in the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The special symbol process processing jump table is configured to include table data that can be set in an internal register of the CPU 103, which is used as a pointer, to the address of the processing selected in accordance with the special symbol process code. The special symbol process processing jump table of configuration example TT01 includes the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL when the special symbol process code is 00[H], the special symbol variation processing P_TSTART when the special symbol process code is 01[H], the special symbol stop processing P_TSTOP when the special symbol process code is 02[H], the small win opening pre-processing P_TLFAN when the special symbol process code is 03[H], the small win opening in-processing P_TLOPEN when the special symbol process code is 04[H], and the small win opening post-processing P_TLCLSF when the special symbol process code is 05[H]. This includes table data that allows you to set the address values corresponding to the following processes as pointers: P_TLOUT (waiting for small win ball discharge when the alternate symbol process code is 06[H]), P_TLEND (small win termination process when the special symbol process code is 07[H]), P_TINT (pre-opening process for the big prize slot when the special symbol process code is 08[H]), P_TOPEN (during big prize slot opening process when the special symbol process code is 09[H]), P_TCLSF (post-opening process for the big prize slot when the special symbol process code is 0A[H]), and P_TEND (big win termination process when the special symbol process code is 0B[H]).

The special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL enables the following: determining whether or not to start the special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored hold information, determining the special symbol display result using the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination, determining the confirmed special symbol to be stopped in the variable display of special symbols, and determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol display result includes "Big Win," "Small Win," "Miss," etc. If it is determined to be a "Big Win," it is decided to control the game to a Big Win game state, which is an advantageous state for the player. Also, if the special symbol display result is a "Big Win," it is determined which of several types of Big Win game states, each with a different degree of advantage for the player, will be controlled to correspond to the Big Win symbol that becomes the confirmed special symbol. Therefore, by executing the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the game to a favorable state for the player, and can decide which of several types of favorable states, each with a different degree of advantage for the player, to control the game to. Furthermore, by executing the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, the CPU 103 can determine one of several types of variation patterns.

The special symbol variation process P_TSTART measures the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, enabling a determination of whether the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed. The special symbol stop process P_TSTOP measures the elapsed time since the special symbol stopped varying in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, enabling a determination of whether the symbol stop time has elapsed. The symbol stop time only needs to be set as the time for displaying the special symbol as stopped when the special symbol variation time is determined to have elapsed in the special symbol variation process P_TSTART. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, the special symbol process code is updated and various settings are performed in accordance with the special symbol display result. For example, it would suffice if the special symbol display result is "Big Win" and the special symbol process code can be updated to 08[H], if the special symbol display result is "Minor Win" and the special symbol process code can be updated to 03[H], and if the special symbol display result is "Loss" and the special symbol process code can be updated to 00[H].

The following processes control the progress of the game during a minor win: P_TLFAN (pre-opening), P_TLOPEN (during opening), P_TLCLSF (post-opening), P_TLOUT (waiting for minor win ball discharge), and P_TLEND (end of minor win). The following processes control the progress of the game during a major win: P_TINT (pre-opening), P_TOPEN (during opening), P_TCLSF (post-opening), and P_TEND (end of major win).

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board 17 or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control processing.

Figure 8 is a flowchart of the main processing S_MAIN for performance control executed by the performance control CPU 120 on the performance control board 12. When the main processing S_MAIN for performance control shown in Figure 8 is started, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control initialization process S_INIT (step S71). The performance control initialization process S_INIT includes clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the timer circuit mounted on the performance control board 12. Next, the initial operation control process S_SYOKI is executed (step S72). The initial operation control process S_SYOKI makes it possible to control the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as controlling the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and performing predetermined operation checks. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time has elapsed, for example, 2 [ms (milliseconds)], based on the register settings for the timer circuit. The timer interrupt flag is set to off (step S73; No), and the program waits by repeating step S73.

When the timer interrupt flag is turned ON (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned OFF (step S74), the command analysis process S_COMMAND is executed (step S75), the performance control process S_CPROC is executed (step S76), the random number update process for performances S_RANDOM is executed (step S77), and the performance output process S_OUT is executed (step S78). Then, other timer interrupt handling processes are executed (step S79), and the process returns to step S73.

The command analysis process S_COMMAND in step S75 enables the reading of performance control commands stored in the performance control command receiving buffer, and the setting and control corresponding to the read performance control commands. By executing the command analysis process S_COMMAND, the performance control CPU 120 can update stored data indicating the state of flags, stored data in registers, and other arbitrary stored data in the working area of RAM 122 in response to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. The performance control process S_CPROC in step S76 enables the execution of performances using various performance devices, including, for example, the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, the output of sound from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the drive control of the movable body 32. The control content of performances using various performance devices should be able to be determined, decided, and set based on performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the execution results of processing by the performance control CPU 120. Step S77, the S_RANDOM process for updating the random numbers used for performance effects, makes at least a portion of the random numbers used for performance effects on the performance control board 12 updatable by executing a software program.

Figure 9(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S76 shown in Figure 8, as the performance control process S_CPROC. The performance control CPU 120 executes the pre-read performance setting process S_SAKI_SET in the performance control process (step S151). The pre-read performance setting process S_SAKI_SET enables judgment, decision, and setting regarding the execution of pre-read notification performances, for example, based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 at the time of starting and winning. Furthermore, the pre-read performance setting process S_SAKI_SET enables updating the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

In step S151, after the pre-read animation setting process S_SAKI_SET, the animation control process jump table is set by a transfer command that sets a pointer (step S152). The animation control process jump table is an address management table that allows the selection and execution of a process corresponding to the read value of the animation control process code. The animation control process code can be updated to one of 00[H] to 0A[H] in accordance with the progress of animation control in the pachinko game machine 1, and is also called the animation process code. The animation control process code is loaded by a transfer command to read stored data (step S153). The address of the process to be selected corresponding to the thus acquired animation control process code is set in the animation control pointer (step S154). Therefore, by executing the process pointed to by the animation control pointer (step S115), the process selected corresponding to the animation control process code becomes executable.

Figure 9(B) shows an example configuration TT02 of the performance control process jump table used in the performance control process S_CPROC. The performance control process jump table is configured to include table data that can be set in a register used as a performance control pointer, which contains the address of the process selected in accordance with the performance control process code. The jump table for the performance control process in configuration example TT02 includes table data that allows setting address values corresponding to the following processes in the performance control pointer: waiting for a variation pattern command when the performance control process code is 00 [H], starting the performance symbol variation when the performance control process code is 01 [H], the performance symbol variation in progress when the performance control process code is 02 [H], stopping the performance symbol variation when the performance control process code is 03 [H], displaying a minor win when the performance control process code is 04 [H], opening a minor win when the performance control process code is 05 [H], ending the minor win performance when the performance control process code is 06 [H], displaying a major win when the performance control process code is 07 [H], processing during a round when the performance control process code is 08 [H], processing after a round when the performance control process code is 09 [H], and ending the major win performance when the performance control process code is 0A [H].

The variable pattern command reception waiting process makes it possible to determine whether or not a variable pattern specification command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 has been received. If it is determined that a variable pattern specification command has been received, the performance control process code is updated to 01[H], which corresponds to the performance symbol variation start process. If it is determined that no variable pattern specification command has been received, the demo display becomes controllable. The performance symbol variation start process makes it possible to start the variation-time performance corresponding to the special feature game. For example, in response to the variable pattern command transmitted from the main board 11, it makes it possible to select the performance pattern to be used to control the variation-time performance and to start updating the performance process timer that measures the performance execution time. The performance symbol variation in progress process makes it possible to control the switching timing of each performance element that constitutes the performance pattern, and makes it possible to determine whether or not the performance execution time has elapsed based on the timing value of the performance process timer. If it is determined that the performance execution time has elapsed, the performance control process code is updated to 03[H], which corresponds to the performance symbol variation stop process. The symbol variation stop process enables termination control of the variation-based performance and display control of the performance result corresponding to the confirmed special symbol, based on the fulfillment of the termination conditions of the variation-based performance, such as the expiration of the performance execution time or the receipt of the performance symbol confirmation command. At this time, the performance control process code is updated and various settings are configured in accordance with the display result of the variable display. For example, if the display result of the variable display is "Big Win," the performance control process code can be updated to 07[H]; if the display result of the variable display is "Minor Win," the performance control process code can be updated to 04[H]; and if the display result of the variable display is "Loss," the performance control process code can be updated to 00[H].

The minor win display processing, minor win opening processing, and minor win ending animation processing are processes that control the progress of animations corresponding to the minor win game state. The big win display processing, round processing, round post-processing, and big win ending animation processing are processes that control the progress of animations corresponding to the big win game state.

(Variations of basic explanations, etc.)
The pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, functions, processes, and operations described in the basic description and other descriptions, and is subject to various modifications and applications. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to possess all the technical features shown in the embodiments, and may have some of the configurations described in the embodiments so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. When a subordinate concept is described in an embodiment, a higher-level invention using related or similar matters, or a higher-level invention using common properties, is included in the present invention and may have some of the structures and characteristics described in the embodiments so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be a payout-type game machine that dispenses a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning combinations, or it may be a sealed-type game machine that encloses game media and awards points upon winning combinations.

During the variable display of the special symbol, only one type of symbol may be displayed, such as a "-" symbol, and the variable display may repeatedly show and unshow this symbol. Alternatively, one type of symbol may be displayed during the variable display, and this symbol may not be displayed when the variable display stops. For example, the display result may be that the "-" symbol is not displayed, resulting in a non-display state where the special symbol is not shown.

The pachinko game machine 1 may have a configuration in which the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change in response to multiple setting values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol processing, the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate may be changed by using different jackpot determination values for each set setting value. As a specific example, the setting value can be set to one of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this case, if the setting value is set to 6, it is the most advantageous for the player, and the advantage decreases in stages as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The probability of winning a jackpot may remain constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 only needs to be configured to allow the player to set one of several setting values that offer different levels of advantage. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be notified by a setting value specification command transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. During the execution of the variable display, a setting suggestion performance that hints at the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executed at a predetermined rate. The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1; for example, it may also suggest whether or not the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed. The setting suggestion performance may also be able to suggest the probability of winning a jackpot through an arbitrary performance, as well as provide a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1.

Instead of providing some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player, different from the jackpot game state, may be provided. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variation state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state may be provided. Furthermore, as an advantageous state, suggestions may be provided regarding a state in which any game value advantageous to the player is granted, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

The invention relating to gaming machines is not limited to pachinko machines, but can also be appropriately applied to slot machines. A slot machine can execute a game in which, after inserting tokens and setting a predetermined bet, multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the player's operation of a lever, and when the symbols are stopped according to the player's operation of a stop button, a predetermined number of tokens are paid out to the player if the combination of stopped symbols matches a specific combination. In a slot machine, a favorable state for the player only needs to include one or more of the so-called bonuses, such as a big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, or CZ.

The programs and data for realizing various controls, including the progress of the game and the execution of effects, may be distributed and provided to the computer device included in the game machine, such as the pachinko game machine 1, via a removable recording medium, or they may be distributed and provided by being pre-installed on the storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the system may be equipped with a communication processing unit that can connect to external devices on a network via a communication line, and distribution and provision may be possible by downloading the programs and data from those external devices. The execution methods for the game and effects may also vary; they may be executable by attaching a removable recording medium, by temporarily storing the downloaded programs and data in internal memory, by directly executing them using hardware resources on external devices on a network connected via a communication line, or by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

When comparing various percentages, such as the percentage of processing or data decisions, or the percentage of performance executions, expressions like "high," "low," or "different" may include cases where one of the percentages is "0%" or "100%." For example, one of the decision results or executions may include cases where there is "0%" of a decision or execution, or cases where there is "100%" of a decision or execution.

(Explanation of feature section 01AK)
Figure 10-1 shows an example configuration of the game control microcomputer 100 with respect to feature section 01AK. The game control microcomputer 100 of feature section 01AK is configured with ROM 101, RAM 102, CPU 103, as well as an external bus interface 131, a clock circuit 132, a unique information storage circuit 133, a reset controller 134, an interrupt controller 135, a timer circuit 136, an address decode circuit 137, a free-run counter 138, and a serial communication circuit 139. The random number circuit 104 shown in Figure 2 is configured to include a 16-bit random number circuit 104A and an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The I/O 105 shown in Figure 2 is configured to include a PIP (Parallel Input Port) 105A and a POP (Parallel Output Port) 105B.

The external bus interface 131 is a bus interface that provides interface functions between the external bus and internal bus of the chip constituting the game control microcomputer 100, as well as functions for controlling the direction of the address bus, data bus, and various control signals. For example, the external bus interface 131 is connected to an external memory or external input/output device attached to the game control microcomputer 100, and should be capable of sending and receiving address signals, data signals, and various control signals to and from these external devices. The external bus interface 131 may also include an internal resource access control circuit that controls access to the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 from external devices.

The clock circuit 132 can generate the internal system clock SCLK using the oscillation signal input to the external control clock terminal EXC. The external control clock terminal EXC may receive a control clock generated by a control clock generation circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100. The internal system clock SCLK generated by the clock circuit 132 can be supplied to various circuits in the game control microcomputer 100, such as the CPU 103, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. Furthermore, the internal system clock SCLK can be output to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the system clock output terminal CLKO. Alternatively, the output of the internal system clock SCLK to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 may be restricted to make it difficult to determine the operating state of the game control microcomputer 100 from the outside.

The unique information storage circuit 133 can store multiple types of unique information, such as internal information of the game control microcomputer 100. For example, the unique information storage circuit 133 may store ROM codes, chip individual numbers, and ID numbers as unique information different for each chip in the game control microcomputer 100. The ROM code is numerical data that can be generated from stored data in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. The chip individual number and ID number are numbers assigned to the game control microcomputer 100 during manufacturing, and represent different numerical values for each chip. The chip individual number may be readable by a user program such as a game program, while the ID number may be set to be unreadable by the user program. The unique information storage circuit 133 may be included in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, or it may be included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100.

The reset controller 134 can control various resets that occur inside or outside the game control microcomputer 100. The resets controllable by the reset controller 134 include system resets and user resets. A system reset occurs when the input signal to the external system reset terminal XSRST is low for a certain period of time. A user reset occurs due to predetermined factors, such as the occurrence of a timeout signal from the watchdog timer 134A or the occurrence of an "IAT" (Independent Attack) event. The reset controller 134 includes the watchdog timer 134A. The watchdog timer 134A can set a timer value corresponding to the monitoring time, enables a countdown that periodically decrements the timer value by 1, and can output a timeout signal to reset and restart the game control microcomputer 100 when the timer value becomes "0" and a timeout occurs. This allows the watchdog timer 134A to measure the monitoring time and reset the game control microcomputer 100 when the monitoring time has elapsed. The watchdog timer 134A can be configured to enable or disable its operation according to, for example, a game program.

The interrupt controller 135 can control various interrupt requests that occur inside or outside the game control microcomputer 100. The interrupts controllable by the interrupt controller 135 include the non-maskable interrupt NMI and the maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 103 is in an interrupt-disabled state, and occurs when the input signal of the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (shared with input port PI6) is at a low level for a certain period of time. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt whose acceptance can be permitted or prohibited by a setting instruction of the CPU 103, and allows for the execution of multiple interrupts by setting priority. The causes of the maskable interrupt INT include several types of interrupt causes, such as the input signal of the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (shared with input port PI5) being low level for a certain period, a timeout occurring in the timer circuit 136, and numerical data representing a random value being stored in the random value register by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A or the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. It is sufficient if some or all of these causes can be configured.

The timer circuit 136 includes a Programmable Timer Counter (PTC) corresponding to three channels PTC0 to PTC2, enabling real-time interrupt generation and time measurement. Each channel PTC0 to PTC2 of the timer circuit 136 only needs to be able to update the timer value in response to signal changes in the count clock, such as the falling edge timing when the clock signal changes from a high level to a low level, using a count clock generated based on the internal system clock SCLK.

The address decoding circuit 137 can decode various signals acquired from each functional block within the game control microcomputer 100 and can output a chip select signal, which is a decoding signal for external devices. The chip select signal selectively activates the internal circuits of the game control microcomputer 100 or external peripheral devices, enabling access from the CPU 103. The output terminal usable by the address decoding circuit 137 should be a multi-function terminal capable of selectively outputting the parallel output signal from POP 105B, the serial transmission signal from the serial communication circuit 139, the clock output signal from the clock circuit 132, and the chip select signal generated by the address decoding circuit 137.

The free-run counter 138 is configured with counter circuits corresponding to four channels FRC0 to FRC3, and can update its count value independently of the operation of the CPU 103. Each channel FRC0 to FRC3 of the free-run counter 138 can be started with an independent update clock, and its operation can be stopped or modified according to, for example, the game program. The count value from the free-run counter 138 can be stored in a hard latch register in response to a latch signal transmitted from the input terminal, which is the latch signal input terminal of the PIP 105A. The count value stored in the hard latch register can be read by the CPU 103 and used when executing the game program, etc.

The serial communication circuit 139 is configured to include a serial communication unit corresponding to three channels SCU0, SCU1, and STU2, enabling communication with external devices using a serial communication method. Each channel SCU0, SCU1, and STU2 of the serial communication circuit 139 can process communication data in, for example, full-duplex, asynchronous, and standard NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format. Channels SCU0 and SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 are included in a first channel transmit/receive circuit that can send and receive serial data bidirectionally to and from an external circuit. Channel STU2 of the serial communication circuit 139 is included in a second channel transmit circuit that can only transmit serial data in one direction to and from an external circuit. For example, channel SCU0 of the serial communication circuit 139 is used for data communication with the payout control board. Also, channel SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 is used for data communication with the performance control board 12. Instead of channel SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139, channel STU2 of the serial communication circuit 139 may be used for data communication with the performance control board 12.

The 16-bit random number circuit 104A is composed of random number generation units corresponding to four channels RL0 to RL3, each operating independently to generate random numbers from "0" to "65535" using numerical data representing 16-bit pseudo-random numbers. The maximum value of the random numbers generated by each channel RL0 to RL3 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A can be set to any value within the range of "256" to "65535". By setting such a maximum value, it is possible to select the initial setting for the random number activation method so that the updating of the numerical data representing the random number value begins. Alternatively, it is possible to select the initial setting for the random number activation method so that each channel RL0 to RL3 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A is automatically activated when the operating mode of the game control microcomputer 100 transitions from security mode to user mode. The 16-bit random number circuit 104A can update the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination via channel RL0, and update the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation via channel RL2.

The 8-bit random number circuit 104B is composed of random number generation units corresponding to four channels RS0 to RS3, each operating independently to generate random values from "0" to "255" using numerical data representing the value of an 8-bit pseudo-random number. The maximum value of the random numbers generated by each channel RS0 to RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B can be set to any value within the range of "16" to "255". By setting such a maximum value, it is possible to select the initial setting for the random number activation method so that the update of the numerical data representing the random value begins. Alternatively, each channel RS0 to RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B may be configured to automatically activate when the operating mode of the game control microcomputer 100 transitions from security mode to user mode, so that the random number activation method can be selected. The 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type via channel RS1, update the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern via channel RS2, and update the random number MR3-1 for the normal pattern variation pattern via channel RS3.

The PIP105A incorporates, for example, an 8-bit wide input-only port, enabling various signals to be input from outside the game control microcomputer 100. The PIP105A can utilize input terminals corresponding to input ports PI0 to PI7. Input port PI5 uses a function-sharing terminal that can be used in conjunction with the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT. Input port PI6 uses a function-sharing terminal that can be used in conjunction with the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. Input port PI7 uses a function-sharing terminal that can be used in conjunction with the receiving terminal of channel SCU0 in the serial communication circuit 139. The POP105B incorporates, for example, an 11-bit wide output-only port, enabling various signals to be output outside the game control microcomputer 100. The POP105B can supply parallel output signals corresponding to output ports PO0 to PO7 and PO10 to PO12 to the address decoding circuit 137.

Figure 10-2 shows an example of the address map in the game control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in Figure 10-2, the region from addresses 0000[H] to 3FFF[H] is allocated to ROM 101 and includes the game program area, game data area, non-game program area, non-game data area, ROM comment area, program management area, and other unused areas. The region from addresses F000[H] to F3FF[H] is allocated to RAM 102 and includes the game work area, game stack area, non-game work area, non-game stack area, and other unused areas. The region from addresses FE00[H] to FEBF[H] is the function setting register area allocated to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The region from addresses FF00[H] to FFFF[H] is the function control register area allocated to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100.

In ROM 101, the game program area can store game programs, which are computer programs related to the progress of the game. The game data area can store game data used by the game programs. The non-game program area can store non-game programs, which are computer programs related to control and processing other than the progress of the game. The non-game data area can store non-game data used by the non-game programs. The programs and data stored in these ROMs 101 were pre-designed and created by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, which is the user of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, game programs and non-game programs are included in the user program. Game data and non-game data are included in the user data.

The ROM 101's memory area is divided into two separate areas: a game program area capable of storing game programs related to the progress of the game, and a non-game program area capable of storing control and processing unrelated to the progress of the game. The area preceding the non-game program area to which a later address is assigned becomes an unused area with a memory size greater than or equal to the boundary byte count, such as 16 bytes. This makes it easy to distinguish between the game program area capable of storing game programs related to the progress of the game and the non-game program area capable of storing control and processing unrelated to the progress of the game, thus simplifying the design and management of programs and data stored in the ROM 101.

The ROM 101's memory area is divided into two separate areas: a game program area capable of storing game programs related to the progress of the game, and a game data area capable of storing game data used by the game program. The area immediately preceding the game data area to which the later address is assigned is an unused area with a memory size exceeding the boundary byte count, such as 16 bytes. This makes it easy to identify the game program area capable of storing game programs related to the progress of the game, and the game data area capable of storing game data used by the game program, thereby simplifying the design and management of programs and data stored in the ROM 101.

The ROM 101's memory area contains two adjacent areas: a non-game program area capable of storing non-game programs related to control and processing separate from the game's progression, and a non-game data area capable of storing non-game data used by these non-game programs. The area behind the non-game program area (to which the forward address is assigned) becomes the non-game data area, while the area in front of the non-game data area (to which the backward address is assigned) becomes the non-game program area. This allows for the integration of the non-game program area (capable of storing non-game programs related to control and processing separate from the game's progression) and the non-game data area (capable of storing non-game data used by these programs) within a memory area with consecutively assigned addresses, thereby facilitating the design and management of programs and data stored in the ROM 101. Furthermore, by providing an unused area with a memory area exceeding the boundary byte count between the non-game program area and the non-game data area, it may be possible to easily distinguish between the two areas.

In the ROM 101's memory area, unused memory areas may store data indicating a value of "0" in all areas. This makes it easy to distinguish between the game program area and game data area, the non-game program area and non-game data area, and the unused areas. Furthermore, if invalid data is stored in the unused areas, that data can be easily detected. Alternatively, unused memory areas may store data indicating a value of "1" in all areas. In other words, unused memory areas should be stored with data indicating the same value in all areas. This makes it easy to distinguish between multiple types of memory areas and easily detect invalid stored data.

In RAM 102, the game work area can be used as a work area when the CPU 103 executes a game program. The game stack area can be used as a stack area when the CPU 103 executes a game program. The non-game work area can be used as a work area when the CPU 103 executes a non-game program. The non-game stack area can be used as a stack area when the CPU 103 executes a non-game program.

The game program area and game data area provided in the ROM 101's memory area, and the game work area and game stack area provided in the RAM 102's memory area, are included in the memory area for game control. The non-game program and non-game data areas provided in the ROM 101's memory area, and the non-game work area and non-game stack area provided in the RAM 102's memory area, are included in the memory area for non-game control.

The ROM comment area in the ROM 101's memory area stores data indicating arbitrary program-specific information, such as the program title and version. The program management area in the ROM 101's memory area can store setting information necessary for the internal configuration of the game control microcomputer 100, which the CPU 103 uses to execute game programs and non-game programs.

Figure 10-3 shows a main example of address settings, AKA01, which is included in the function setting register area among the addresses assigned to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The function setting register area is the first area for setting functions using various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, such as the watchdog timer 134A of the reset controller 134, the interrupt controller 135, the timer circuit 136, and the serial communication circuit 139.

In setting example AKA01, the settings of the WDT start register at address FE1A[H] and the WDT clear registers at addresses FE1B[H] to FE1C[H] are invalid values corresponding to unused states. As a result, the monitoring time measurement function using the watchdog timer 134A of the reset controller 134 is set to an unused state. The interrupt mask register at address FE00[H] is set to 7E[H], so the interrupt control function using the interrupt controller 135 is set to an enabled state for the maskable interrupt IR0. The register settings related to channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136 at addresses FE01[H] to FE03[H] are valid values, so the timing function using channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136 is set to an enabled state. At addresses FE04[H] to FE09[H], the register settings for channels PTC1 and PTC2 of the timer circuit 136 are invalid values corresponding to unused channels. Therefore, the timing function using channels PTC1 and PTC2 of the timer circuit 136 is set to an unused state.

At addresses FE0A[H] to FE11[H], if the register settings for channels SCU0 and SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 are valid, the serial communication function using channels SCU0 and SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 is set to an enabled state. At addresses FE12[H] to FE14[H], if the register setting for channel STU2 of the serial communication circuit 139 is an invalid value corresponding to unused, the serial communication function using channel STU2 of the serial communication circuit 139 is set to an unused state.

At addresses FE2C[H] to FE2E[H], if the register settings for the input ports of the PIP105A are valid, the signal input function using each input port is set to an enabled state. At addresses FE36[H] to FE4A[H], if the register settings for the random number circuit 104 include both valid and invalid values, the random number generation function using the random number circuit 104 is set so that channels corresponding to valid values are enabled, and channels corresponding to invalid values are set to an unused state. For example, of the four channels RL0 to RL3 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, channels RL0 and RL2, whose corresponding maximum value setting registers are valid, are set to an enabled state for the random number generation function, while channels RL1 and RL3, whose corresponding maximum value setting registers are invalid, are set to an unused state for the random number generation function. Furthermore, in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, of the four channels RS0 to RS3, channels RS1 to RS3, whose corresponding maximum value setting registers are valid, are set to an enabled state for random number generation, while channel RS0, whose corresponding maximum value setting register is invalid, is set to an disabled state for random number generation.

Thus, the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100 only need to be able to be set to either an enabled or disabled state, corresponding to the setting values in the function setting register area. The function setting register area is not limited to the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, but may be any first area for setting arbitrary functions.

Figure 10-4 shows a main example of address settings, AKA02, which is included in the function control register area among the addresses assigned to the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The function control register area is a second area for function control using various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, such as RAM 102, random number circuit 104, PIP 105A, and serial communication circuit 139.

In configuration example AKA02, the RWM access protect register at address FF00[H] enables functional control to either prohibit or allow access to RAM 102, which is RWM, depending on the setting value of 00[H] or 01[H]. The internal information register at address FF01[H] has an invalid value corresponding to an unused setting, and the functional control using the corresponding circuit becomes unused. The internal information register can store data indicating internal information such as abnormalities in the random number update state, abnormalities in the random number update clock frequency, system reset occurrence, WDT timeout occurrence, and IAT occurrence, but in this embodiment, it is not used when unused.

The registers at addresses FF25[H] to FF28[H] can store setting values used to control the serial communication function using channel SCU0 of the serial communication circuit 139, corresponding to the enabled state of that function. The registers at addresses FF29[H] to FF2C[H] can store setting values used to control the serial communication function using channel SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139, corresponding to the enabled state of that function.

Each register at addresses FF60[H] to FF67[H] can store random values that can be obtained using the soft latch random value acquisition function of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. Of these, the RL0 soft latch random value register at addresses FF60[H] to FF61[H] can store the numerical data indicating the value of a random number that can be generated by channel RL0 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when the data is obtained by the soft latch. The RL1 soft latch random value register at addresses FF62[H] to FF63[H] can store the numerical data indicating the value of a random number that can be generated by channel RL1 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when the data is obtained by the soft latch. The RL2 soft latch random value registers at addresses FF64[H] to FF65[H] can store numerical data representing the value of random numbers that can be generated by channel RL2, provided in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, when this data is acquired via the soft latch. The RL3 soft latch random value registers at addresses FF66[H] to FF67[H] can store numerical data representing the value of random numbers that can be generated by channel RL3, provided in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, when this data is acquired via the soft latch.

Each register at addresses FF68[H] to FF6B[H] can store random values that can be obtained using the soft latch random value acquisition function of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. Of these, the RS0 soft latch random value register at address FF68[H] can store the numerical data indicating the value of a random number that can be generated by channel RS0 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when the data is obtained by the soft latch. The RS1 soft latch random value register at address FF69[H] can store the numerical data indicating the value of a random number that can be generated by channel RS1 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when the data is obtained by the soft latch. The RS2 soft latch random value register at address FF6A[H] can store the numerical data indicating the value of a random number that can be generated by channel RS2 of the 8-bit random number circuit 104B when the data is obtained by the soft latch. The RS3 soft latch random number register at address FF6B[H] can store numerical data representing the value of a random number that can be generated by channel RS3, provided in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, when the data is acquired by the soft latch.

The RL0 hard latch random value register number "0" at addresses FF88[H] to FF89[H] and the RL0 hard latch random value register number "1" at addresses FF98[H] to FF99[H] can store numerical data representing the value of a random number that can be generated by channel RL0 provided in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A when the value is acquired by the hard latch. Here, the RL0 hard latch random value register includes multiple storage areas corresponding to multiple register numbers, and different hard latch conditions can be set corresponding to the storage areas of different register numbers. For example, the RL0 hard latch random value register number "0", which is the RL0 hard latch random value register corresponding to register number "0", can have its hard latch condition met when the game ball detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is ON. In contrast, the RL0 hard latch random value register number "1," which corresponds to register number "1," can satisfy the hard latch condition when the game ball detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is ON. As a result, the RL0 hard latch random value register number "0" can store the numerical data representing the value of the random number MR1-1 used for special symbol determination, which is acquired in response to the occurrence of the first start entry, when the hard latch acquires it. The RL0 hard latch random value register number "1" can store the numerical data representing the value of the random number MR1-1 used for special symbol determination, which is acquired in response to the occurrence of the second start entry, when the hard latch acquires it.

The registers at addresses FFF0[H] to FFF2[H] and FF35[H] can store the signal values input at each input port, corresponding to the state in which the signal input function using the PIP105A's input ports is enabled. Of these, the input port number "0" register at address FFF0[H] can store the signal value input to input port "0" on the PIP105A. The input port number "1" register at address FFF1[H] can store the signal value input to input port "1" on the PIP105A. The input port number "2" register at address FFF2[H] can store the signal value input to input port "2" on the PIP105A. The input port number "3" register at address FF35[H] can store the signal value input to input port "3" on the PIP105A.

Thus, the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100 only need to be able to control their respective operating states in accordance with the values stored in the function control register area. Furthermore, the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100 may also be able to update the values stored in the function control register area in accordance with their respective operating states. The function control register area is not limited to the various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, but may be a second area for arbitrary function control.

Figure 10-5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the settings for the random numbers used for gameplay shown in Figure 3 in this embodiment. The random numbers used for gameplay shown in Figure 3 can be classified according to their respective uses into: random numbers used to determine the display results in the variable display of special symbols, random numbers used to determine the display results in the variable display of ordinary symbols, and random numbers used to determine the display patterns in the variable display of special and ordinary symbols.

Figure 10-5(A) shows an example of game random number settings AKA11 used to determine the display result in the variable display of special symbols. The game random numbers in setting example AKA11 include MR1-1 for special symbol determination, MR1-2 for winning symbols, and MR1-3, which is the initial value for winning symbols. For example, MR1-1 for special symbol determination can be used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "big win" or a "small win." MR1-2 for winning symbols can be used to determine the designated big win symbol value or small win symbol value corresponding to the confirmed special symbol when the special symbol display result is a "big win" or a "small win." MR1-3, which is the initial value for winning symbols, can be used when setting the initial value of MR1-2.

The range of the random number MR1-1 is the range of numbers that can be updated, from "0" to "65535". The magnitude of the random number MR1-1 is the total number of random values included in the update range of the random number MR1-1, which is "65536" corresponding to the range of "0" to "65535" for the random number MR1-1. Since the magnitude of the random number MR1-1 is "65536", the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of the random number MR1-1 is "2". The method for setting the maximum value of the random number MR1-1 is by initializing a register provided in accordance with the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The method for updating the random number MR1-1 is by hardware update using the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The update condition for the random number MR1-1 is the system clock input to the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The conditions for obtaining the random number MR1-1 include a hard latch corresponding to the initial win and a software read of that random number into a random number buffer. The period of the random number MR1-1 is 4.369 [ms].

The range of the random number MR1-2 is the range of numbers that can be updated, from "0" to "199". The magnitude of the random number MR1-2 is the total number of random values included in the update range of the random number MR1-2, which is "200", corresponding to the range of "0" to "199" for the random number MR1-2. Since the magnitude of the random number MR1-2 is "200", the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of the random number MR1-2 is "1". The method for setting the maximum value of the random number MR1-2 is by setting an immediate value in the program code. The method for updating the random number MR1-2 is software update SA1. The condition for updating the random number MR1-2 is a timer interrupt after a predetermined time has elapsed. The condition for acquiring the random number MR1-2 is reading by software corresponding to the start prize. The period of the random number generator MR1-2 is 800 [ms].

The range of random numbers MR1-3 is the range of numbers that can be updated, and is the same as random numbers MR1-2, from "0" to "199". The magnitude of random numbers MR1-3 is the total number of random values included in the update range of random numbers MR1-3, and is the same as random numbers MR1-2, from "0" to "199". Since the magnitude of random numbers MR1-3 is "200", the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of random numbers MR1-3 is "1". The method for setting the maximum value of random numbers MR1-3 is by setting an immediate value in the program code. The method for updating random numbers MR1-3 is software update SA2. The conditions for updating random numbers MR1-3 include a timer interrupt triggered by the elapsed time and a loop process within the main game control process P_MAIN that occurs during standby. The condition for acquiring random numbers MR1-3 is that random numbers MR1-2 have completed one cycle. The period of random numbers MR1-3 is undefined due to its update conditions.

Figure 10-5(B) shows an example of setting random numbers for gameplay, AKA12, used to determine the display result in the variable display of normal symbols. The random numbers for gameplay in setting example AKA12 include random numbers MR2-1 for normal symbol winning symbols and random numbers MR2-2 which serve as the initial values for normal symbol winning symbols. For example, random numbers MR2-1 for normal symbol winning symbols can be used to determine the normal symbol designation value corresponding to the confirmed normal symbol as the display result of the normal symbol. Random numbers MR2-2 which serve as the initial values for normal symbol winning symbols can be used when setting the initial value of random numbers MR1-2.

The range of the random number MR2-1 is the range of values for which the random number MR2-1 can be updated, and is from "0" to "198". The magnitude of the random number MR2-1 is the total number of random values included in the update range of the random number MR2-1, and is "199", corresponding to the range of "0" to "198" for the random number MR2-1. Since the magnitude of the random number MR2-1 is "199", the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of the random number MR2-1 is "1". The method for setting the maximum value of the random number MR2-1 is by setting an immediate value in the program code. The method for updating the random number MR2-1 is software update SA1. The condition for updating the random number MR2-1 is a timer interrupt due to the elapsed time. The condition for acquiring the random number MR2-1 is software reading corresponding to the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 which can be configured as a normal symbol activation opening. The period of the random number MR2-1 is 796 [ms].

The range of the random number MR2-2 is the range of numbers that can be updated, and is the same as the random number MR2-1, from "0" to "198". The size of the random number MR2-2 is the total number of random values included in the update range of the random number MR2-2, and is the same as the random number MR2-1, from "0" to "198". Since the size of the random number MR2-2 is "199", the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of the random number MR2-2 is "1". The method for setting the maximum value of the random number MR2-2 is by setting an immediate value in the program code. The method for updating the random number MR2-2 is software update SA2. The conditions for updating the random number generator MR2-2 include a timer interrupt triggered by the elapsed time and a loop process during standby within the main game control process P_MAIN. The condition for acquiring the random number generator MR2-2 is that MR2-1 has completed one cycle. The period of the random number generator MR2-2 is undefined due to its update conditions.

Figure 10-5(C) shows an example of setting random numbers for gameplay, AKA13, which are used to determine the display mode in the variable display of special and regular symbols. The random numbers for gameplay in setting example AKA13 include random numbers MR3-1 for the regular symbol variation pattern, random numbers MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation, random numbers MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type, and random numbers MR3-4 for the variation pattern. For example, random number MR3-1 for the regular symbol variation pattern can be used to determine the regular symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variable display of regular symbols. Random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation can be used to determine the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display of special symbols where the special symbol display result is "losing". Random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type can be used to select the variation pattern type corresponding to the variable display of special symbols. The random number generator MR3-4 for the variation pattern can be used to determine the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display of special symbols.

The range of the random number MR3-1 is the range of numbers that can be updated, from "0" to "232". The magnitude of the random number MR3-1 is the total number of random values included in the update range of the random number MR3-1, which is "233", corresponding to the range of "0" to "232" for the random number MR3-1. Since the magnitude of the random number MR3-1 is "233", the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of the random number MR3-1 is "1". The method for setting the maximum value of the random number MR3-1 is by initializing a register provided in correspondence with the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The method for updating the random number MR3-1 is by hardware update using the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The update condition for the random number MR3-1 is the system clock input to the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The condition for obtaining the random number MR3-1 is the start of a variation in the variable display of the normal symbols. The period of the random number MR3-1 is 0.249 [ms].

The range of the random number MR3-2 is the range of numbers that can be updated, from "0" to "65518". The magnitude of the random number MR3-2 is the total number of random values included in the update range of the random number MR3-2, which is "65519" corresponding to the range of "0" to "65518" for the random number MR3-2. Since the magnitude of the random number MR3-2 is "65519", the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of the random number MR3-2 is "2". The method for setting the maximum value of the random number MR3-2 is by initializing a register provided in correspondence with the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The method for updating the random number MR3-2 is by hardware update using the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The update condition for the random number MR3-2 is the system clock input to the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The conditions for obtaining the random number MR3-2 include reading it into a random number buffer by software corresponding to the start-up prize. The period of the random number MR3-2 is 139.774 [ms].

The range of the random number MR3-3 is the range of numbers that can be updated, from "0" to "240". The magnitude of the random number MR3-3 is the total number of random values included in the update range of the random number MR3-3, which is "241", corresponding to the range of "0" to "240" for the random number MR3-3. Since the magnitude of the random number MR3-3 is "241", the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of the random number MR3-3 is "1". The method for setting the maximum value of the random number MR3-3 is by initializing a register provided in correspondence with the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The method for updating the random number MR3-3 is by hardware update using the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The update condition for the random number MR3-3 is the system clock input to the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The conditions for obtaining the random number MR3-3 include reading it into a random number buffer by software corresponding to the start-up prize. The period of the random number MR3-3 is 0.257 [ms].

The range of the random number MR3-4 is the range of values for which the random number MR3-4 can be updated, and is from "0" to "250". The magnitude of the random number MR3-4 is the total number of random values included in the update range of the random number MR3-4, and is "251", corresponding to the range of "0" to "250" for the random number MR3-4. Since the magnitude of the random number MR3-4 is "251", the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The number of bytes of numerical data used to update the value of the random number MR3-4 is "1". The method for setting the maximum value of the random number MR3-4 is by initializing a register provided in correspondence with the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The method for updating the random number MR3-4 is by hardware update using the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The update condition for the random number MR3-4 is the system clock input to the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The conditions for obtaining random numbers MR3-4 include reading them into a random number buffer by software corresponding to the start-up prize. The period of random numbers MR3-4 is 0.268 [ms].

The software update SA1, which is the method for updating random numbers MR1-2 and MR2-1, allows for updates by incrementing the previous value by 1 each time the software update process is executed. If the updated value exceeds the maximum random number value, it is changed to "0," which is the minimum random number value. Furthermore, if the updated value matches the initial random number value, the current random number value is set using the corresponding initial random number and stored as the new initial random number value. For example, for random number MR1-2, if the updated value matches the initial random number value, the current random number value is set using random number MR1-3, which is the initial value for winning symbols, and this random number value is stored as the new initial random number value. For random number MR2-1, if the updated value matches the initial random number value, the current random number value is set using random number MR2-2, which is the initial value for normal and winning symbols, and this random number value is stored as the new initial random number value.

The software update SA2 method, which updates random numbers MR1-3 and MR2-2, allows for updates by adding 1 to the previous value each time the software update process is executed. If the updated value exceeds the maximum random number value, it is changed to "0," which is the minimum random number value. Unlike software update SA1, this method does not use an initial random number value; therefore, the updated value will be either the previous value plus 1, or the minimum random number value, "0."

Figure 10-6 is a diagram illustrating the random number update period when updating random values using the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B included in the random number circuit 104. Here, the random numbers that can be generated by channels RL0 to RL4 provided in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A are referred to as 16-bit random numbers RLn. Similarly, the random numbers that can be generated by channels RS0 to RS4 provided in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B are referred to as 8-bit random numbers RSn. The period for one cycle of the 16-bit random number RLn that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A is determined by different relational expressions depending on whether the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn is a specific maximum value expressed using a power of 2. The cycle of the 8-bit random number RSn, which can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, is determined by different relational expressions depending on whether the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn is a specific maximum value expressed using a power of 2.

Figure 10-6(A) shows an example AKA21 of setting the 16-bit random number period in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The 16-bit random number period is the period it takes for the 16-bit random number RLn, which can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, to complete one cycle. In the 16-bit random number period setting example AKA21, when the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn corresponds to 2m-1 when m = 9 to 16, the period for completing one cycle of the 16-bit random number sequence is proportional to the reciprocal of the count clock frequency, i.e., the count clock period. Furthermore, it becomes a linear function with the value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, i.e., the magnitude of the 16-bit random number RLn, as the variable. In contrast, when the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn does not correspond to 2m-1 (where m = 9 to 16), the cycle of one cycle of the 16-bit random number sequence is proportional to the reciprocal of the count clock frequency, i.e., 32 times the count clock period. Furthermore, it becomes a linear function with the value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, i.e., the magnitude of the 16-bit random number RLn, as the variable. Thus, when the maximum value of the 16-bit random number RLn, which can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, is a specific maximum value, the random number update cycle becomes shorter, meaning the random value update speed is faster than when its maximum value is not that specific maximum value.

Figure 10-6(B) shows an example AK22 of setting the 8-bit random number period in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The 8-bit random number period is the period it takes for the 8-bit random number RSn, which can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, to complete one cycle. In the 8-bit random number period setting example AKA22, when the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn corresponds to 2m-1 when m = 5 to 8, the period for completing one cycle of the 8-bit random number sequence is proportional to the reciprocal of the count clock frequency, i.e., the count clock period. It is then a linear function with the value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, i.e., the magnitude of the 8-bit random number RSn, as the variable. In contrast, when the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn does not correspond to 2m-1 when m = 5 to 8, the period for completing one cycle of the 8-bit random number sequence is proportional to the reciprocal of the count clock frequency, i.e., 16 times the count clock period. Then, the value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value, i.e., the magnitude of the 8-bit random number RSn, becomes a linear function. Thus, when the maximum value of the 8-bit random number RSn, which can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, is a specific maximum value, the random number update period becomes shorter, meaning the random value update speed is faster than when its maximum value is not that specific maximum value.

Figure 10-6(C) shows a comparison example of random number values AKA23, comparing the random number values that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The 16-bit random number circuit 104A can update the random number values corresponding to MR1-1 for special symbol determination and MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation. The 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update the random number values corresponding to MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type and MR3-4 for the variation pattern.

Random number MR1-1 has a maximum value of "65535" and corresponds to 2m-1 when m=16. As a result, the period of random number MR1-1 is 4.369 [ms], and the update rate at this time is 15000 [times/ms]. Random number MR3-2 has a maximum value of "65518" and does not correspond to 2m-1 when m=9 to 16. As a result, the period of random number MR3-2 is 139.774 [ms], and the update rate at this time is 469 [times/ms]. Random number MR3-3 has a maximum value of "240" and does not correspond to 2m-1 when m=5 to 8. As a result, the period of random number MR3-3 is 0.257 [ms], and the update rate at this time is 938 [times/ms]. The random number generator MR3-4 has a maximum value of "250" and does not correspond to 2m-1 when m = 5 to 8. Therefore, the period of random number generator MR3-4 is 0.268 [ms], and the update rate at this time is 938 [times/ms].

Thus, the random numbers for gameplay that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A include random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols and random number MR3-2 for selecting losing animations. Both random numbers MR1-1 and MR3-2 have a numerical data size of "2", and are composed of 2 bytes as a specific number of bytes. The magnitude of random number MR1-1 is "65536", and the magnitude of random number MR3-2 is "65519", so if the total number of random values included in the update range of random number MR1-1 is a specific number, then the total number of random numbers included in the update range of random number MR3-2 is a predetermined number smaller than the specific number. The update speed of random number MR1-1 is 15000 [times/ms], and the update speed of random number MR3-2 is 469 [times/ms], so random number MR1-1 has a faster update speed than random number MR3-2. This suppresses the synchronous generation of random values, enabling appropriate updates of random values.

Furthermore, the random numbers for gameplay that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A include the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation. The random numbers for gameplay that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B include the random number MR3-3 for selecting the type of variation pattern and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern. In all of these random numbers MR3-2 to MR3-4, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. The update rate of random number MR3-2 is 469 [times/ms], while the update rates of random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 are 938 [times/ms]. In other words, the update rates of random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 are twice the update rate of random number MR3-2, which is an integer multiple. Therefore, if random number MR3-2 is used as the first random number, and random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 are used as the second random numbers, the update speed of the first random number is the first speed, and the update speed of the second random number is the second speed, which is an integer multiple of the first speed. Furthermore, the update range of random number MR3-2 is "0" to "65518", the update range of random number MR3-3 is "0" to "240", and the update range of random number MR3-4 is "0" to "250". Thus, the total number of random numbers included in the update ranges of the first and second random numbers are different, and in both cases, the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. This suppresses the synchronous generation of random numbers, enabling appropriate random number updates.

The CPU 103 contains multiple registers, including a program counter, interrupt register, stack pointer, index register, flag register, address register, and general-purpose registers including an accumulator. The index register, flag register, and general-purpose register may have both main and sub-registers. The registers included in the main and sub-registers, and the stack pointer, may be configured to form multiple register banks. These multiple register banks may include a first register bank for use within the area usable when executing a game program, and a second register bank for use outside the area usable when executing a non-game program. This eliminates the need to save and restore values stored in general-purpose registers, etc., to and from the stack area when switching between game and non-game programs, thus preventing an increase in program size and processing load.

The program counter, also known as the PC register, holds the address value of the next instruction that the CPU 103 should execute. The program counter's value is incremented sequentially with each instruction executed, or set to the address of a branch instruction. The interrupt register, also known as the I register, can hold the upper address value of the interrupt vector table. The I register's value is set in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1.

The stack pointer, also known as the SP register, can hold address values corresponding to the game stack area and non-game stack area. The stack pointer's stored value can be saved to a specified address, including the program counter, in response to interrupt occurrences, execution of PUSH instructions, and execution of subroutine call instructions such as CALL, CALLF, and RST instructions. This save address is updated to indicate the starting address of the storage area holding the saved value. Furthermore, the stack pointer's stored value can be read to restore the saved register value in response to the end of interrupt processing, execution of POP instructions, and completion of subroutine processing. This read address is updated to indicate the corresponding address after the value has been read. Additionally, the stack pointer's stored value can be set to the stored value or immediate value of a register specified by load instructions such as the LD instruction.

The index registers include the IX and IY registers, each with a 2-byte storage capacity capable of storing 16-bit data. The accumulator is also called the A register. Other general-purpose registers include multiple registers with a 1-byte storage capacity capable of storing 8-bit data, such as the B, C, D, E, H, and L registers. The B and C registers can be used as the BC registers of a pair of registers capable of storing 16-bit data. The D and E registers can be used as the DE registers of a pair of registers capable of storing 16-bit data. The H and L registers can be used as the HL registers of a pair of registers capable of storing 16-bit data.

The internal registers of the CPU 103 can be updated to reflect the values stored in them in response to arithmetic and transfer instructions executed by the CPU 103. They are used for specifying program addresses, data addresses, or the built-in register addresses of the game control microcomputer 100, as well as for holding arithmetic and transfer data.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the instruction set for the CPU 103 to execute a program consists of transfer instructions such as load instructions, subroutine call instructions, jump instructions, and other arithmetic and logical operation instructions, as well as input/output instructions. Computer programs, such as game programs and non-game programs, that the CPU 103 can execute are pre-prepared as program code containing these various instructions and stored in the ROM 101.

The load instruction is a transfer instruction that can be used to set data read from the memory area of ROM 101 or RAM 102 or the internal device area and store it in the internal register of the CPU 103; to write the value stored in the internal register of the CPU 103 to the memory area of RAM 102 or the internal device area; or to set or store a numerical value specified by an operand as an immediate value in the internal register of the CPU 103 or the memory area of RAM 102 or the internal device area. The target of data transfer by the load instruction can be identified by the instruction code and operand, and generally includes the data source and destination. However, when an immediate value is specified by the operand, the data source is not included.

Load instructions include the normal LD instruction, the special LDQ instruction, the special LDF instruction, and the special ICPLD instruction. The normal LD instruction is also called a normal transfer instruction. The special LDQ instruction is also called a first special transfer instruction. The special LDF instruction is also called a second special transfer instruction. The special ICPLD instruction is also called a third special transfer instruction.

The LD instruction, a standard data transfer instruction, allows data transfer to the ROM 101 or RAM 102 storage area or internal device area by specifying both the upper and lower addresses. Furthermore, when transferring data to the ROM 101 or RAM 102 storage area or internal device area, the LD instruction allows data transfer by specifying the destination or source address using a pointer, such as a pair register like the HL register.

The first special transfer instruction, the LDQ instruction, uses the Q register, a special register contained within the CPU 103's internal registers, to transfer data by specifying only the lower address. The Q register has a pre-set value indicating the upper address, and by combining this with the lower address specified by the LDQ instruction, the destination or source address can be identified and data transferred.

The LDQ instruction, a first special transfer instruction, can transfer data with less program code than the LD instruction, a normal transfer instruction. However, in programs that frequently change the value stored in the Q register, the amount of program code may actually increase compared to using a normal LD instruction. Therefore, it is sufficient to be able to execute data transfer using the LDQ instruction, a first special transfer instruction, to handle processes that require transferring various data multiple times to the game work area (addresses F000[H] to F0D7[H]), the function setting register area (addresses FE00[H] to FEBF[H]), and the function control register area (addresses FF00[H] to FFFF[H]).

The LDF instruction, a second special transfer instruction, allows data transfer by specifying only the lower addresses of stored data within a specific address range. This specific address range is, for example, from address 1200[H] to 1DFF[H]. Therefore, by pre-configuring the game data area of ROM 101 to be included within this specific address range, and combining it with the lower addresses specified by the LDF instruction, the source address can be identified and the data transferred. Note that the game data area of ROM 101 is read-only and cannot be written to, so the address of the game data area can never be specified as the destination address.

The LDF instruction, a second special transfer instruction, can transfer data with less program code than the LD instruction, a normal transfer instruction. However, since a specific address range is fixed by the specifications, it is sufficient to set the storage area for frequently used data, such as the game data area of ROM 101, to be included within the specific address range, thereby enabling data transfer using the LDF instruction.

The third special transfer instruction, the ICPLD instruction, compares the value to be updated with a comparison value. If the value to be updated is less than the comparison value, it is updated by adding 1; if the value to be updated is greater than or equal to the comparison value, it is changed to the minimum value, "0". The value to be updated may be the value indicated by the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer, or it may be the value stored in a register. The comparison value may be the value stored in a register, or it may be the value indicated by the operand of the ICPLD instruction.

Thus, the ICPLD instruction, the third special transfer instruction, is a single comparison-add instruction that includes comparing the value to be updated with a comparison judgment value, adding 1 to the value to be updated if the comparison result is less than the comparison judgment value, and changing the value to be updated to the minimum value if the comparison result is equal to or greater than the comparison judgment value.

Setting a value in the CPU 103's internal registers using an immediate value specified by the operand of a transfer instruction is also called "setting." Reading stored data from the ROM 101's game data area or the RAM 102's game work area and storing it in the CPU 103's internal registers is also called "loading." Storing the value in the CPU 103's internal registers in a buffer, counter, timer, or other arbitrary storage area provided in the RAM 102's game work area is also called "storing."

Figure 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON. The power supply start response process P_POWER_ON is included in the processes callable from the main game control process P_MAIN shown in Figure 4, and can be executed in step S1 in response to the start of power supply in the pachinko game machine 1. When the CPU 103 executes the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON, it sets interrupts to disabled (step AKS1), and then sets the initial value of the stack pointer within the area to the stack pointer (step AKS2). The initial value of the stack pointer within the area should be address F200[H], which is the last address of the game stack area plus 1, corresponding to the initial state where no saved data is stored in the game stack area.

Following step AKS2, a transfer instruction to set the internal register of the CPU 103 sets the connection confirmation signal ON output value (step AKS3). The connection confirmation signal ON output value is a value that indicates the connection confirmation signal is ON, and can be, for example, 00 [H]. At this time, a transfer instruction to set the Q register, which is included in the internal register of the CPU 103, sets the upper address of the function control register in the Q register (step AKS4). The upper address of the function control register is the value FF [H] which indicates the upper address of the function control register area in the setting example AKA02 shown in Figure 10-4. Once the upper address of the function control register is set in this way, a transfer instruction using the upper address indicated by the value stored in the Q register stores the connection confirmation signal ON output value (step AKS5). In this case, the lower address of the transfer destination can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. The value stored in the Q register is set to the upper address of the function control register area by step AKS4. Therefore, a transfer instruction, such as a special two-byte LDQ instruction that specifies a lower address, can be used to store the connection confirmation signal ON output value set in step AKS3 in the function control register at the specified address in the function control register area. In step AKS5, the connection confirmation signal ON output value is stored in the output port number "1" register provided in the function control register area. This sets the connection confirmation signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the dispensing control board to the ON state.

Step AKS5 sets the connection confirmation signal to the ON state, and a transfer instruction using the higher address indicated by the value stored in the Q register stores the SCU0 command register clear output value (Step AKS6). In this case, the lower address of the transfer destination can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. The value stored in the Q register is set to the higher address of the function control register area by Step AKS4. The SCU0 command register clear output value can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. Therefore, the SCU0 command register clear output value can be stored in the function control register at the specified address in the function control register area by a transfer instruction for writing to the storage area of the specified address, such as a special 3-byte LDQ instruction that specifies the lower address and the SCU0 command register clear output value. In Step AKS6, the SCU0 command register clear output value is stored in the SCU0 command register located at address FF28[H] in the function control register area in the setting example AKA02 shown in Figure 10-4. This controls the serial communication function using channel SCU0 of the serial communication circuit 139 to its initial state.

After step AKS6, the SCU1 command register clear output value is stored using a transfer instruction that uses the higher address indicated by the value stored in the Q register (step AKS7). In this case, the lower address of the transfer destination can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. The value stored in the Q register is set to the higher address of the function control register area by step AKS4. The SCU1 command register clear output value can be specified by the operand of the transfer instruction. Therefore, the SCU1 command register clear output value can be stored in the function control register at the specified address in the function control register area by a transfer instruction that writes to the storage area of the specified address, such as a special 3-byte LDQ instruction that specifies the lower address and the SCU0 command register clear output value. In step AKS7, the SCU1 command register clear output value is stored in the SCU1 command register located at address FF2C[H] in the function control register area in the setting example AKA02 shown in Figure 10-4. This controls the serial communication function using channel SCU1 of the serial communication circuit 139 to its initial state.

When these serial communication functions are controlled to their initial state, a transfer instruction for setting the internal registers of the CPU 103 sets the upper address of the interrupt vector table (step AKS8). The upper address of the interrupt vector table is the upper address of the interrupt vector table located in the game program area of the ROM 101. For example, for the timer interrupt processing P_PCT for game control, which is executed in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt, the starting address is stored at a table position corresponding to the interrupt order. Such an upper address of the interrupt vector table is set in the I register by a transfer instruction for setting the internal registers of the CPU 103 (step AKS9).

Following step AKS9, the value stored in the Q register is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS10). The value stored in the Q register was set to the upper address of the function control register area by step AKS4. When this value is subtracted by 1, the upper address of the function setting register area in the setting example AKA01 shown in Figure 10-3 becomes stored in the Q register. In this way, after the function control registers in the function control register area have been set, the function setting registers in the function setting register area become configurable. At this time, the function setting register storage value table address is set by a transfer instruction to set the pointer (step AKS11). The function setting register storage value table address is the address of the function setting register storage value table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, the number of processes is loaded by a transfer instruction to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS12). In addition, the function setting register store instruction performs the setting using the function setting register storage value table (step AKS13). The function setting register store instruction should be an instruction that repeatedly performs the following steps until the number of operations reaches zero: identify the function setting register using the stored data at the address obtained by adding 1 to the address pointed to by the pointer; store the function setting register setting value indicated by the stored data at the address obtained by adding 2 to the address pointed to by the pointer into the identified function setting register; add 2 to the stored value of the pointer; and subtract 1. This process is repeated until the number of operations reaches zero. In this way, the initial setup of the function setting register becomes possible.

After the initial setup of the function setting register is completed in step AKS13, the access permission output value is stored in the RWM access protect register (step AKS14). The access permission output value of the RWM access protect register is set to, for example, 01[H] by a transfer instruction for setting the internal register of the CPU 103. Such an access permission output value is stored in the RWM access protect register by a transfer instruction for writing to the memory area at the starting address of the function setting register area. The RWM access protect register enables function control that grants access permission to the RWM RAM 102, corresponding to the setting of the access permission output value, 01[H]. Therefore, when the access permission output value is stored in the RWM access protect register in step AKS14, access to the RAM 102 is permitted in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko game machine 1.

After step AKS14, the upper address of the game work area, which is the working area of RAM 102, is set in the Q register (step AKS15), and then the power supply start corresponding process P_POWER_ON ends. In this way, after access to RAM 102 is permitted by step AKS14, the value F0[H], which indicates the upper address of the game work area in RAM 102, is set in the Q register. After step AKS15, when the first special transfer instruction, the LDQ instruction, is executed, the value F0[H] stored in the Q register can be used as the upper address of the transfer destination or transfer source without specifying it as an operand. This reduces the program capacity for processing using the game work area in RAM 102, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

Figure 10-8 shows an example configuration AKT01 of the function setting register storage value table used in the power supply start processing P_POWER_ON. In the power supply start processing P_POWER_ON, for example, the function setting register storage table, whose address is set in step AKS11, is used to load the number of processes in step AKS12, and the storage value of each function setting register is stored by the function setting register store instruction in step AKS13. In the function setting register storage value table of example configuration AKT01, the value 18 [H], indicating the number of processes, is stored at the starting address 1200 [H]. In step AKS12, this table data is read and loaded into the internal register of the CPU 103. Subsequently, the function setting register store instruction in step AKS13 sequentially reads the table data, which combines the lower addresses and storage values of the function setting registers, making it possible to store the storage values in the function setting registers corresponding to each lower address.

In the example configuration AKT01, the function setting register storage value table is structured so that the storage values of function setting registers with smaller lower address values can be set first, and the storage values of function setting registers with larger lower address values can be set later. This ensures that in the function setting register area, the storage values of function setting registers closer to the starting address are set first, followed by those closer to the final address. This simplifies the design and management of the data indicating the storage values of function setting registers, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

The 16-bit random number circuit 104A corresponds to four channels RL0 to RL3, and updates can be initiated from the channel where a stored value indicating the maximum random number value is set in the maximum value setting register. The 8-bit random number circuit 104B corresponds to four channels RS0 to RS3, and updates can be initiated from the channel where a stored value indicating the maximum random number value is set in the maximum value setting register. The function setting register area of the setting example AKA01 shown in Figure 10-3 is provided with the RL0 maximum value setting register at addresses FE3F[H] to FE40[H], the RL1 maximum value setting register at addresses FE41[H] to FE42[H], the RL2 maximum value setting register at addresses FE43[H] to FE44[H], and the RL3 maximum value setting register at addresses FE45[H] to FE46[H], corresponding to the four channels RL0 to RL3 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. Furthermore, this function setting register area includes the RS0 maximum value setting register at address FE47[H], the RS1 maximum value setting register at address FE48[H], the RS2 maximum value setting register at address FE49[H], and the RS3 maximum value setting register at address FE4A[H], corresponding to the four channels RS0 to RS4 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. In the example configuration AKT01, the function setting register storage value table is configured such that the storage value of the RL0 maximum value setting register is set first, followed by the RL2 maximum value setting register, then the RS1 maximum value setting register, then the RS2 maximum value setting register, and finally the RS3 maximum value setting register. Therefore, the updating of channel RL0 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A begins first, followed by the updating of channel RL2 in the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, then the updating of channel RS1 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, then the updating of channel RS2 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, and finally the updating of channel RS3 in the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. In this way, the updates begin sequentially from the random number values for which the maximum random number value is set. This increases the uncertainty of the random number values depending on the timing of the random number value update, reducing the processing load and enabling appropriate random number value updates.

The power supply start-up processing P_POWER_ON is a startup process executed based on the start of power supply in the pachinko game machine 1 and is included in the processes that can be called from the main game control processing P_MAIN. Using the function setting register storage value table in configuration example AKT01, it is possible to set a storage value in the function setting register area, which is a storage area for functions. At this time, the maximum random number value of the random number value updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B can be set, so the power supply start-up processing P_POWER_ON can be executed as a maximum value setting process. The 16-bit random number circuit 104A can update a first random number value consisting of 16 bits corresponding to 2 bytes as a specific number of bytes. The 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update a second random number value consisting of 8 bits corresponding to 1 byte as a predetermined number of bytes smaller than the specific number of bytes. Then, when executing the power supply start processing P_POWER_ON, the maximum value of the first random number that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A is set using the function setting register storage value table of the configuration example AKT01, and then the maximum value of the second random number that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B is set. In this way, by setting the first random number of a specific number of bytes and then setting the second random number of a predetermined number of bytes, the first and second random numbers can be stably updated, enabling appropriate random number updates.

Figure 10-9 shows an example configuration of the RWM access protect register. The RWM access protect register is located at address FF00[H] in the example configuration AKA02 of the function control register area shown in Figure 10-4. The value stored in the RWM access protect register will differ depending on whether access to the RAM 102 (which acts as the RWM) is denied or permitted.

Figure 10-9(A) shows an example of the bit configuration of the RWM access protect register. The RWM access protect register can store 8-bit data RAP with bit numbers from "0" to "7". Bit data RAP0 with bit number "0" can be set to 0[B] or 1[B]. In contrast, bit data with bit numbers "1" to "7" always represents a fixed value of 0[B] and is never set to "1".

Figure 10-9(B) illustrates an example of using the bit data RAP of the RWM access protect register. In the bit data RAP, bit number "0" (RAP0) is the RWM access control bit. Setting it to 0[B] prohibits RWM access, while setting it to 1[B] allows RWM access. In response to the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, bit number "0" (RAP0) is set to its initial value of 0[B]. This allows access to the RAM 102, which is the RWM, to be prohibited in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1.

Figure 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-off process P_POWER_OFF. The power-off process P_POWER_OFF is included in the processes callable from the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT shown in Figure 5, and can be executed in step S51 each time a timer interrupt occurs. When the CPU 103 executes the power-off process P_POWER_OFF, it sets the backup monitoring timer address using a transfer instruction to set a pointer (step AKS31). The backup monitoring timer address is the address of the backup monitoring timer located in the game work area of RAM 102.

Input port number "3" is entered (step AKS32). Input port number "3" is an input port assigned the port number "3" and includes a power confirmation signal input bit. A logical AND operation is then performed using the input data of input port number "3" and the check data corresponding to the bit position of the power confirmation signal input bit. At this time, it is determined whether the power confirmation signal input bit is "0" based on whether the zero flag is on or not (step AKS33). The power confirmation signal input bit indicates that the power confirmation signal is off when its bit value corresponds to "0" (0 [B]) and on when its bit value corresponds to "1" (1 [B]).

If the power confirmation signal input bit is "1" instead of "0" (step AKS33; No), the backup monitoring timer clear data is stored using a transfer command that updates the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS34). In step AKS34, by storing the clear data in the backup monitoring timer, the backup monitoring timer can be cleared when the power confirmation signal is ON, corresponding to the fact that power failure detection is not in progress.

If the power confirmation signal input bit is "0" in response to step AKS33 (step AKS33; Yes), the timing value from the backup monitoring timer is updated to increment by 1 (step AKS35). The backup monitoring timer is then loaded using a transfer command to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS36). Finally, a calculation return command (step AKS37) allows comparison between the timing value from the backup monitoring timer and the judgment value corresponding to the backup judgment time, confirming that the backup monitoring timer does not indicate the backup judgment time (step AKS38). This calculation return command corresponds to a zero flag that is turned off when the timing value from the backup monitoring timer and the judgment value corresponding to the backup judgment time differ, enabling the power-off process to end and the return to the special pattern process. Thus, if the backup monitoring timer does not indicate the backup judgment time (step AKS38; Yes), the power-off process ends.

If the backup monitoring timer indicates the backup determination time in response to step AKS38 (step AKS38; No), the checksum calculation process P_SUM_CALC is executed (step AKS39). The checksum calculation process P_SUM_CALC in step AKS39 can be the same as the checksum calculation process included in the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2 in the main game control process P_MAIN shown in Figure 4. By executing a common checksum calculation process in response to the start and stop of power supply in the pachinko game machine 1, it becomes possible to determine whether recovery using backup data is possible based on whether the stored contents in the game work area of RAM 102 have been retained without change. The checksum data created by the checksum calculation process P_SUM_CALC in step AKS39 is stored in the checksum buffer by a transfer command to write it to the storage area at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS40).

Following step AKS40, a clear data operation instruction is used to set the clear data to the output value data (step AKS41). This exclusive OR operation instruction calculates the exclusive OR of the stored values in a single register, resulting in the exclusive OR of all identical bit values. Therefore, the stored value can be initialized to the clear data 00[H]. This clear data is then stored in the RWM access protect register via a transfer instruction to write it to the memory area at the starting address of the function setting register area (step AKS42). The RWM access protect register enables functional control that prohibits access to the RWM (Rapid Wave Memory) RAM 102 in response to the setting of the clear data 00[H]. Therefore, when the clear data is stored in the RWM access protect register by step AKS42, access to RAM 102 is prohibited in response to the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 being cut off.

After step AKS42, output port numbers "0" through "10" are cleared (step AKS43). Output port numbers "0" through "10" are the output ports with port numbers from "0" to "10," and represent all output ports in the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, step AKS43 sets all output ports in the game control microcomputer 100 to a clear state in response to the power supply stoppage in the pachinko machine 1. At this time, a transfer instruction to set the internal register of the CPU 103 sets the connection confirmation signal off output value (step AKS44). The connection confirmation signal off output value is a value indicating that the connection confirmation signal is off; for example, it can be 01 [H]. This connection confirmation signal off output value is stored in the output port number "1" register by a transfer instruction to write it to the memory area at the specified address in the function control register area (step AKS45). This sets the connection confirmation signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board to the off state.

Following step AKS45, a transfer instruction to set the internal register of the CPU 103 sets the PTC0 interrupt disable output value (step AKS46). The PTC0 interrupt disable output value is an output value that disables the generation of timer interrupts using channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136. This PTC0 interrupt disable output value is stored in the PTC0 control register by a transfer instruction to write it to the function setting register at the specified address in the function setting register area (step AKS47). The PTC0 control register can set the usage status of the timing function using channel PTC0 of the timer circuit 136. In step AKS47, the PTC0 interrupt disable output value set in step AKS46 is stored in the PTC0 control register, and in response to the power supply stoppage in the pachinko machine 1, the timer interrupt for game control is disabled.

Once the settings corresponding to the elapsed backup judgment time are configured, the system transitions to a standby state through loop processing. In this standby state, input port number "3" is input (step AKS48), and it is determined whether the power confirmation signal input bit is "0" (step AKS49). If the power confirmation signal is off and the power confirmation signal input bit is "0" (step AKS49; Yes), the loop processing returns to step AKS48 and continues. This allows the system to maintain a standby state until the operation stops due to power outage in response to a power supply interruption in the pachinko machine 1, thereby preventing undesirable changes to stored data and runaway processing by the CPU 103.

If the power confirmation signal input bit is "1" and not "0" (Step AKS49; No), corresponding to step AKS49, the power-off recovery vector table address is set to the stack pointer (Step AKS50), and then the power-off process P_POWER_OFF is terminated by an interrupt return instruction. The power-off recovery vector table address is the address of the power-off recovery vector table located in the game program area of ROM 101. The interrupt return instruction uses the stack pointer as a pointer to set the data stored in the memory area indicated by the value stored in the stack pointer to the program counter. For example, the data stored in the memory area indicated by the value stored in the stack pointer is set to the lower byte of the program counter, and the data stored in the memory area indicated by the value specified by the value obtained by adding 1 to the value stored in the stack pointer is set to the upper byte of the program counter.

Figure 10-11 illustrates an example of the data configuration used for the power outage processing P_POWER_OFF. In the power outage processing P_POWER_OFF, for example, step AKS38 executes branch processing using the timing value of the backup monitoring timer, and step AKS40 saves checksum data using the checksum buffer. Furthermore, by setting the power outage recovery vector table address in step AKS50, if the pachinko machine 1 does not stop operating after detecting a power outage and normal power supply is restored, the game control program can be executed from the beginning. In this way, the power outage processing P_POWER_OFF enables control of the pachinko machine 1 when its power supply is interrupted, using the backup monitoring timer, checksum buffer, and power outage recovery vector table.

Figure 10-11(A) shows an example configuration AKB01 of the storage area that serves as the backup data area. The backup data area of example AKB01 can store backup setting data used when backing up the stored data in the game work area of RAM 102. This backup data area includes a backup monitoring timer at address F000[H] and a checksum buffer at address F0DE[H]. Address F000[H] is the starting address of the game work area, and address F0DE[H] is the ending address of the game work area. By providing backup data areas at the starting and ending addresses of the game work area in this way, proper backup of the stored data in the game work area of RAM 102 becomes possible.

Figure 10-11(B) shows an example configuration AKT11 of the power-off recovery vector table. The power-off recovery vector table in example AKT11 can specify the recovery address from the power-off process in response to an interrupt return instruction when normal power supply is restored. The power-off recovery vector table is composed of table data including lower address specification data 00[H] stored at address 0016[H] in the game program area of ROM 101, and upper address specification data 00[H] stored at address 0017[H] in the game program area of ROM 101. In step AKS50 of the power-off process P_POWER_OFF, data indicating address 0016[H] is set in the stack pointer as the power-off recovery vector table address. Subsequently, an interrupt return instruction sets the stored value of the program counter to 0000[H], restoring processing and enabling the main game control process P_MAIN to be executed from the beginning.

Figure 10-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The random number update process P_RANDOM is included in the processes that can be called from the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control shown in Figure 5, and can be executed in step S56 in response to the occurrence of a periodic timer interrupt due to the elapsed of a predetermined time, such as 4 ms. On the other hand, the random number update process P_RANDOM is not included in the processes that can be called from the main process P_MAIN for game control shown in Figure 4, and is not executed in the loop process that is repeated after step S7 until a timer interrupt occurs. Therefore, although the random number update process P_RANDOM is included in the first process that can be executed in response to a timer interrupt due to the elapsed time, it is not included in the second process that can be repeatedly executed until the first process is executed. Furthermore, while the random number update process P_RANDOM can be called and executed in the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT, which controls the progress of the game, it cannot be called and executed in the standby process, which is a repeating loop process after the startup process such as the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON in step S1, in the main game control process P_MAIN, which is executed based on the start of power supply in the pachinko machine 1.

The random number update process P_RANDOM uses the internal registers of the CPU 103, such as the B register, DE register, and HL register, to update the numerical data representing the values of the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols and the random numbers MR2-1 for regular winning symbols. The random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols are used to determine the confirmed special symbols, which are the display results of special symbols, in the special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The random numbers MR2-1 for regular winning symbols are used to determine the confirmed regular symbols, which are the display results of regular symbols, in the regular symbol game, which is a variable display of regular symbols on the regular symbol display device 20. The random number update process P_RANDOM can update the random numbers MR1-2 (for winning symbols) and MR2-1 (for regular winning symbols) using the B register, DE register, and HL register, which are common internal registers.

When the CPU 103 executes the random number update process P_RANDOM, it sets the address of the random number counter for the winning symbol using a transfer instruction to set the HL register to be used as a random number pointer (step AKS61). The address of the random number counter for the winning symbol is the address of the random number counter located in the game work area of RAM 102. The random number pointer can store the address of the random number counter corresponding to the random number to be updated, and the random number to be updated can be specified by setting the stored value. In step AKS61, the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol can be set as the random number to be updated by storing the address of the random number counter for the winning symbol in the random number pointer using the LDQ instruction.

Following step AKS61, a transfer instruction is issued to set the B register, which will be used as the maximum random number register, thereby setting the maximum random number corresponding to the maximum random number determination value for the winning symbol (step AKS62). The maximum random number register can store the maximum value that the random number to be updated can take, and the maximum random number can be specified by setting the stored value. In step AKS62, for the random numbers MR1-2 for the winning symbol, the maximum value included in the update range of random numbers MR1-2, such as C7[H] corresponding to "199", is stored in the maximum random number register using the LD instruction. This allows setting the maximum random number of random numbers MR1-2, which were the random numbers to be updated in step AKS61.

Following step AKS62, a transfer instruction is used to set the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol by setting the DE register to be used as the initial value pointer (step AKS63). The random number initial value data buffer address for the winning symbol is the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol located in the game work area of RAM102. The initial value pointer can store the address of the random number initial value data buffer corresponding to the random number to be updated, and the random number initial value can be obtained or changed by setting the stored value. In step AKS63, the address of the random number initial value data buffer for the winning symbol is stored in the initial value pointer by the LDQ instruction, thereby setting the random number initial value to be obtainable and changeable, corresponding to the random number MR1-2 which was set as the random number to be updated in step AKS61. Subsequently, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed by a subroutine call instruction (step AKS64). Step AKS64's initial value change random number update process P_RANCP enables the updating of the random numbers MR1-2, which are the random values to be updated for the winning symbols, and the modification of the initial value of the random numbers, based on the settings made in steps AKS61 to AKS63.

In step AKS64, after the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, a transfer instruction is used to set the HL register used as the random number pointer, thereby setting the address of the random number counter for normal winning symbols (step AKS65). The address of the random number counter for normal winning symbols is the address of the random number counter for normal winning symbols located in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS65, the LDQ instruction stores the address of the random number counter for normal winning symbols in the random number pointer, allowing the random number MR2-1 for normal winning symbols to be set as the random value to be updated.

Following step AKS65, a transfer instruction is used to set the B register, which will be used as the maximum random number register, thereby setting the maximum random number corresponding to the maximum random number determination value for the winning symbol in normal symbols (step AKS66). In step AKS66, for the random number MR2-1 used for the winning symbol in normal symbols, the maximum value included in the update range of the random number MR2-1, such as C6[H] corresponding to the maximum value "198", is stored in the maximum random number register using the LD instruction. This allows setting the maximum random number of the random number MR2-1 that was the random number value to be updated in step AKS65.

Following step AKS66, a transfer instruction is used to set the DE register to be used as the initial value pointer, thereby setting the address of the random number initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols (step AKS67). The random number initial value data buffer address for normal winning symbols is the address of the random number initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols located in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS67, the LDQ instruction stores the address of the random number initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols in the initial value pointer, thereby making it possible to obtain and change the initial value of the random number MR2-1, which was set as the random value to be updated in step AKS65. Subsequently, a subroutine call instruction, which is common to step AKS64, is used to execute the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP (step AKS68). Step AKS68's initial value change random number update process P_RANCP enables the updating of the random number MR2-1, which is the random number to be updated for the winning symbols in normal symbols, and the modification of the initial value of the random number, based on the settings made in steps AKS65 to AKS67.

Figure 10-13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the data structure used for the random number update process P_RANDOM. In the random number update process P_RANDOM, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS64 using the random number counter for winning symbols, whose address is set in the random number pointer by step AKS61, and the initial random number data buffer for winning symbols, whose address is set in the initial value pointer by step AKS63. Furthermore, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS68 using the random number counter for normal winning symbols, whose address is set in the random number pointer by step AKS65, and the initial random number data buffer for normal winning symbols, whose address is set in the initial value pointer by step AKS67. The random number counter for winning symbols is provided in the special symbol random number buffer area and can store numerical data corresponding to the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols. The random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols is located in the random number data area for winning symbols and can store numerical data corresponding to the random number initial values of random numbers MR1-2. The random number counter for normal winning symbols is located in the random number data area for winning symbols and can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR2-1 for normal winning symbols. The random number initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols is located in the random number data area for winning symbols and can store numerical data corresponding to the random number initial value of random number MR2-1. Thus, the random number update process P_RANDOM enables software-based updating of random numbers MR1-2 and MR2-1 using a random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols located in the random number data area for winning symbols, a random number counter for normal winning symbols, a random number initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols, and a random number counter for winning symbols located in the random number buffer area for special symbols.

Figure 10-13(A) shows an example configuration AKB11 of the random number data area for winning symbols. The random number data area for winning symbols in example configuration AKB11 includes a random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols at address F050[H], a random number initial value counter for winning symbols at address F051[H], a random number counter for normal winning symbols at address F052[H], a random number initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols at address F053[H], and a random number initial value counter for normal winning symbols at address F054[H]. Of these, the address F050[H] of the random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols is set to the initial value pointer by step AKS63 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, the address F052[H] of the random number counter for normal winning symbols is set to the random number pointer by step AKS65 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, and the address F053[H] of the random number initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols is set to the initial value pointer by step AKS67 of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The random number counter for winning symbols can store numerical data corresponding to the random numbers MR1-3 that become the initial values for winning symbols. The random number counter for normal winning symbols can store numerical data corresponding to the random numbers MR2-2 that become the initial values for normal winning symbols.

Figure 10-13(B) shows an example configuration AKB12 of the special symbol random number buffer area. The special symbol random number buffer area of example configuration AKB12 includes a random number buffer for special symbol determination at address F07F[H], a random number counter for winning symbols at address F081[H], a random number buffer for selecting the type of variation pattern at address F082[H], a random number buffer for variation patterns at address F083[H], and a random number buffer for selecting the losing animation at address F084[H]. Of these, address F081[H] of the random number counter for winning symbols is set to a random number pointer by step AKS61 of the random number update process P_RANDOM. The special symbol determination random number buffer can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination obtained from the 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The random number buffer for selecting the variation pattern type can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for variation pattern type selection, obtained from the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number buffer for variation patterns can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for variation patterns, obtained from the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. The random number buffer for selecting the losing animation can store numerical data corresponding to the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation, obtained from the 16-bit random number circuit 104A.

Figure 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is included in the processes that can be called from the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12. It can be executed in step AKS64 after setting the random numbers MR1-2 for the winning symbols in steps AKS61 to AKS63, and in step AKS68 after setting the random numbers MR2-1 for the normal and winning symbols in steps AKS65 to AKS67. In this initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, the value of the random numbers MR1-2 can be updated in step AKS64 using numerical data corresponding to the random numbers MR1-2 for the winning symbols. Furthermore, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP enables the updating of the random number MR2-1 in step AKS68 using numerical data corresponding to the random number MR2-1 used for the normal winning symbols.

When the CPU 103 executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, it first executes a comparison addition instruction (step AKS101). This comparison addition instruction uses the data stored at the address indicated by the value of the HL register, which is a random number pointer, as the value to be updated, and the value of the B register, which is a random number maximum value register, as the comparison judgment value, and can be executed by a single ICPLD instruction, which is a third special transfer instruction. The value of the HL register, which is a random number pointer, indicates the address of the random number counter where the numerical data corresponding to the random number to be updated is stored. The value of the B register, which is a random number maximum value register, indicates the random number maximum value set corresponding to the random number to be updated. Then, if the count value of the random number counter indicating the random number to be updated is less than the value of the random number maximum value register, the count value of the random number counter is updated to increment by 1, thereby incrementing the random number to be updated by 1. In contrast, if the count of the random number counter indicating the random number to be updated is greater than or equal to the value stored in the maximum random number register, the random number counter is cleared and its count is initialized to "0," thereby changing the random number to be updated to the minimum random number. Therefore, the comparison-add instruction in step AKS101 is a single instruction that includes comparing the random number to be updated with the maximum random number, adding 1 to the random number if the comparison result is less than the maximum random number, and changing the random number to be updated to the minimum random number if the comparison result is greater than or equal to the maximum random number. Thus, when updating the random number to be updated using the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, a single comparison-add instruction is executed first. Executing such a single comparison-add instruction first suppresses the occurrence of malfunctions and enables proper updating of the random number.

In step AKS101, when the compare-add instruction is executed, a transfer instruction for reading stored data loads the random number value pointed to by the random number pointer (step AKS102). The random number pointer and the initial value pointer are also swapped (step AKS103). Then, the random number value loaded in step AKS102 is compared with the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS104). At this point, it is determined whether the compared random number value is different from the value stored in the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS105). The value stored in the DE register, which is the initial value pointer, indicates the address of the random number initial value data buffer corresponding to the random number value to be updated. Therefore, in step AKS104, after executing the compare-add instruction in step AKS101, the updated random number value after the comparison-add instruction is compared with the random number initial value.

If, in step AKS105, the random value is different from the value stored in the random initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS105; Yes), the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP terminates. When the comparison and addition instruction in step AKS101 is executed, the count value of the random number counter indicating the target random value to be updated will indicate the updated target random value. Then, if the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP terminates based on the result of step AKS105, the value stored in the random number counter indicating the updated target random value is stored as the current random value. Therefore, in step AKS105, if the updated target random value does not match the initial random value, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP terminates, allowing the updated target random value to be stored as the current random value.

In step AKS105, if the random value is the same as the value stored in the random initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS105; No), the initial random number counter pointed to by adding 1 to the value stored in the initial value pointer is loaded (step AKS106). In the example configuration AKB11 of the random number data area for winning symbols shown in Figure 10-13(A), the initial random number counter for winning symbols is located at the next address F051[H] after adding 1 to address F050[H], where the random initial value data buffer for winning symbols is located. Also, the initial random number counter for normal winning symbols is located at the next address F054[H] after adding 1 to address F053[H], where the random initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols is located. Therefore, in step AKS106, if the stored value of the initial value pointer points to the address of the initial random number data buffer for winning symbols, the count value of the initial random number counter for winning symbols is read. Also, in step AKS106, if the stored value of the initial value pointer points to the address of the initial random number data buffer for normal winning symbols, the count value of the initial random number counter for normal winning symbols is read. In this way, in step AKS106, the count value of the initial random number counter can be read as the initial random number value.

In step AKS106, when the initial random number counter is loaded, the count value of the initial random number counter read is stored in the random number counter pointed to by the random number pointer (step AKS107). Since the value stored in the random number pointer indicates the address of the random number counter corresponding to the random number to be updated, step AKS107 allows the count value of the initial random number counter to be stored as the current random number to be updated. Therefore, if the updated random number to be updated matches the initial random number value based on the judgment result in step AKS105, step AKS107 allows the initial random number value read in step AKS106 to be stored as the current random number.

Following step AKS107, the count value of the initial random number counter read in step AKS106 is stored in the random number initial value data buffer pointed to by the initial value pointer (step AKS108), after which the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP terminates. Since the value stored in the initial value pointer indicates the address of the random number initial value data buffer corresponding to the random number to be updated, step AKS108 allows the count value of the initial random number counter to be stored as the new random number initial value. Therefore, if the updated random number to be updated matches the random number initial value based on the judgment result in step AKS105, step AKS107 stores the initial value random number as the current random number, and step AKS108 allows the initial value random number read in step AKS106 to be stored as the new random number initial value. In this way, setting a new random number initial value increases the uncertainty of the random number, and storing it as the current random number prevents an increase in data capacity, enabling appropriate random number updates.

The random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12, after setting the target random number value, maximum random number value, and initial random number value for the random numbers MR1-2 for the winning symbols in steps AKS61 to AKS63, executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP enables the updating of the target random number value and the change of the initial random number value based on the settings for the target random number value, maximum random number value, and initial random number value. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 enables the updating of the random numbers MR1-2 for the winning symbols, which were set as the target random number value in step AKS61, using the maximum random number value set in step AKS62 and the initial random number value set in step AKS63. Furthermore, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 allows the random number initial value to be changed if the value of the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which was set as the random value to be updated in step AKS61, matches the initial random value set in step AKS63. In this way, appropriate random value updates become possible through updating the set random value to be updated.

The random number update process P_RANDOM executes the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68, after setting the target random number value, maximum random number value, and initial random number value for the random number MR2-1 for the winning symbols in steps AKS65 to AKS67. The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 enables updating the random number MR2-1 for the winning symbols, which was set as the target random number value in step AKS65, using the maximum random number value set in step AKS66 and the initial random number value set in step AKS67. Furthermore, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 enables changing the initial random number value if the value of the random number MR2-1 for the winning symbols, which was set as the target random number value in step AKS65, matches the initial random number value set in step AKS67. In this way, updating the set target random number values enables the appropriate updating of random numbers. Furthermore, updating the set target random number values or changing the initial random number values also enables the appropriate updating of random numbers.

The random number update process P_RANDOM can update the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols, which are used to determine the display result of special symbols, through a first update process consisting of steps AKS61 to AKS64, and the random numbers MR2-1 for winning symbols, which are used to determine the display result of regular symbols, through a second update process consisting of steps AKS65 to AKS68. Then, steps AKS61 to AKS64 update the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols as the first random value, and then steps AKS65 to AKS68 update the random numbers MR2-1 for winning symbols for regular symbols as the second random value. The confirmed special symbols that result in the display of special symbols correspond to the maximum number of times the big prize slot is opened during a jackpot game. Furthermore, the confirmed special symbols, which are the display results of special symbols, may correspond to whether or not the game is controlled to a probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game state, or to the maximum number of variable display attempts that can be performed in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In contrast, the confirmed normal symbols, which are the display results of normal symbols, correspond to the opening time and number of openings of the second large prize slot. Therefore, the display results of special symbols attract more attention from players than the display results of normal symbols. By updating the random number update process P_RANDOM, which is a specific update process, random numbers MR1-2 as the first random value, and then updating random numbers MR2-1 as the second random value, the first random value used to determine the display result that attracts the player's attention is updated before the second random value, thereby suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions and enabling appropriate random value updates.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, steps AKS61 to AKS64 can update the random numbers MR1-2, which are the first random values, and steps AKS65 to AKS68 can update the random numbers MR2-1, which are the second random values. Then, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64 can be called and executed in response to the random numbers MR1-2, which are the first random values, and the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS68 can be called and executed in response to the random numbers MR2-1, which are the second random values. In this way, the random number update process P_RANDOM, which is a specific update process, updates the random numbers MR1-2 as the first random values and the random numbers MR2-1 as the second random values by calling the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, which is a common update process, in response to the first random values and the second random values, and makes their initial values changeable. This common update process, P_RANCP, which modifies initial values and updates random numbers, prevents an increase in program size and allows for stable updates of the first and second random numbers, enabling appropriate random number updates.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, steps AKS61 to AKS64, which enable updating of the first random number MR1-2, constitute the first update process, and steps AKS65 to AKS68, which enable updating of the second random number MR2-1, constitute the second update process. In the first update process, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP can be called and executed by step AKS64, and in the second update process, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP can be called and executed by step AKS68. In this way, the random number update process P_RANDOM updates the random numbers MR1-2 as the first random number and the random numbers MR2-1 as the second random number by calling the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP as a common update process in both the first and second update processes, and makes their initial values changeable. This common update process, P_RANCP, which modifies initial values and updates random numbers, prevents an increase in program size and enables stable updates of the first and second random numbers, allowing for appropriate random number updates.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, steps AKS61 to AKS64, which enable updating of the first random number MR1-2, constitute the first update process, and steps AKS65 to AKS68, which enable updating of the second random number MR2-1, constitute the second update process. The HL register, B register, and DE register of the CPU 103, which are common internal storage means, are used to enable updating of the first random number MR1-2 and the second random number MR2-1. In this way, the first and second random numbers are stably updated using common internal storage means, enabling the updating of appropriate random numbers.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM, before executing the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in step AKS64, reference information such as the random number counter address for winning symbols, the maximum judgment value for random numbers for winning symbols, and the initial value data buffer address for random numbers for winning symbols are stored in the HL register, B register, and DE register of the CPU 103, which are internal storage means, in steps AKS61 to AKS63. Furthermore, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, before executing the initial value change random number update process P_RANDCP in step AKS68, reference information such as the random number counter address for normal winning symbols, the maximum judgment value for random numbers for normal winning symbols, and the initial value data buffer address for normal winning symbols are stored in the HL register, B register, and DE register of the CPU 103, which are internal storage means, in steps AKS65 to AKS67. The instructions used in step AKS61 to update the random numbers MR1-2, which become the first random values, and the instructions used in step AKS65 to update the random numbers MR2-1, which become the second random values, are common instructions in that they set the HL register of the CPU 103. Step AKS61 sets the random number counter address for the winning symbols, but step AKS65 sets the random number counter address for the normal winning symbols, so different reference information can be set. The instructions used in step AKS62 to update the random numbers MR1-2, which become the first random values, and the instructions used in step AKS66 to update the random numbers MR2-1, which become the second random values, are common instructions in that they set the B register of the CPU 103. Step AKS62 sets the maximum random number value corresponding to the maximum random number judgment value for the winning symbols, but step AKS66 sets the maximum random number value corresponding to the maximum random number judgment value for the normal winning symbols, so different reference information can be set. Steps AKS63 and AKS67 use instructions to update the random numbers MR1-2, which become the first random values, and AKS67 use instructions to update the random numbers MR2-1, which become the second random values, are common instructions in that they set the DE register of the CPU 103. Step AKS63 sets the data buffer address for the initial random number value for the winning symbol, while step AKS67 sets the data buffer address for the initial random number value for the normal symbol winning symbol, so different reference information can be set. In steps AKS61 to AKS63 and AKS65 to AKS67, different reference information can be set using common instructions such as the LD instruction and LDQ instruction, which are transfer instructions for setting the internal registers of the CPU 103. Then, in steps AKS64 and AKS68, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is called and executed by calling a common subroutine instruction. Thus, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, which is a specific update process, the instructions used to update the first random number MR1-2 and the instructions used to update the second random number MR2-1 are common. By making it possible to update the first random number MR1-2 and the second random number MR2-1 using common instructions, it becomes possible to stably update the first and second random numbers and update the random numbers appropriately.

The random number update process P_RANDOM enables the updating of the first random number, MR1-2, through steps AKS61 to AKS64 (the first update process), and enables the updating of the second random number, MR2-1, through steps AKS65 to AKS68 (the second update process). Steps AKS64 and AKS68 then call and execute the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP. As shown in Figure 10-14, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP first executes a single comparison-add instruction. Therefore, in both cases—updating the first random number MR1-2 and updating the second random number MR2-1—the comparison-add instruction is made executable first. Executing such a comparison-add instruction first suppresses the occurrence of errors in the first and second random numbers, enabling appropriate random number updates.

The initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, when executed in step AKS64 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, can update the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols, and can change the initial random number values corresponding to the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols using the random numbers MR1-3, which are the initial values for winning symbols. Furthermore, when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS68 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, it can update the random numbers MR2-1 for normal winning symbols, and can change the initial random number values corresponding to the random numbers MR2-1 for normal winning symbols using the random numbers MR2-2, which are the initial values for normal winning symbols. Therefore, the random numbers MR1-3, which are the initial values for the winning symbols, are the first initial values used when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS64 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, corresponding to the case where the random number to be updated is the first random value, the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbols. The random numbers MR2-2, which are the initial values for the winning symbols in the normal symbols, are the second initial values used when the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in step AKS68 of the random number update process P_RANDOM, corresponding to the case where the random number to be updated is the second random value, the random number MR2-1 for the winning symbols in the normal symbols.

Figure 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values. The random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values is included in the processes that can be called from the main process P_MAIN for game control shown in Figure 4, and can be executed in step S9 of a loop process that is repeated after step S7 until a timer interrupt occurs. Furthermore, the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values is included in the processes that can be called from the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control shown in Figure 5, and can be executed in step AKS57 in response to the occurrence of a periodic timer interrupt due to the elapsed of a predetermined time, such as 4 ms. Therefore, the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values is included in a first process that can be executed in response to a timer interrupt due to the elapsed of a predetermined time, and a second process that can be repeatedly executed until the first process is executed. Furthermore, the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT can be called and executed in the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT, which controls the progress of the game. It can also be called and executed in step S9, which is part of the standby process that is a repeating loop process, after the startup process such as the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON in step S1, in the main game control process P_MAIN, which is executed based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1. Thus, the initial value determination random number update process P_IFINIT is included in processes that can be executed in response to periodic timer interrupts, as well as in processes that can be executed repeatedly at irregular intervals. Because the update cycle and speed of the initial value random number are indeterminate, the uncertainty of the initial value random number is increased, enabling appropriate random number updates.

When the CPU 103 executes the P_TINIT random number update process for determining the initial value, it sets the address of the initial random number counter for the winning symbol using a transfer instruction to set a pointer (step AKS81). The address of the initial random number counter for the winning symbol is address F051[H], which is assigned to the initial random number counter for the winning symbol in the example configuration AKB11 of the random number data area for the winning symbol shown in Figure 10-13(A). When the pointer is set in this way, the count value of the initial random number counter for the winning symbol can be updated within the update range of "0" to "199" using a comparison and addition instruction (step AKS82). This comparison and addition instruction uses the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer as the value to be updated, and the immediate value specified by the operand as the comparison judgment value, and can be executed by a single ICPLD instruction, which is a third special transfer instruction. The stored value of the pointer indicates the address of the random number counter where the numerical data corresponding to the initial random value to be updated is stored. The immediate value specified by the operand indicates the maximum value of the initial random number set corresponding to the random number value to be updated. If the count of the random number counter indicating the random number value to be updated is less than the maximum value of the initial random number, the random number counter is updated by adding 1 to its count, thereby increasing the random number value to be updated by 1. Conversely, if the count of the random number counter indicating the random number value to be updated is greater than or equal to the value stored in the maximum value of the initial random number register, the random number counter is cleared and its count is initialized to "0", thereby changing the random number value to be updated to the minimum value of the initial random number. Therefore, the comparison-add instruction in step AKS82 is a single instruction that includes setting the random numbers MR1-3, which are the initial values for the winning symbols, as the random values for the initial values to be updated, comparing these random values with the maximum value for the initial values, adding 1 to the random values for the initial values to be updated if the comparison result is less than the maximum value for the initial values, and changing the random values for the initial values to be updated to the minimum value if the comparison result is greater than or equal to the maximum value for the initial values. Note that the comparison-add instruction is not limited to the ICPLD instruction, where the address of the stored data indicating the values to be updated is specified by a pointer; for example, it can also be used in the ICPLDQ instruction, where the upper address is set using the Q register and the lower address is set using the immediate value specified in the first operand of the comparison-add instruction. In this case, the immediate value specified in the second operand of the comparison-add instruction should be set as the comparison judgment value. By updating the random values for the initial values to be updated using such a comparison-add instruction, the occurrence of malfunctions can be suppressed, and appropriate random value updates become possible.

After step AKS82, a transfer instruction to set a pointer sets the address of the initial random number counter for the winning symbol in the normal symbol sequence (step AKS83). The address of the initial random number counter for the winning symbol in the normal symbol sequence is address F054[H], which is assigned to the initial random number counter for the winning symbol in the example configuration AKB11 for the winning symbol random number data area shown in Figure 10-13(A). Once the pointer is set in this way, a comparison and addition instruction makes it possible to update the count value of the initial random number counter for the winning symbol in the normal symbol sequence within the update range of "1" to "198" (step AKS84), and the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT ends. The comparison and addition instruction in step AKS84 can be the same comparison and addition instruction as in step AKS82. However, in the comparison-add instruction of step AKS84, the random number MR2-2, which is the initial value for the winning symbol in a normal symbol game, is set as the random value for the initial value to be updated. Therefore, the immediate value specified by the operand indicating the maximum value of the initial random number is set to a different value than that of the comparison-add instruction in step AKS82. Consequently, the comparison-add instruction of step AKS84 is a single instruction that includes setting the random number MR2-2, which is the initial value for the winning symbol in a normal symbol game, as the random value for the initial value to be updated; comparing that random value with the maximum value of the initial random number; adding 1 to the random value for the initial value to be updated if the comparison result is less than the maximum value of the initial random number; and changing the random value for the initial value to be updated to the minimum random number if the comparison result is greater than or equal to the maximum value of the initial random number. By updating the random value for the initial value to be updated using such a comparison-add instruction, the occurrence of malfunctions can be suppressed, and appropriate random value updates can be made possible.

The random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values updates the random numbers MR1-3, which will be the initial values for the winning symbols, in steps AKS81 and AKS82 as an update to the first random number value for initial values. At the same time, the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values updates the random numbers MR2-2, which will be the initial values for the winning symbols of the normal symbols, in steps AKS83 and AKS84 as an update to the second random number value for initial values. The random numbers MR1-3, which will be the initial values for the winning symbols, are the first random number values used when changing the initial random number value when the random number value to be updated is the first random number value, MR1-2, for the winning symbols. The random number MR2-2, which will be the initial values for the winning symbols of the normal symbols, are the second random number values used when changing the initial random number value when the random number value to be updated is the second random number value, MR2-1, for the winning symbols of the normal symbols. Then, steps AKS81 and AKS82 of the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining the initial value become the first initial value update process, which allows updating the first random number value for the initial value. Steps AKS83 and AKS84 of the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining the initial value become the second initial value update process, which allows updating the second random number value for the initial value. By updating the first and second random number values for the initial value in this way, it becomes possible to update the random numbers appropriately so that the uncertainty of the first and second random numbers is reliably increased.

Furthermore, the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values updates the random numbers MR1-3, which will be the initial values for the winning symbols, as the first initial random values in steps AKS81 and AKS82. Subsequently, in steps AKS83 and AKS84, it updates the random numbers MR2-2, which will be the initial values for the winning symbols in the normal symbols, as the second initial random values. Therefore, the random number update process P_TFINIT updates the random numbers MR1-3, which will be the initial values for the winning symbols (the first initial random values), in steps AKS81 and AKS82, and then updates the random numbers MR2-1, which will be the initial values for the winning symbols (the second initial random values), in steps AKS83 and AKS84.

Figure 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON. The start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON is included in the processes that can be called from the special pattern process P_TPROC shown in Figure 6, and can be executed in step S104 if the first start gate prize response flag is on in step S103, and can be executed in step S108 if the second start gate prize response flag is on in step S107. When the CPU 103 executes the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON, it sets the start gate prize memory counter address by a transfer instruction for setting a pointer (step AKS201). The start gate prize memory counter address is the address of the first start gate prize memory counter or the second start gate prize memory counter provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS201, different addresses in the game work area can be specified corresponding to the first or second start-gate prize table set by the special symbol process P_TPROC. For example, the upper address F0[H] of the game work area, which serves as the work area, is set to the upper byte of the pointer by a transfer instruction, and the lower address of the start-gate prize memory counter stored in the first or second start-gate prize table pointed to by the table pointer is set to the lower byte of the pointer by a transfer instruction. As a result, the value indicating the address of the first or second start-gate prize memory counter is stored in the internal register of the CPU 103, which acts as the pointer. Subsequently, the start-gate prize memory counter is loaded by a transfer instruction to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS202).

Following step AKS202, it is determined whether the count value of the start gate prize memory counter is greater than or equal to the maximum counter value (step AKS203). For example, a comparison return instruction allows comparison between the value loaded in step AKS202 and the maximum counter value, such as "4". If the value is greater than or equal to the maximum counter value (step AKS203; Yes), the start gate switch passage process P_TZU_ON terminates and the process returns to the special symbol process P_TPROC. Conversely, if the value is less than the maximum counter value (step AKS203; No), the count value of the start gate prize memory counter is updated to increment by 1 (step AKS204). In this case, an arithmetic logic operation instruction that increments the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer allows updating the count value of either the first or second start gate prize memory counter by incrementing by 1.

After step AKS204, the special symbol determination buffer address is set as the transfer destination (step AKS205). The special symbol determination buffer address is the address of the first special symbol determination buffer contained in the first special symbol hold buffer or the second special symbol determination buffer contained in the second special symbol hold buffer, both located in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS205, different addresses in the game work area can be specified, corresponding to the first or second start-gate entry table set by the special symbol process P_TPROC, and the count value of the first or second start-gate entry counter loaded in step AKS202.

The first special symbol hold buffer consists of a first hold memory buffer comprising a first special symbol determination buffer, a first winning symbol buffer, a first variation pattern type selection buffer, a first variation pattern buffer, and a first losing animation selection buffer. This buffer is allocated as multiple memory areas, such as five memory areas corresponding to buffer numbers "0" through "4," corresponding to the number of first hold memories where the variable display of the first special symbol is currently being executed and the number of first hold memories where it has not yet been executed. The second special symbol hold buffer consists of a second special symbol determination buffer, a second winning symbol buffer, a second variation pattern type selection buffer, a second variation pattern buffer, and a second losing animation selection buffer. This buffer is allocated as multiple memory areas, such as five memory areas corresponding to buffer numbers "0" through "4," corresponding to the number of second hold memories where the variable display of the second special symbol is currently being executed and the number of second hold memories where it has not yet been executed.

In step AKS205, the value corresponding to the buffer size of the first and second reserved memory buffers is multiplied by the count value of the start gate entry counter, and this multiplied value is added to the lower address of the first or second reserved memory buffer with buffer number "1". By setting this added value to the transfer destination pointer, the buffer address for special symbol determination can be set as the transfer destination.

Following step AKS205, the RL0 hard latch random value register address is set (step AKS206). The RL0 hard latch random value register address is the address of the RL0 hard latch random value register located in the function control register area. For example, the upper address FF[H] of the function control register area is set to the upper byte of the pointer by a transfer instruction, and the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random value register stored in the first or second start-gate prize table pointed to by the table pointer is set to the lower byte of the pointer by a transfer instruction. The first start-gate prize table stores the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random value register with buffer number "0". The second start-gate prize table stores the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random value register with buffer number "1". As a result, different addresses for the RL0 hard latch random value register are stored in the internal registers of the CPU 103, which act as the pointer, depending on whether it is a first-gate prize or a second-gate prize.

Following step AKS206, a transfer instruction is issued to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer, loading the RL0 hard latch random value register (step AK207). The value stored in the RL0 hard latch random value register obtained in this way is then stored in the special symbol determination random number buffer by a transfer instruction to write it to the storage area at the specified address in the RAM 102 game work area (step AKS208). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RL0 hard latch random value register in the special symbol determination random number buffer, numerical data representing the value of the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 can be extracted, and the value of random number MR1-1 can be stored in the special symbol determination random number buffer.

Following step AKS208, the RL2 soft latch random value register is loaded by a transfer command to read stored data from the storage area at the specified address in the function control register area (step AKS209). The value stored in the RL2 soft latch random value register obtained at this time is stored in the random number buffer for selecting the losing animation by a transfer command to write it to the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM102 (step AKS210). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RL2 soft latch random value register in the random number buffer for selecting the losing animation, numerical data representing the value of the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation can be extracted, and the value of the random number MR3-2 can be stored in the random number buffer for selecting the losing animation.

Following step AKS210, the RS1 soft latch random value register is loaded by a transfer command to read stored data from the storage area at the specified address in the function control register area (step AKS211). The value stored in the RS1 soft latch random value register obtained at this time is stored in the random number buffer for variable pattern type selection by a transfer command to write it to the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102 (step AKS212). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RS1 soft latch random value register in the random number buffer for variable pattern type selection, numerical data representing the value of the random number MR3-3 for variable pattern type selection can be extracted, and the value of the random number MR3-3 can be stored in the random number buffer for variable pattern type selection.

Following step AKS212, the RS2 soft latch random value register is loaded by a transfer instruction to read stored data from the storage area at the specified address in the function control register area (step AKS213). The value stored in the RS2 soft latch random value register obtained at this time is stored in the random number buffer for the variation pattern by a transfer instruction to write it to the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102 (step AKS214). In this way, by storing the numerical data obtained from the RS2 soft latch random value register in the random number buffer for the variation pattern, numerical data representing the values of the random numbers MR3-4 for the variation pattern can be extracted, and the values of the random numbers MR3-4 can be stored in the random number buffer for the variation pattern.

Following step AKS214, a block transfer is performed from the random number buffer to the special symbol determination buffer (step AKS215). The random number buffer consists of a special symbol determination random number buffer in which the values of random numbers MR1-1 are stored by step AKS208, a loss animation selection random number buffer in which the values of random numbers MR3-2 are stored by step AKS210, a variation pattern type selection random number buffer in which the values of random numbers MR3-3 are stored by step AKS212, and a variation pattern random number buffer in which the values of random numbers MR3-4 are stored by step AKS214. In step AKS215, the address of the special symbol determination random number buffer is set as the transfer source, and the value corresponding to the buffer size of the random number buffer is set as the transfer count. The address of the special symbol determination buffer, which is the transfer destination, is set by step AKS205. Based on these settings, executing a block transfer instruction allows the values of each random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer to be stored as new reserved information in the first or second reserved storage buffer.

Step AKS215 stores new memory information, and then it is determined whether the conditions for the winning animation are met (Step AKS216). The conditions for the winning animation only need to be pre-set as conditions that enable the execution of the pre-read animation. For example, if the starting gate winning designation value is "2", it is determined that the conditions for the winning animation are met. Also, if the starting gate winning designation value is "1", and the time-saving function flag is "0" corresponding to not being in a time-saving state, and the special symbol process code is less than 03[H] corresponding to not being in a minor win game state or a major win game state, it is determined that the conditions for the winning animation are met. If it is determined that the conditions for the winning animation are met (Step AKS216; Yes), the winning animation process P_GAME_CHK is executed (Step AKS217). The P_GAME_CHK prize win animation processing includes determining whether a special symbol has been hit, selecting animation values corresponding to the determination result, and enabling the transmission of prize win animation commands.

If, in response to step AKS216, it is determined that the conditions for the winning animation are not met (step AKS216; No), or after the winning animation processing by step AKS217 has been executed, the animation memory information specification command transmission table address is set by a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS218). The animation memory information specification command transmission table address is the address of the animation memory information specification command transmission table stored in the game data area of ROM101. Then, by executing the command set process P_COM_SET (step AKS219), the first animation memory information specification command or the second animation memory information specification command becomes available to be sent as the starting winning command. The first animation memory information specification command is an animation control command that specifies the first number of reserved memories indicated by the count value of the first starting gate winning memory counter. The second animation memory information specification command is an animation control command that specifies the second number of reserved memories indicated by the count value of the second starting gate winning memory counter. In this way, the command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 allows the main board 11 to transmit the performance control command, which is the command for when a prize is won, to the performance control board 12.

Following step AKS219, a transfer instruction for setting a pointer sets the address of the start gate prize buffer storage counter (step AKS220). The start gate prize buffer storage counter address is the address of the start gate prize buffer storage counter located in the game work area of RAM 102. The count value of the start gate prize buffer storage counter, whose address has now been set, is updated by incrementing it by 1 (step AKS221). Furthermore, a complex transfer instruction for setting registers and pointers is used to update the pointer corresponding to the start gate prize buffer storage counter (step AKS222). For example, the count value of the start gate prize buffer storage counter after the update in step AKS221 is loaded into the internal register of the CPU 103, and the stored value of the pointer is updated by incrementing it by 1, so that a value indicating the starting address of the start gate prize buffer is stored in the pointer. Furthermore, by adding the loaded count value of the start gate prize buffer storage counter to the stored value of the pointer, the storage area of the buffer number to be updated in the start gate prize buffer can be identified.

Step AKS222 updates the pointer, loading the start gate prize entry specification value (Step AKS223). The start gate prize entry specification value corresponds to the first or second start gate prize entry table set by the special symbol process P_TPROC, and can be set to "1" indicating a first start gate prize or "2" indicating a second start gate prize. Step AKS223 makes the start gate prize entry specification value obtainable by a transfer command to read table data from the first or second start gate prize entry table. The obtained start gate prize entry specification value is then stored in the start gate prize entry buffer by a transfer command to write it to the memory area at the address pointed to by the pointer (Step AKS224), and the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON ends.

Figure 10-17 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of the data configuration related to the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON. In the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON, various settings and controls are performed using the first start gate prize table set in step S102 of the special symbol process P_TPROC shown in Figure 6, or the second start gate prize table set in step S106. For example, the first start gate prize memory counter and the second start gate prize memory counter, whose count values can be updated by step AKS204, are provided in the special symbol control data area and can store data corresponding to the first and second reserved memory counts. The start gate prize buffer memory counter, whose count values can be updated by AKS221, and the start gate prize buffer, where the start gate prize specified value is stored by AKS224, are provided in the start gate prize buffer area and can store the total number of first and second start gate prizes and their occurrence order. Furthermore, in the command set processing P_COM_SET of step AKS219, the first performance memory information specification command transmission table or the second performance memory information specification command transmission table, whose addresses were set in step AKS218, is used.

Thus, the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON enables control related to the special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols, using the first start gate prize table or the second start gate prize table, the first start gate prize memory counter or the second start gate prize memory counter provided in the special symbol control data area, the start gate prize buffer memory counter and start gate prize buffer provided in the start gate prize buffer area, and the first performance memory information specification command transmission table or the second performance memory information specification command transmission table.

Figure 10-17 (A1) shows an example configuration of the first start-up entry table, AKT21. The first start-up entry table in example configuration AKT21 is configured to include table data indicating the lower address of the first start-up entry memory counter, the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random value register number "0", the lower address of the first special symbol determination buffer number "1", the address of the first performance memory information specification command transmission table, and the start-up entry specification value "1".

The first start slot entry memory counter is located in the game work area of RAM 102 and can store data corresponding to the first reserved memory count. The RL0 hard latch random value register number "0" is the RL0 hard latch random value register of register number "0" located in the function control register area. For the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination that can be generated by channel RL0 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, numerical data indicating its value can be acquired and stored via the hard latch. The first special symbol determination buffer number "1" is the first special symbol determination buffer included in the first reserved memory buffer of buffer number "1" in the first special symbol reserved buffer. The first performance memory information specification command transmission table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when transmitting the first performance memory information specification command that specifies the first reserved memory count. The start slot entry specification value "1" is a specification value that specifically indicates that the first start slot entry has occurred.

Figure 10-17 (A2) shows an example configuration of the second start gate prize table, AKT22. The second start gate prize table in example AKT22 is configured to include table data indicating the lower address of the second start gate prize memory counter, the lower address of the RL0 hard latch random value register number "1", the lower address of the second special symbol determination buffer number "1", the address of the second performance memory information specification command transmission table, and the start gate prize specification value "2".

The second start gate entry memory counter is located in the game work area of RAM 102 and can store data corresponding to the second reserve memory count. The RL0 hard latch random value register number "1" is the RL0 hard latch random value register of register number "1" located in the function control register area. For the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination that can be generated by channel RL0 of the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, numerical data indicating its value can be acquired and stored via the hard latch. The second special symbol determination buffer number "1" is the second special symbol determination buffer included in the second reserve memory buffer of buffer number "1" in the second special symbol reserve buffer. The second performance memory information specification command transmission table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when transmitting the second performance memory information specification command that specifies the second reserve memory count. The start gate entry specification value "2" is a specification value that specifically indicates that a second start gate entry has occurred.

Figure 10-17 (B1) shows an example configuration AKB21 of the special symbol control data area. The special symbol control data area of example configuration AKB21 can store various data related to control by the special symbol process processing P_TPROC, such as the special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols, and the minor win game state and major win game state that can be controlled based on the display results. This special symbol control data area includes the special symbol process timer at address F030[H], the winning flag at address F032[H], the special symbol process code at address F033[H], the first start gate entry memory counter at address F034[H], the big win symbol judgment buffer at address F035[H], the small win symbol judgment buffer at address F036[H], the big prize gate entry count counter at address F037[H], the big prize gate opening count counter at address F038[H], the big prize gate opening pattern timer at address F039[H], the big prize gate opening pattern table pointer at address F03B[H], the demo display flag at address F03D[H], and the second start gate entry memory counter at address F099[H].

The special symbol process timer can store a timing value corresponding to the control time by the special symbol process P_TPROC. The special symbol process code can specify the process selected in the special symbol process P_TPROC. The first start slot prize memory counter can store a count value corresponding to the first reserved memory count. The jackpot symbol judgment buffer can store data corresponding to the jackpot symbol specification value. The jackpot symbol specification value is a specification value corresponding to the confirmed special symbol displayed when the display result is "jackpot" in the variable display of special symbols, and allows setting the type of jackpot game state. The minor win symbol judgment buffer can store data corresponding to the minor win symbol specification value. The minor win symbol specification value is a specification value corresponding to the confirmed special symbol displayed when the display result is "minor win" in the variable display of special symbols, and allows setting the type of minor win game state. The large prize slot ball entry counter can store a count corresponding to the number of game balls that have passed through the large prize slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 50. The large prize slot opening count counter can store a count corresponding to the number of times the large prize slot has been opened during minor win and major win game states. The large prize slot opening pattern timer can store a timed value corresponding to the remaining time for controlling the large prize slot to an open state during minor win and major win game states. The large prize slot opening pattern table pointer can specify the storage address of the large prize slot opening pattern table where the opening time of the large prize slot is set. The demo display flag can store a flag value corresponding to the on or off state, depending on whether the demonstration display is being executed. The second start slot prize entry storage counter can store a count corresponding to the second reserved storage number.

Figure 10-17 (B2) shows an example configuration of the starting gate prize buffer area, AKB22. The starting gate prize buffer area of example configuration AKB22 can store various data related to the first and second starting gate prizes that occur when a game ball enters the first or second starting gate prize area. This starting gate prize buffer area includes a starting gate prize buffer storage counter at address F0BA[H] and starting gate prize buffer numbers "0" to "8" at addresses F0BB[H] to F0C3[H].

The start-gate prize buffer memory counter can store a count corresponding to the number of valid start-gate prize designated values stored in the start-gate prize buffer area. Therefore, the count of the start-gate prize buffer memory counter indicates the total number of first and second start-gate prizes. Start-gate prize buffer numbers "0" to "8" are the start-gate prize buffers to which buffer numbers "0" to "8" are assigned, and they can store the start-gate prize designated values in the order in which the first and second start-gate prizes occurred. As a result, the stored information in the start-gate prize buffer indicates the order in which the first and second start-gate prizes occurred.

Figure 10-17 (C1) shows an example configuration AKT23 of the first performance memory information specification command transmission table. The first performance memory information specification command transmission table in example AKT23 is configured to include table data indicating the upper byte of the first performance memory information specification command and the reference specification value for the first start slot prize memory counter. The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 enables the transmission of the first performance memory information specification command when the first performance memory information specification command transmission table is used. The lower byte of the first performance memory information specification command can be set to correspond to the count value of the first start slot prize memory counter. By transmitting such a first performance memory information specification command, the first reserved memory count can be notified to the performance control board 12.

Figure 10-17 (C2) shows an example configuration AKT24 of the second performance memory information specification command transmission table. The second performance memory information specification command transmission table in example AKT24 is configured to include table data indicating the upper byte of the second performance memory information specification command and the reference specification value for the second start slot prize memory counter. The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS219 enables the transmission of the second performance memory information specification command when the second performance memory information specification command transmission table is used. The lower byte of the second performance memory information specification command can be set to correspond to the count value of the second start slot prize memory counter. By transmitting such a second performance memory information specification command, the second reserved memory count can be notified to the performance control board 12.

As shown in Figure 10-16, the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON stores the value stored in the RL2 soft latch random value register loaded in step AKS209 into the random number buffer for selecting the losing animation in step AKS210, thereby enabling the extraction of numerical data representing the value of the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation. Furthermore, the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON stores the value stored in the RS1 soft latch random value register loaded in step AKS211 into the random number buffer for selecting the variation pattern type in step AKS212, thereby enabling the extraction of numerical data representing the value of the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type. In addition, the start gate switch pass-through process P_TZU_ON stores the value stored in the RS2 soft latch random value register loaded in step AKS213 into the random number buffer for the variation pattern in step AKS214, thereby enabling the extraction of numerical data representing the value of the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern. Here, if we set the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation as the first random number, the random number MR3-3 for selecting the type of variation pattern as the second random number, and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern as the third random number, the start gate switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed in response to the occurrence of a start win. Therefore, the first, second, and third random numbers can be extracted when the common extraction condition of the occurrence of a start win is met. The random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation is included in the game random numbers that can be updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A, and the random numbers MR3-3 for selecting the type of variation pattern and MR3-4 for the variation pattern are included in the game random numbers that can be updated by the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, and in all cases the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. Furthermore, the update rate of random number MR3-2 is 469 [times/ms], while the update rates of random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 are 938 [times/ms]. In other words, the update rates of random numbers MR3-3 and MR3-4 are twice the update rate of random number MR3-2, which is an integer multiple. The update range of random number MR3-2 is "0" to "65518", the update range of random number MR3-3 is "0" to "240", and the update range of random number MR3-4 is "0" to "250". Therefore, the total number of random values included in each update range is different, and in all cases, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. Thus, when the update rates of the second and third random numbers are integer multiples of the update rate of the first random number, the total number of random values included in each update range is different, and in all cases, the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number. This suppresses the synchronous generation of the first, second, and third random values, enabling appropriate updates of the random values.

Figure 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL. The special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL is included in the processing that can be called from the special symbol process processing P_TPROC shown in Figure 6, and can be executed in step S112 if the special symbol process code loaded in step S110 is 00[H]. When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, it sets the start slot prize buffer storage counter address by a transfer instruction for setting a pointer (step AKS241). The start slot prize buffer storage counter address is the address of the start slot prize buffer storage counter provided in the game work area of RAM 102. In this way, it is determined whether the count value of the start slot prize buffer storage counter whose address has been set is "0" or not (step AKS242). For example, a jump operation instruction that branches processing based on whether the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer is 00[H] corresponding to "0" allows for different processing to be executed depending on whether the count value of the start-gate prize buffer storage counter is "0" or not.

If the count value of the start-gate prize buffer memory counter is not "0" in response to step AKS242 (step AKS242; No), the count value of the start-gate prize buffer memory counter is updated by decrementing it by 1 (step AKS243). Furthermore, a block transfer for shifting the start-gate prize buffer is performed (step AKS244). In step AKS244, the destination address is set to the lower address BB[H] of start-gate prize buffer number "0", the source address to the lower address BC[H] of start-gate prize buffer number "1", and the number of transfers is set to "8", which is the buffer size of the start-gate prize buffer. After that, by executing a block transfer command, the contents of the start-gate prize buffer are transferred one unit at a time to the previous buffer and shifted. Finally, the memory area of start-gate prize buffer number "8" can be initialized by clearing it.

Following step AKS244, a transfer command is used to set the address of the second special symbol judgment control table (step AKS245). The address of the second special symbol judgment control table is the address of the second special symbol judgment control table stored in the game data area of ROM101. At this time, a start-gate entry check process is executed to determine whether the start-gate entry specified value is "1" (step AKS246). For example, in the start-gate entry check process, the zero flag is turned on when the start-gate entry specified value is "1," and off when the start-gate entry specified value is "2." After such a start-gate entry check process is executed, a jump command is used to branch the processing depending on whether the zero flag is off or not, allowing different processing to be executed depending on whether the start-gate entry specified value is "1" or "2."

In step AKS246, if the starting gate entry designation value is "1" (step AKS246; Yes), the first special symbol judgment control table address is set by a transfer command to set the table pointer (step AKS247). The first special symbol judgment control table address is the address of the first special symbol judgment control table stored in the game data area of ROM101. In step AKS247, the value of the table pointer is overwritten by a transfer command to set the table pointer. Thus, in the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, after setting the second special symbol judgment control table address by step AKS245, in step AKS246, if the starting gate entry designation value is "1", the first special symbol judgment control table address is reset by overwriting in step AKS247. This allows for a reduction in the program capacity required for table configuration when the second special symbol judgment control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol judgment control table, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, when the second special symbol judgment control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol judgment control table, the processing using jump instructions as branch instructions is simplified, making verification easier during the design phase and further improving the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1.

If the starting gate prize entry specification value is "2" and not "1" in response to step AKS246 (step AKS246; No), then after step AKS247, the special symbol judgment process P_TDECISION is executed (step AKS248), followed by the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET (step AKS249), before the special symbol normal processing ends.

If the count value of the start-up entry buffer memory counter is "0" in response to step AKS242 (step AKS242; Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on or off (step AKS250). The demo display flag is a flag that indicates that a demonstration display is being executed. If the demo display flag is on (step AKS250; Yes), the normal processing of the special symbols ends. On the other hand, if the demo display flag is off (step AKS250; No), a transfer command to set the demo display flag stores 01 [H], which is the value specified during demo display, into the demo display flag (step AKS251). This sets the demo display flag to the on state. Also, a transfer command to set the pointer sets the standby command transmission table address (step AKS252). The standby command transmission table address is the address of the standby command transmission table stored in the game data area of ROM101. Then, after executing the command set process P_COM_SET (step AKS253), the normal processing for special symbols ends.

Figure 10-19 illustrates an example of the data structure used for the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL. In the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, the special symbol determination process in step AKS248 is executed using the second special symbol determination control table, whose address is set in step AKS245, or the first special symbol determination control table, whose address is set in step AKS247. Furthermore, in the command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS253, the standby command transmission table, whose address is set in step AKS252, is used. In this way, the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL enables control of the special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols, using the first or second special symbol determination control table and the standby command transmission table.

Figure 10-19 (A1) shows an example configuration AKT31 of the first special symbol determination control table. The first special symbol determination control table of example configuration AKT31 is configured to include table data that indicates the address of the first special symbol buffer shift control table, the lower address of the first special symbol determination buffer number "0", the lower address of the first winning symbol buffer number "0", the lower address of the first special symbol buffer, and the address of the work setting table after the first special symbol win determination. The first special symbol buffer shift control table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when shifting the contents of the first special symbol hold buffer. The first special symbol determination buffer number "0" is the first special symbol determination buffer included in the first hold storage buffer of buffer number "0" in the first special symbol hold buffer. The buffer number "0" for the first winning symbol is the buffer for the first winning symbol included in the first reserve storage buffer of buffer number "0" in the first special symbol reserve buffer. The first special symbol buffer is located in the game work area of RAM 102 and can store special symbol pattern specification values corresponding to the confirmed special symbols displayed during the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The work setting table after the first special symbol win determination is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when initializing the data in response to the completion of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION.

Figure 10-19 (A2) shows an example configuration AKT32 of the second special symbol determination control table. The second special symbol determination control table of example configuration AKT32 is configured to include table data that indicates the address of the second special symbol buffer shift control table, the lower address of the second special symbol determination buffer number "0", the lower address of the second winning symbol buffer number "0", the lower address of the second special symbol buffer, and the address of the work setting table after the second special symbol win determination. The second special symbol buffer shift control table is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when shifting the contents of the second special symbol hold buffer. The second special symbol determination buffer number "0" is the second special symbol determination buffer included in the second hold storage buffer of buffer number "0" in the second special symbol hold buffer. The buffer number "0" for the second winning symbol is the buffer for the second winning symbol included in the second reserve storage buffer of buffer number "0" in the second special symbol reserve buffer. The second special symbol buffer is located in the game work area of RAM 102 and can store special symbol pattern specification values corresponding to the confirmed special symbols displayed during the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The work setting table after the second special symbol win determination is stored in the game data area of ROM 101 and is used when initializing the data in response to the completion of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION.

Figure 10-19(B) shows an example configuration of the standby command transmission table AKT33. The standby command transmission table of the example AKT33 is configured to include table data indicating the number of processes, the upper byte of the second specific count specification command, the reference value of the specific count command buffer, the upper byte of the background color specification command, the reference value of the special pattern state specification code, the upper byte of the customer waiting demo command, and the lower byte of the customer waiting demo command. The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS253 uses the standby command transmission table of the example AKT33 to enable the transmission of the second specific count specification command, the background color specification command, and the customer waiting demo command. The lower byte of the second specific count specification command can be set to correspond to the value stored in the specific count command buffer. The lower byte of the background color specification command can be set to correspond to the special pattern state specification code. The lower byte of the customer waiting demo command can be set using the fixed value 03[H].

Figure 10-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. The special symbol determination process P_TDECISION is included in the processes that can be called from the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL shown in Figure 10-18, and can be executed in step AKS248 when variable display of special symbols is started. When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION, it sets the special symbol buffer shift control table address by a transfer instruction for setting a pointer (step AKS301). The special symbol buffer shift control table address is the address of the first special symbol buffer shift control table or the second special symbol buffer shift control table stored in the game data area of the ROM 101. In step AKS301, it is possible to specify a different address in the game data area corresponding to the first special symbol determination control table or the second special symbol determination control table set by the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL. For example, when the first special symbol determination control table is set, the pointer is set to a value indicating address 13C2[H] of the first special symbol buffer shift control table. Similarly, when the second special symbol determination control table is set, the pointer is set to a value indicating address 13C8[H] of the second special symbol buffer shift control table.

Following step AKS301, the special symbol buffer shift process P_TBUFSHIFT is executed (step AKS302). The special symbol buffer shift process P_TBUFSHIFT in step AKS302 uses the first or second special symbol buffer shift control table, whose address was set in step AKS301, to shift the contents of the first or second special symbol hold buffer. For example, after setting the destination address, source address, and number of transfers, a block transfer instruction can be executed to transfer and shift the contents of the first hold storage buffer of the first special symbol buffer and the second hold storage buffer of the second special symbol buffer one unit at a time to the previous buffer.

Following step AKS302, the special symbol determination buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS303). The special symbol determination buffer with buffer number "0" is either the first special symbol determination buffer or the second special symbol determination buffer contained in the first hold storage buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol hold buffer. In step AKS303, the stored value of the special symbol determination buffer can be read from the first special symbol hold buffer or the second special symbol hold buffer, corresponding to the first special symbol determination control table or the second special symbol determination control table set by the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL. For example, the upper address F0[H] of the game work area, which serves as the work area, is set to the upper byte of the pointer using a transfer command. Then, the lower address of the first special symbol determination buffer number "0" or the second special symbol determination buffer number "0," stored in the first or second special symbol determination control table pointed to by the table pointer, is set to the lower byte of the pointer using a transfer command. After this, the stored data of the address in the game work area pointed to by the pointer can be read, thereby allowing the special symbol determination random number MR1-1 stored in the special symbol determination buffer of buffer number "0" to be retrieved.

After step AKS303, the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK is executed (step AKS304). The special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 compares the value of the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination read in step AKS303 with the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not the special symbol display result is a "jackpot". The determination of whether or not the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" is also called the special symbol jackpot determination, and it determines whether or not to control the game into a jackpot game state as an advantageous state. When the special symbol jackpot determination determines that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot", the jackpot designation value 01[H] is stored in the win flag. The win flag is provided in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1), and is assigned address F032[H]. The special symbol jackpot determination process in step AKS304 should be configured to store the jackpot designation value in the jackpot flag by a transfer command to write to the memory area at a specified address in the game work area of RAM102. The jackpot flag should be configured to have an initial value of 00[H] by a clear command executed in response to the start of the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304.

Along with the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304, the special symbol minor win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK is executed (step AKS305). The special symbol minor win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 can determine whether the special symbol display result is a "minor win" by comparing the value of the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination, which was read by loading the special symbol determination buffer in step AKS303, with the minor win determination value. This determination of whether the special symbol display result is a "minor win" is also called the special symbol minor win determination, and it determines whether or not to control the game to a predetermined minor win state. When the special symbol minor win determination determines that the special symbol display result is a "minor win", the minor win designation value 02[H] is stored in the win flag. The special symbol minor win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 should be configured to store the minor win specification value in the win flag by issuing a transfer command to write to the memory area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

In the special symbol minor win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK of step AKS305, the minor win determination value is included in a different range from the big win determination value. Therefore, after a special symbol big win determination has determined the special symbol display result to be a "big win," a special symbol minor win determination will not occur. However, if, for example, an error occurs and a special symbol big win determination has determined the special symbol display result to be a "big win," and then a special symbol minor win determination has determined the special symbol display result to be a "minor win," the minor win specification value will be stored in the win flag. Therefore, in the event of a conflict between a special symbol big win determination determining the special symbol display result to be a "big win" and a special symbol minor win determination determining the special symbol display result to be a "minor win," this prevents fraudulent activity due to a malfunction in the determination process and enables appropriate game control, ensuring that the game is not controlled to a big win state, which is more advantageous than a minor win state.

When the special symbol minor win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step S305 is executed, the win symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS306). The win symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is either the first win symbol buffer contained in the first hold storage buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol buffer, or the second win symbol buffer contained in the second hold storage buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol buffer. In step AKS306, the stored value of the win symbol buffer can be read from the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer, corresponding to the first special symbol determination control table or the second special symbol determination control table whose address has been set by the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL. For example, the upper address F0[H] of the game work area, which serves as the work area, is set to the upper byte of the buffer pointer using a transfer command. Then, the lower address of the special symbol determination buffer stored in the first or second special symbol determination control table pointed to by the table pointer is set to the lower byte of the buffer pointer using a transfer command. After this, the stored data of the address in the game work area pointed to by the buffer pointer can be read, thereby allowing the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol stored in the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0".

After step AKS306, the lower address of the special symbol buffer is loaded (step AKS307). The lower address of the special symbol buffer is the address of either the first or second special symbol buffer located in the game work area of RAM 102. In step AKS307, different lower addresses can be specified depending on the first or second special symbol judgment control table whose address is set by the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL. For example, if the first special symbol judgment control table is set, a value indicating the lower address B8[H] of the first special symbol buffer is set in the lower byte of the buffer pointer. Similarly, if the second special symbol judgment control table is set, a value indicating the lower address B9[H] of the second special symbol buffer is set in the lower byte of the buffer pointer. The upper byte of the buffer pointer already contains the upper address F0[H] of the game work area, as stored in step AKS306.

Following step AKS307, the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET is executed (step AKS308). The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET makes it possible to determine the confirmed special symbols that will be displayed when stopped in the special symbol game, and stores the special symbol pattern specification value corresponding to the determination result in the special symbol buffer. After the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the address of the work setting table after the special symbol hit determination is set (step AKS309). The work setting table address after the special symbol hit determination is the address of the first special symbol hit determination work setting table or the second special symbol hit determination work setting table stored in the game data area of ROM101. In step AKS309, it is possible to specify a different address in the game data area corresponding to the first special symbol determination control table or the second special symbol determination control table whose address was set by the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL. For example, when the first special symbol determination control table is set, the pointer is set to a value indicating address 12BB[H] of the work setting table after the first special symbol hit determination. Similarly, when the second special symbol determination control table is set, the pointer is set to a value indicating address 12C0[H] of the work setting table after the second special symbol hit determination.

Following step AKS309, the dataset processing P_DATASET is executed (step AKS310), and the special symbol determination processing P_TDECISION is completed. The dataset processing P_DATASET in step AKS310 uses the special symbol hit determination work setting table, whose address was set in step AKS309, to initialize the special symbol determination buffer and the hit symbol buffer in the first or second hold storage buffer with buffer number "0". For example, if the first special symbol hit determination work setting table is set, the first special symbol determination buffer and the first hit symbol buffer are initialized in the first hold storage buffer with buffer number "0" included in the first special symbol hold buffer. Furthermore, when the work setting table is set after the second special symbol win determination, the second special symbol determination buffer and the second winning symbol buffer are initialized in the second hold storage buffer with buffer number "0" included in the second special symbol hold buffer.

Figure 10-21 illustrates an example of the data structure used for the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. In the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION, the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK (step AKS304) and the special symbol minor win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK (step AKS305) use the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination to determine whether the display result in the variable display of special symbols is a "jackpot" or a "minor win," corresponding to the start of the variable display. Furthermore, the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET (step AKS308) uses the special symbol buffer whose lower address was loaded in step AKS307. In this way, the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION enables control over the special symbol game, which is a variable display of special symbols, using the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination and the special symbol buffer.

Figure 10-21(A) shows an example of special symbol determination AKC01 using the special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 and the special symbol minor jackpot determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK in step AKS305. The special symbol jackpot determination process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 enables a comparison operation with the jackpot determination value to determine whether the value of the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination is within the jackpot determination range. The jackpot determination value includes a lower limit jackpot determination value and an upper limit jackpot determination value. When the value of the random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the lower limit jackpot determination value, if the carry flag is off, the value of the random number MR1-1 is less than or equal to the lower limit jackpot determination value, and if the carry flag is on, the value of the random number MR1-1 is greater than the lower limit jackpot determination value. If the value of the random number MR1-1 is less than or equal to the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, the special symbol jackpot judgment process P_TFVR_CHK is terminated, corresponding to the fact that it is not within the jackpot judgment range, and the system returns to the special symbol judgment process P_TDECISION. On the other hand, if the value of the random number MR1-1 exceeds the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, the value of the random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value. At this time, if the carry flag is off, the value of the random number MR1-1 is less than or equal to the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value, and if the carry flag is on, the value of the random number MR1-1 exceeds the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value. Therefore, if the value of the random number MR1-1 is less than or equal to the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value, the jackpot designation value 01[H] is stored in the jackpot flag, corresponding to the fact that it is within the jackpot judgment range. If the value of the random number MR1-1 exceeds the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value, the system returns to the special symbol judgment process P_TDECISION by terminating the special symbol jackpot judgment process P_TFVR_CHK, corresponding to the fact that it is outside the jackpot judgment range.

For example, the lower limit of the jackpot determination value should be set to "60000" and the upper limit to "60285". This means that, as in the special symbol determination example AKC01, if the starting gate entry designation value corresponds to "1" and "2", and the value of the random number MR1-1 falls within the jackpot determination range from "60001" to "60285", the determination result for the special symbol display will be "jackpot".

Step AKS305's special symbol minor win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK enables a comparison operation with the minor win determination value to determine whether the value of the random number MR1-1 used for special symbol determination is within the minor win determination range. The minor win determination value includes a minor win lower limit determination value and a minor win upper limit determination value. When the value of the random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the minor win lower limit determination value, if the carry flag is off, the value of the random number MR1-1 is less than or equal to the minor win lower limit determination value, and if the carry flag is on, the value of the random number MR1-1 is greater than the minor win lower limit determination value. If the value of the random number MR1-1 is less than or equal to the minor win lower limit determination value, the special symbol minor win determination process P_TLITTLE_CHK terminates, corresponding to the fact that it is not within the minor win determination range, and the process returns to the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION. In contrast, if the value of the random number MR1-1 exceeds the lower limit of the minor win judgment, the value of the random number MR1-1 is subtracted from the upper limit of the minor win judgment. At this time, if the carry flag is off, the value of the random number MR1-1 is less than or equal to the upper limit of the minor win judgment; if the carry flag is on, the value of the random number MR1-1 exceeds the upper limit of the minor win judgment. Therefore, if the value of the random number MR1-1 is less than or equal to the upper limit of the minor win judgment, the minor win designation value 02[H] is stored in the win flag, corresponding to being within the minor win judgment range. If the value of the random number MR1-1 exceeds the upper limit of the minor win judgment, corresponding to being outside the minor win judgment range, the special symbol minor win judgment process P_TLITTLE_CHK is terminated, and the system returns to the special symbol judgment process P_TDECISION. The upper limit of the minor win judgment may be set to different values depending on whether the starting gate entry designation value is "1" or "2".

For example, the lower limit judgment value for a minor win should be pre-set to be "21000" regardless of whether the designated starting gate entry value is "1" or "2". Similarly, the upper limit judgment value for a minor win should be pre-set to be "21285" when the starting gate entry judgment value is "1", and "29282" when the designated starting gate entry value is "2". This results in a "minor win" judgment for the special symbol display result, as seen in the special symbol judgment example AKC01, when the designated starting gate entry value is "1" and the value of random number MR1-1 falls within the minor win judgment range of "21001" to "21285", and when the designated starting gate entry value is "2" and the value of random number MR1-1 falls within the minor win judgment range of "21001" to "29282".

Figure 10-21(B) shows an example configuration AKB31 of the special symbol buffer area. The special symbol buffer area of example AKB31 can store a special symbol pattern specification value corresponding to the confirmed special symbol that is displayed as a stop result of the special symbol display. This special symbol buffer area includes a first special symbol buffer at address F0B8[H] and a second special symbol buffer at address F0B9[H]. The first special symbol buffer can store a special symbol pattern specification value when the first special symbol game is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A. The second special symbol buffer can store a special symbol pattern specification value when the second special symbol game is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol pattern specification value is the specification value for the display pattern corresponding to the confirmed special symbol displayed in the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and includes the jackpot special symbol pattern specification value and the minor win special symbol pattern specification value. The jackpot special symbol pattern specification value is the specification value for the display pattern corresponding to the confirmed special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B when the display result in the variable display of special symbols is "jackpot". The minor win special symbol pattern specification value is the specification value for the display pattern corresponding to the confirmed special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B when the display result in the variable display of special symbols is "minor win".

Figure 10-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET. The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET is included in the processes that can be called from the special symbol judgment process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20, and can be executed in step AKS308 after the special symbol jackpot judgment process P_TFVR_CHK in step AKS304 and the special symbol minor win judgment process P_LITTLE_CHK in step AKS305 have been executed. When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, it loads a win flag (step AKS321). The win flag is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1), and is assigned address F032[H]. In step AKS321, the winning flag should be loaded by a transfer instruction to read the stored data at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. Then, a calculation jump instruction that allows comparison between the winning flag and the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot designation value is used to confirm that the winning flag is not the jackpot designation value (step AKS322).

If the winning flag corresponds to the winning value specified in step AKS322 (step AKS322; No), the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is set (step AKS323). The value stored in the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded by step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20. This loaded content can be transferred to the processing register included in the internal registers of the CPU 103 to set it as a processing target. The value stored in the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" that has been set in this way is stored in the special symbol buffer (step AKS324). The special symbol buffer is the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer whose lower address is loaded by step AKS307 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20. As a result, for the random number MR1-2 stored in the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0", numerical data representing that random number is stored in the first or second special symbol buffer. Therefore, the numerical data representing the value of the random number MR1-2 can be used as a special symbol pattern specification value for the winning symbol, corresponding to the special symbol whose confirmed special symbol is the winning symbol when the special symbol display result is "Big Win".

Following step AKS324, the start-entry bonus buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded to the specified start-entry bonus value (step AKS325). The start-entry bonus buffer with buffer number "0" is located in the start-entry bonus buffer area of the configuration example AKB22 shown in Figure 10-17 (B2), and is assigned address F0BB[H]. In step AKS325, the start-entry bonus buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded by a transfer command to read stored data from the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

After step AKS325, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU is executed (step AKS326). The jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU uses the starting gate entry specification value loaded in step AKS325 and the values stored in the winning symbol buffer loaded in step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20 to determine the jackpot symbol specification value, and sets the jackpot information setting data corresponding to the determination result. The jackpot information setting data is data that indicates the jackpot performance specification value, the fanfare display specification value, and the jackpot end display specification value. The jackpot symbol specification value determined by the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU is stored in the jackpot symbol determination buffer (step AKS327). The jackpot symbol determination buffer is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1), and is assigned address F035 [H]. In step AKS327, the jackpot symbol specification value should be stored by a transfer command to write to the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS327, the data for setting the jackpot information is transferred (step AKS328). In this case, the storage address of the jackpot information setting data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot symbol specification value in the jackpot information setting table stored in the game data area of ROM101 is set in the pointer that specifies the transfer source. Also, the address of the performance symbol information buffer provided in the game work area of RAM102 is set in the buffer pointer that specifies the transfer destination. Furthermore, the data size of the jackpot information setting data is set in the number of transfers. After that, the jackpot information setting data read from the jackpot information setting table can be transferred and stored in the performance symbol information buffer, the fanfare display buffer, and the jackpot end display buffer using a block transfer command. At this time, the setting of the variable command specification buffer is performed (step AKS329). The variable command specification buffer is located in the game work area of RAM 102 at the address immediately following the jackpot end display buffer. Its stored value can be set using the destination address updated by the block transfer command in step AKS 327. For example, the variable command specification value 01[H], which corresponds to the special symbol display result being determined as "jackpot," can be set as the stored value in the variable command specification buffer. Note that the stored value may be initialized to 00[H] by clearing the variable command specification buffer in response to the performance state after the jackpot game state ends, or to the stored value of the performance symbol information buffer.

After setting the variable command specification buffer in step AKS329, the maximum value buffer for the number of times the big prize slot opens is set (step AKS330). The maximum value buffer for the number of times the big prize slot opens is located in the game work area of RAM 102 at the address immediately following the variable command specification buffer, and can store the maximum number of times the big prize slot is opened during a jackpot game. In step AKS330, the maximum number of times the big prize slot opens can be determined using the jackpot symbol specification value determined by the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU in step AKS326 and the maximum value table for the number of times the big prize slot opens stored in the game data area of ROM 101. The storage value corresponding to the determined maximum number of times the big prize slot opens can then be stored in the maximum value buffer for the number of times the big prize slot opens by a transfer command to write it to the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

If the winning flag is not a jackpot value (Step AKS322; Yes), a jump operation instruction that allows comparison between the winning flag and the judgment value corresponding to the minor jackpot value is used to confirm that the winning flag is not a minor jackpot value (Step AKS331). If the winning flag is a minor jackpot value (Step AKS331; No), the minor jackpot special symbol pattern specification value is stored in the special symbol buffer (Step AKS332). The minor jackpot special symbol pattern specification value may be created by adding a pre-set minor jackpot symbol addition value to the stored value read from the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0". In addition, the minor jackpot special symbol pattern specification value may be a different value from the jackpot special symbol pattern specification value that has been prepared in advance. The special symbol buffer is the first or second special symbol buffer whose lower address is loaded by step AKS307 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20. In step AKS332, the special symbol pattern specification value for minor wins, created using minor win symbol addition values, should be stored in the first or second special symbol buffer by a transfer command that writes it to the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Step AKS332 stores the specified value for the special winning symbol pattern, and then determines the specified value for the winning symbol (Step AKS333). The specified value for the winning symbol can be determined using the value stored in the winning symbol buffer loaded in Step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20, and the first winning state setting table or the second winning state setting table which is set in accordance with the specified value for entry into the starting slot. The determined winning symbol value is then stored in the winning symbol determination buffer (Step AKS334). The winning symbol determination buffer is provided in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1), and is assigned address F036 [H]. In Step AKS334, the winning symbol value can be stored by a transfer command to write to the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS334, the small win animation specification value is determined (step AKS335). The small win animation specification value can be determined using the small win information setting table stored in the game data area of ROM101 and the small win symbol specification value determined in step AKS333. The small win animation specification value determined at this time is stored in the animation symbol information buffer (step AKS336). In step AKS336, the small win animation specification value determined in step AKS335 is stored in the animation symbol information buffer by a transfer command that writes it to the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM102.

Step AKS336 stores the specified value for the minor win animation, and then the minor win information setting data is transferred (Step AKS337). This minor win information setting data includes the specified value for the minor win fanfare display and the specified value for the minor win ending display. In Step AKS337, the storage address of the minor win information setting data corresponding to the determination result of the minor win animation specification value in the minor win information setting table stored in the game data area of ROM101 is set as the pointer specifying the transfer source. The address of the minor win fanfare display buffer located in the game work area of RAM102 is set as the transfer destination. Furthermore, the data size of the minor win information setting data is set as the number of transfers. Afterward, the minor win information setting data read from the minor win information setting table can be transferred and stored in the minor win fanfare display buffer and the minor win ending display buffer using a block transfer command.

If the winning flag corresponding to step AKS331 is not the specified value for a minor win (step AKS331; Yes), the specified value for the losing special symbol pattern is stored in the special symbol buffer (step AKS338). The specified value for the losing special symbol pattern can be a value different from the specified value for the big win special symbol pattern or the minor win special symbol pattern. For example, F1[H] could be set as the specified value for the losing special symbol pattern. The special symbol buffer is the first or second special symbol buffer whose lower address is loaded by step AKS307 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20. In step AKS338, the previously prepared specified value for the losing special symbol pattern should be stored in the first or second special symbol buffer by a transfer command to write it to the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS338, the symbol information buffer is cleared (step AKS339). The symbol information buffer can store performance specification values corresponding to cases where the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "minor win." Conversely, if the special symbol display result is a "miss," the symbol information buffer is cleared, initializing its stored value to 00 [H]. The variable command specification buffer is also cleared (step AKS340).

After steps AKS330, AKS337, and AKS340, a transfer command for setting the pointer sets the address of the pre-variation command transmission table (step AKS341). The pre-variation command transmission table address is the address of the pre-variation command transmission table stored in the game data area of ROM101. Then, the command set process P_COM_SET is executed (step AKS342), and the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET is completed.

Figure 10-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU. The jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU is called in the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in Figure 10-22, and can be executed in step AKS326 if the win flag in step AKS322 is a jackpot specified value. When the CPU 103 executes the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU, it sets the address of the second jackpot state setting table using a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS401). The address of the second jackpot state setting table is the address of the second jackpot state setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101.

Following step AKS401, it is confirmed that the starting gate entry designation value is not "1" (step AKS402). The starting gate entry designation value is stored in the internal register of the CPU 103 by step AKS325 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in Figure 10-22. If this starting gate entry designation value is "1" (step AKS402; No), the address of the first jackpot state setting table is set by a transfer command to set the pointer (step AKS403). The address of the first jackpot state setting table is the address of the first jackpot state setting table stored in the game data area of the ROM 101. In step AKS403, the value of the pointer is overwritten by a transfer command to set the pointer. Thus, in the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, after setting the table address for the second jackpot state setting in step AKS401, step AKS402 corresponds to the start-out entry specification value being "1," and step AKS403 overwrites and resets the table address for the first jackpot state setting. This reduces the program capacity required for table setting when the usage frequency of the second jackpot state setting table is higher than that of the first jackpot state setting table, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, when the usage frequency of the second jackpot state setting table is higher than that of the first jackpot state setting table, the processing using jump instructions as branch instructions is simplified, making verification easier during the design phase and further improving the marketability of the pachinko machine 1.

If the starting gate entry designation value is "2" and not "1" in response to step AKS402 (step AKS401; Yes), or after step AKS403, the winning symbol buffer is set (step AKS404). The winning symbol buffer's stored value is the winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0," loaded by step AKS306 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20. This loaded content can be transferred to the processing register contained in the CPU 103's internal registers to set it as a processing target. The stored value of the winning symbol buffer thus set, along with the second jackpot state setting table set by step AKS401 or the first jackpot state setting table set by step AKS403, is used to execute the second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 (step AKS405).

The second sorting judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 uses the stored data at the first address of the table as the starting number data, and the stored data at the next address as the processing count data, initially setting the starting number data as the sorting result data. Then, it compares the numerical data set as the comparison value with the sorting judgment value indicated by the stored data from the address after the processing count data, in increasing order from the beginning to the end of the table address, until the sorting judgment value exceeds the comparison value. At this time, if the sorting judgment value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the sorting result data is updated by adding 1 and proceeds to the next comparison; if the sorting judgment value exceeds the comparison value, the second sorting judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 terminates. If the number of comparisons reaches the number corresponding to the processing count data and the sorting judgment value does not exceed the comparison value, the process can be repeated from setting the starting number data and processing count data using the stored data from the next address onward. In step AKS405, the second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 sets the random numbers MR1-2 for the winning symbols, which are stored in the winning symbol buffer, as the comparison value. Based on the stored data in the first jackpot state setting table or the second jackpot state setting table, the jackpot symbol specification value indicated by the distribution result data can be determined as the type of jackpot game state corresponding to the display result by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 should also be executable when the minor jackpot symbol specification value is determined by step AKS333 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET. In this case, the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, which is the value stored in the winning symbol buffer, is set as the comparison value. Based on the stored data in the first or second minor win state setting table, the minor win designation value indicated by the distribution result data can be determined as the type of minor win game state corresponding to the display result by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B.

When the second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS405 is completed, the data for setting the jackpot information is determined (step AKS406). The data for setting the jackpot information should be selectable from multiple pre-prepared datasets, using the jackpot information data specification table selected in accordance with the stored values in the performance state selection buffer, and the jackpot symbol specification value determined by the second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS405. The performance state selection buffer should be able to store values corresponding to the performance state after the end of the jackpot game state.

Figure 10-24 is a diagram illustrating an example of using a data configuration corresponding to the control of the jackpot game state for the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET and the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU. If the hit flag is a jackpot designated value in step AKS322 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU can be executed in step AKS326. In this jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU, the jackpot symbol designated value can be determined by executing the second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS405 using the second jackpot state setting table whose address is set in step AKS401 or the first jackpot state setting table whose address is set in step AKS403. Subsequently, in step AKS328 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the jackpot information setting data read from the jackpot information setting table corresponding to the specified jackpot symbol value can be transferred and stored in the performance symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot end display buffer. The performance symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot end display buffer are located in the performance symbol information area and can store setting data when the game is controlled to a jackpot state. Furthermore, in step AKS330 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the maximum number of times the jackpot openings can be determined using the maximum number of times the jackpot openings corresponds to the specified jackpot symbol value.

Thus, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU uses either the first or second jackpot state setting table to determine the jackpot symbol specification value. The special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can set the storage values of the performance symbol information buffer, fanfare display buffer, and jackpot display buffer located in the performance symbol information area, and can also determine the maximum number of times the jackpot entry point opens corresponding to the jackpot symbol specification value.

Figure 10-24 (A1) shows an example configuration AKT41 for the first jackpot state setting table. In the first jackpot state setting table of example AKT41, the value 00[H] corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation value "1" is stored at the first address 1AFD[H], and the value 0A[H] indicating the number of processes is stored at the next address 1AFE[H]. The stored data from address 1AFF[H] onwards indicates the distribution judgment value corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation values "1" to "10". The second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS405 can determine one of the jackpot symbol designation values "1" to "10" when using the first jackpot state setting table of example AKT41, corresponding to the random number MR1-2 for the jackpot symbol indicated by the value stored in the jackpot symbol buffer. For example, if the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol corresponds to the minimum random number value "0" (00[H]), then the winning symbol designation value "1" is determined.

Figure 10-24 (A2) shows an example configuration AKT42 for the second jackpot state setting table. In the second jackpot state setting table of example AKT42, the value 0A[H] corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation value "11" is stored at the first address 1B09[H], and the value 04[H] indicating the number of processes is stored at the next address 1B0A[H]. The stored data from address 1B0B[H] onwards indicates the distribution judgment value corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation values "11" to "14". The second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS405 can determine one of the jackpot symbol designation values "11" to "14" when using the second jackpot state setting table of example AKT42, corresponding to the random number MR1-2 for the jackpot symbol indicated by the value stored in the jackpot symbol buffer. For example, if the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is 00[H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value "0", then the winning symbol designation value "11" is determined.

Figure 10-24(B) shows an example configuration of the performance symbol information area, AKB41. The performance symbol information area of example configuration AKB41 can store various data related to game control and performance control, including variable display of performance symbols, corresponding to when the game is controlled to a jackpot or minor jackpot state. This performance symbol information area includes a performance symbol information buffer at address F056[H], a fanfare display buffer at address F057[H], a jackpot end display buffer at address F058[H], a variable command specification buffer at address F059[H], a maximum value buffer for the number of times the jackpot opening occurs at address F05A[H], a minor jackpot fanfare display buffer at address F05F[H], and a minor jackpot ending display buffer at address F060[H].

Figure 10-24(C) shows example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times the big prize slot opens. In step AKS330 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, it is possible to determine the maximum number of times the big prize slot opens corresponding to the big prize symbol specification value determined by the second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS405 of the big win information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU. In example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times the big prize slot opens, the maximum number of times the big prize slot opens can be determined to be one of the following: 02[H] corresponding to "2", 04[H] corresponding to "4", 07[H] corresponding to "7", and 0A[H] corresponding to "10". In addition, the first big win state setting table of configuration example AKT41 is used when the starting slot entry specification value is "1", and it is possible to determine one of the big win symbol specification values from "1" to "10". In contrast, the second jackpot state setting table of configuration example AKT42 is used when the starting gate entry designation value is "2", and makes it possible to determine any of the jackpot symbol designation values "11" to "14". On the other hand, in the example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times the jackpot entry gate opens, when the jackpot symbol designation values are 00[H] to 09[H] corresponding to "1" to "10", the maximum number of times the jackpot entry gate opens can be determined to be either 04[H] corresponding to "4" or 0A[H] corresponding to "10". On the other hand, in the example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times the jackpot entry gate opens, when the jackpot symbol designation values are 0A[H] to 0D[H] corresponding to "11" to "14", the maximum number of times the jackpot entry gate opens can be determined to be any of 02[H] corresponding to "2", 04[H] corresponding to "4", 07[H] corresponding to "7", or 0A[H] corresponding to "10".

Thus, in the example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times the big prize slot opens, when the specified value for the big prize symbol is "1" and the value is 00[H], the maximum number of times the big prize slot opens becomes 04[H], which corresponds to "4". This corresponds to the smaller of "4" or "10", which are the maximum number of times the big prize slot opens that can be determined when the specified value for the starting slot entry is "1". The specified value for the big prize symbol is "1", which can be determined when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol, indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer, is the minimum random number value of "0". Also, in the example AKD01 for determining the maximum number of times the big prize slot opens, when the specified value for the big prize symbol is "11" and the value is 0A[H], the maximum number of times the big prize slot opens becomes 02[H], which corresponds to "2". This corresponds to the smallest value "2" among the maximum number of times the main prize slot can be opened, which can be determined when the starting slot prize entry designation value is "2," specifically "2," "4," "7," and "10." The jackpot symbol designation value "11" can be determined when the random number MR1-2 for the jackpot symbol, indicated by the value stored in the jackpot symbol buffer, is the minimum random number value of "0." Therefore, in special symbol games where the special symbol display result is "jackpot," when the random number MR1-2 for the jackpot symbol is the minimum random number value of "0," the display result will not be determined to be more advantageous than when it is not the minimum random number value. This allows for appropriate updating of the random number value to prevent fraudulent activity due to malfunctions in the first random number value when the random number MR1-2 for the jackpot symbol is used as the first random number value.

Figure 10-25 is a diagram illustrating an example of using a data configuration corresponding to the control of the minor win game state, with respect to the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET. In step AKS331 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, if the win flag is a minor win designation value, step AKS333 makes it possible to determine the minor win symbol designation value. In this case, if the starting gate entry designation value is "1", the minor win symbol designation value is determined using the first minor win state setting table. On the other hand, if the starting gate entry designation value is "2", the minor win symbol designation value is determined using the second minor win state setting table. Subsequently, in step AKS339 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the minor win performance designation value determined in step AKS338 is stored in the performance symbol information buffer. Then, in step AKS340 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, the small win information setting data read from the small win information setting table corresponding to the small win symbol specification value can be transferred and stored in the small win fanfare display buffer and the small win ending display buffer. The performance symbol information buffer, small win fanfare display buffer, and small win ending display buffer are located in the performance symbol information area shown in Figure 10-24(B), and can store setting data when the game is controlled to a small win state. Furthermore, in step S112 of the special symbol process processing P_TPROC shown in Figure 6, when the special symbol process code corresponds to 03[H] and the small win pre-opening processing P_TLFAN is executed, the opening time and number of openings of the big prize opening can be determined using the small win opening work setting table, etc.

Thus, the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET uses either the first or second minor win state setting table to determine the specified value for the minor win symbol. Furthermore, the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET can set the storage values for the performance symbol information buffer, the minor win fanfare display buffer, and the minor win ending display buffer located in the performance symbol information area. Additionally, the minor win pre-opening process P_TLFAN, which is executed in response to control of the minor win game state, can determine the opening time and number of times the main prize slot opens.

Figure 10-25 (A1) shows an example configuration AKT43 for the first minor win state setting table. In the first minor win state setting table of configuration example AKT43, the value 00[H] corresponding to the minor win symbol designation value "1" is stored at the first address 1B0B[H], and the value 01[H] indicating the number of processes is stored at the next address 1B0C[H]. The stored data at address 1B0D[H] indicates the distribution judgment value corresponding to the minor win symbol designation value "1". When using the first minor win state setting table of configuration example AKT43, step AKS333 can be determined to be only the minor win symbol designation value "1", corresponding to the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. Therefore, when the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is 00[H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value "0", the minor winning symbol designation value "1" is determined.

Figure 10-25 (A2) shows an example configuration AKT44 for the second minor win state setting table. In the second minor win state setting table of configuration example AKT44, the value 01[H] corresponding to the minor win symbol designation value "2" is stored at the first address 1B0E[H], and the value 06[H] indicating the number of processes is stored at the next address 1B0F[H]. The stored data from address 1B10[H] onwards indicates the distribution judgment value corresponding to the minor win symbol designation values "2" to "7". When using the second minor win state setting table of configuration example AKT44, step AKS333 can determine one of the minor win symbol designation values "2" to "7" in accordance with the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol indicated by the value stored in the winning symbol buffer. For example, if the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol corresponds to the minimum random number value "0" (00[H]), then the minor winning symbol designation value "2" is determined.

Figure 10-25(B) shows example AKD02 for determining the opening mode of the large prize slot. In the small prize opening pre-processing step P_TLFAN, the opening mode of the large prize slot corresponding to the specified value of the starting slot entry can be determined. The large prize slot opening mode can be determined from any of several modes with different opening times and number of openings. In example AKD02, corresponding to the specified value of "1" for the starting slot entry, the opening mode is determined to be 36 [ms] with 15 [times] of opening. Also in example AKD02, corresponding to the specified value of "2" for the starting slot entry, the opening mode is determined to be 1600 [ms] with 1 [time] of opening.

Thus, in the state of a minor win, the opening pattern of the large prize opening can be determined to differ in terms of the opening time and number of times the large prize opening is opened, regardless of the value of the minor win symbol designation, and in accordance with the designated value of the starting slot entry. The minor win symbol designation can be determined in accordance with the random numbers MR1-2 for the win symbol, which are indicated by the values stored in the win symbol buffer. If the designated value of the starting slot entry is the same, the opening pattern of the large prize opening will be determined to be the same whether the random numbers MR1-2 for the win symbol are the minimum value of "0" or any other value. Therefore, in special symbol games that are variable displays of special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, when the random numbers MR1-2 for the win symbol are the minimum value of "0", the display result will not be determined to be more advantageous than when the random numbers are any other value. This allows for appropriate updates of the random number set to prevent fraudulent activity caused by malfunctions in the first random number set, when the random number set MR1-2 for the winning symbols is used as the first random number set.

Figure 10-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET. The variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET is included in the processes callable from the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL shown in Figure 10-18, and can be executed in step AKS249 when the variable display of the special symbol is started. When the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET, it loads the win flag (step AKS361). The win flag is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17(B1), and is assigned address F032[H]. In step AKS361, the win flag should be loaded by a transfer instruction to read the stored data at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. Then, a calculation jump instruction that allows comparison between the win flag and the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot designation value is used to confirm that the win flag is not the jackpot designation value (step AKS362).

If the winning flag corresponds to the winning value in step AKS362 (step AKS362; No), the winning symbol determination buffer is loaded (step AKS363). The winning symbol determination buffer is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1), and is assigned address F035 [H]. In step AKS363, the winning symbol determination buffer can be loaded by a transfer command to read the stored data at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. At this time, the state-specific winning selection table address is set by a transfer command to set a pointer (step AKS364). The state-specific winning selection table address is the address of the state-specific winning selection table stored in ROM 101. After that, the winning variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed (step AKS365). Step AKS365's P_TPATA process for selecting the winning variation pattern type table makes the variation pattern type distribution table selectable when the special display result corresponds to a "jackpot".

If the winning flag is not a jackpot value (Step AKS362; Yes), a jump operation instruction is used to compare the winning flag with a judgment value corresponding to a minor win value, confirming that the winning flag is not a minor win value (Step AKS366). If the winning flag is a minor win value (Step AKS366; No), the variable command specification buffer is set (Step AKS367). The variable command specification buffer is provided in the performance symbol information area of the configuration example AKB41 shown in Figure 10-24(B), and is assigned address F059[H]. In Step AKS367, 01[H] should be stored in the variable command specification buffer by a transfer instruction to write to the storage area of the specified address in the game work area of RAM102. The minor win symbol judgment buffer is also loaded (Step AKS368). The minor win symbol determination buffer is located in the special symbol control data area of the configuration example AKB21 shown in Figure 10-17 (B1), and is assigned address F036 [H]. In step AKS368, the minor win symbol determination buffer should be loaded by a transfer command to read the stored data at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102. At this time, the state-specific minor win selection table address is set by a transfer command to set the pointer (step AKS369). The state-specific minor win selection table address is the address of the state-specific minor win selection table stored in ROM 101. Subsequently, the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed (step AKS370). The win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA in step AKS370 makes the variation pattern type distribution table selectable when the special symbol display result corresponds to a "minor win".

If the winning flag in step AKS366 is not the specified value for a minor win (step AKS366; Yes), the losing variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH is executed (step AKS371). The losing variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH in step AKS371 makes the variation pattern type distribution table selectable when the special display result is "Loss".

After steps AKS365, AKS370, and AKS371, the variable pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS372). The variable pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" is either the first variable pattern type selection buffer contained in the first hold storage buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol hold buffer, or the second variable pattern type selection buffer contained in the second hold storage buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol hold buffer. In step AKS372, after setting the address of the second variable pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0", the start gate entry check process is executed. If the start gate entry specified value is "1", the address of the first variable pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" is set, and then, if it is possible to read the random number MR3-3 for variable pattern type selection stored in the variable pattern type selection buffer with buffer number "0" using a transfer command to read the stored data at the set address, then it is sufficient to read it.

Step AKS372 reads the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type, and then the variation pattern distribution table selection process P_TPATTBL is executed (step AKS373). The variation pattern distribution table selection process P_TPATTBL in step AKS373 uses the variation pattern distribution table selected in either step AKS365, AKS370, or AKS371, along with the random number MR3-3 read in step AKS372, to make the variation pattern distribution table selectable.

Following step AKS373, the variable pattern buffer with buffer number "0" is loaded (step AKS374). The variable pattern buffer with buffer number "0" is either the first variable pattern buffer contained in the first hold storage buffer with buffer number "0" in the first special symbol hold buffer, or the second variable pattern buffer contained in the second hold storage buffer with buffer number "0" in the second special symbol hold buffer. In step AKS374, after setting the address of the second variable pattern buffer with buffer number "0", the start gate entry check process is executed. If the start gate entry specified value is "1", the address of the first variable pattern buffer with buffer number "0" is set, and then, if it is possible to read the random number MR3-4 for the variable pattern stored in the variable pattern buffer with buffer number "0" using a transfer command to read the stored data at the set address, then it is sufficient to read it.

Step AKS374 reads the random numbers MR3-4 for the variation pattern, and then the second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 is executed (step AKS375). The second distribution judgment value comparison process in step AKS375 uses the variation pattern distribution table selected in step AKS373 and the random numbers MR3-4 read in step AKS374 to determine the variation pattern. At this time, the variation pattern specification data corresponding to the determined variation pattern is stored in the performance symbol variation pattern buffer (step AKS376). The performance symbol variation pattern buffer is located in the game work area of RAM 102 and can store different variation pattern specification data corresponding to the variation pattern determination result.

Following step AKS376, the variable command transmission table is selected (step AKS377). In step AKS377, the variable command transmission table is made selectable using the variable command transmission table selection table and the stored value of the variable command specification buffer. This allows for the selection of different variable command transmission tables depending on whether the special symbol display result is a "big win" or "minor win" or a "miss". The variable command transmission table is configured to include table data indicating the number of processes, the upper byte of the symbol information specification command, the symbol information specification code reference specification value, the upper byte of the performance symbol specification command, the performance symbol specification code reference specification value, the performance symbol variation command, and the variation pattern specification data reference specification value. After that, the command set process P_COM_SET is executed (step AKS378). The command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS378 uses the variable command transmission table selected in step AKS377 to enable the transmission of symbol information specification commands, performance symbol specification commands, and performance symbol variation commands. This command set process P_COM_SET in step AKS378 allows the performance control command, which serves as the command for the start of the variation, to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Step AKS378 enables the transmission of a command at the start of a variation, and then the special symbol variation time is set (Step AKS379). In Step AKS379, a time data expansion process is performed using the special symbol variation time table and the variation pattern specification data, making it possible to set different special symbol variation times corresponding to the result of determining the variation pattern. Next, a transfer command for setting a pointer sets the work table address after variation pattern setting (Step AKS380). The work table address after variation pattern setting is the address of the work table after variation pattern setting stored in the game data area of ROM101. After that, the data set process P_DATASET is executed (Step AKS381), and the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET is completed. Step AKS381's dataset processing P_DATASET uses the work table after setting the variation pattern, whose address was set in step AKS380, to set the special symbol process code to 01[H], which is the specified value for special symbol variation processing, and sets the stored value of the special symbol variation display buffer to 01[H], which is the display data during special symbol variation. Furthermore, initialization is made possible by clearing the special symbol display update timer, the buffer for selecting the losing animation (buffer number "0"), the buffer for selecting the variation pattern type (buffer number "0"), and the buffer for the variation pattern (buffer number "0"). At this time, different tables should be referenced depending on whether the starting gate prize specification value is "1" or "2" to enable the setting and clearing of different buffers and timers.

Figure 10-27(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA. The win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is included in the processes that can be called from the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. If the win flag is a jackpot value in step AKS362, it can be executed in step AKS365, and if the win flag is a minor win value in step AKS366, it can be executed in step AKS370. When the CPU 103 executes the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA, it loads the performance state selection buffer (step AKS421). The performance state selection buffer is provided in the game work area of RAM 102, and can store values corresponding to the performance state after the end of the jackpot game state. In step AKS421, it is sufficient that the stored value in the performance state selection buffer can be read by a transfer command to read the stored data at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS421, the variation pattern type selection table is determined (step AKS422). In step AKS422, the variation pattern type selection table is determined using the state-specific big win selection table or state-specific small win selection table and the stored value of the performance state selection buffer read in step AKS421. The state-specific big win selection table is addressed by step AKS364 when the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS365 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. The state-specific small win selection table is addressed by step AKS369 when the win-time variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS370 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. The state-specific jackpot selection table and state-specific minor jackpot selection table are configured to include table data that allows for the determination of different variation pattern type selection tables, corresponding to the values stored in the performance state selection buffer. Therefore, step AKS422 allows for the determination of different variation pattern type selection tables, corresponding to the values stored in the performance state selection buffer, depending on whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "minor jackpot."

In step AKS422, the variation pattern type selection table is determined, and the winning symbol specification value is set (step AKS423). In step AKS423, the contents loaded from the jackpot symbol determination buffer or the minor jackpot symbol determination buffer are transferred to the processing registers included in the internal registers of the CPU 103, thereby setting them as processing targets. The jackpot symbol determination buffer is loaded in step AKS363 when the winning variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS365 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. The minor jackpot symbol determination buffer is loaded in step AKS368 when the winning variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is executed in step AKS370 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. The stored value in the jackpot symbol determination buffer indicates the jackpot symbol specification value. The value stored in the minor win symbol determination buffer indicates the minor win symbol designation value. Using this set winning symbol designation value, along with the variation pattern type selection table determined in step AKS422, the distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI is executed (step AKS424).

The distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTE compares the numerical data set as the comparison value with the distribution judgment value indicated by the table storage data, executing this process in increasing order from the beginning to the end of the table address until the distribution judgment value exceeds the comparison value. If the distribution judgment value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the process proceeds to the next comparison, and the table storage data corresponding to the distribution judgment value exceeding the comparison value is made available for reading as specified data. In step AKS424, the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI is set with either the jackpot symbol specification value or the minor jackpot symbol specification value as the comparison value, and the specified data corresponding to the distribution judgment value exceeding the comparison value is read from the storage data of the variation pattern type selection table.

When the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS424 is completed, the variable pattern type distribution table is determined (step AKS425), and the hit variable pattern type table selection process P_TPATA is completed. In step AKS425, the specified data read by the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS424 is added to the starting address of the variable pattern type distribution table, thereby setting the address of the variable pattern type distribution table to be used as a pointer, and making the variable pattern type distribution table determinable.

Figure 10-27 (B1) shows an example AKD11 of determining the variable pattern type distribution table corresponding to the special symbol display result being "Big Win". When the special symbol display result is "Big Win", in step AKS405 of the Big Win Information Data Selection Process P_TFVR_ZU shown in Figure 10-23, the second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 can determine one of the values 00[H] to 0D[H] corresponding to the Big Win Symbol Specification Value "1" to "14". The Win Variable Pattern Type Table Selection Process P_TPATA, when executed in step AKS365 of the Variable Pattern Setting Process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, can determine the variable pattern type distribution table corresponding to the determination result of the Big Win Symbol Specification Value. In the example AKD11 for determining the variation pattern type distribution table, the variation pattern type distribution table can be determined to one of AKU01 to AKU03, corresponding to the values 00[H] to 0D[H] which indicate the specified value of the jackpot symbol.

Figure 10-27 (B2) shows an example AKD12 of determining the variable pattern type distribution table corresponding to a "minor win" special symbol display result. When the special symbol display result is a "minor win," step AKS333 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in Figure 10-22 can determine one of the values 00[H] to 06[H] corresponding to the minor win symbol specification values "1" to "7". The win-time variable pattern type table selection process P_TPATA, when executed in step AKS370 of the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, can determine the variable pattern type distribution table corresponding to the determination result of the minor win symbol specification value. In the variable pattern type distribution table determination example AKD12, one of the variable pattern type distribution tables AKU11 or AKU12 can be determined corresponding to the minor win symbol specification values 00[H] to 06[H].

Figure 10-28(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the P_TPATH process for selecting the variable pattern type table when a loss occurs. The P_TPATH process for selecting the variable pattern type table when a loss occurs is included in the processes that can be called from the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, and can be executed in step AKS371 if the winning flag in step AKS366 is not a minor win specified value. When the CPU 103 executes the P_TPATH process for selecting the variable pattern type table when a loss occurs, it sets the address of the state-specific loss selection table by a transfer command for setting a pointer (step AKS441). The address of the state-specific loss selection table is the address of the first state-specific loss selection table or the second state-specific loss selection table stored in the game data area of the ROM 101. In step AKS441, different addresses in the game data area can be specified depending on whether the starting gate entry specified value is "1" or "2". This allows the address of the first state-specific miss selection table to be set when the starting gate entry value is "1," and the address of the second state-specific miss selection table to be set when the starting gate entry value is "2." Then, the performance state selection buffer is loaded (step AKS442). The performance state selection buffer is located in the game work area of RAM 102 and can store values corresponding to the performance state after the end of the jackpot game state.

Following step AKS442, the retention-based loss distribution selection table is determined (step AKS443). In step AKS443, the retention-based loss distribution selection table is determined using the first state-based loss selection table or the second state-based loss selection table, whose address was set in step AKS441, and the stored value of the performance state selection buffer loaded in step AKS442. The first state-based loss selection table and the second state-based loss selection table are configured to include table data that allows for the determination of different retention-based loss distribution selection tables, corresponding to the stored value of the performance state selection buffer. Furthermore, the retention-based loss distribution selection table is configured to include table data that allows for the determination of different loss distribution tables, corresponding to the count value of the start-gate prize memory counter. Therefore, step AKS443 allows for the determination of different retention-based miss animation distribution selection tables, corresponding to the stored values in the performance state selection buffer, depending on whether the designated value for the starting slot entry is "1" or "2".

Following step AKS443, the start gate entry memory counter is loaded (step AKS444). The start gate entry memory counter is either the first start gate entry memory counter when the start gate entry designation value is "1" or the second start gate entry memory counter when the start gate entry designation value is "2". In step AKS444, after setting the address of the second start gate entry memory counter in the memory pointer, the start gate entry check process is executed. If the start gate entry designation value is "1", the address of the first start gate entry memory counter is set in the memory pointer. Then, a transfer command is issued to read the stored data at the address set in the memory pointer, making the count value of either the first or second start gate entry memory counter obtainable.

Following step AKS444, the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI is executed (step AKS445). In step AKS445, the P_HANTEI distribution judgment value comparison process uses the count value of either the first or second start-gate prize entry memory counter obtained in step AKS444 as the comparison value. Based on the stored data of the hold-specific miss effect distribution selection table determined in step AKS443, the specified data corresponding to the distribution judgment value exceeding the comparison value is read.

After the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS445 is completed, the losing animation distribution table is determined (step AKS446). In step AKS446, the specified data read by the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS445 is added to the starting address of the losing animation distribution table. By setting the address of the losing animation distribution table to be used as a pointer, the losing animation distribution table can be determined.

Following step AKS446, the buffer for selecting the losing animation, buffer number "0," is loaded (step AKS447). The buffer for selecting the losing animation, buffer number "0," is either the first losing animation selection buffer contained in the first reserve storage buffer, buffer number "0," in the first special symbol reserve buffer, or the second losing animation selection buffer contained in the second reserve storage buffer, buffer number "0," in the second special symbol reserve buffer. In step AKS447, after setting the address of the second losing animation selection buffer, buffer number "0," if the start-gate entry check process indicates a start-gate entry value of "1," the address of the first losing animation selection buffer, buffer number "0," is set. Then, a transfer command to read the stored data at the set address allows the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation stored in the losing animation selection buffer, buffer number "0," to be read.

Step AKS447 reads the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing animation, and then the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI is executed (step AKS448). The distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS448 uses the losing animation distribution table determined in step AKS446 and the random number MR3-2 read in step AKS447 to determine the offset value of the variation pattern type distribution table. In this case, the random number MR3-2 read in step AKS447 is set as the comparison value, and the stored data of the losing animation distribution table determined in step AKS446 allows the readout of the offset value of the variation pattern type distribution table indicated by the specified data corresponding to the distribution judgment value exceeding the comparison value.

When the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS448 is completed, the variable pattern type distribution table is determined (step AKS449), and the variable pattern type table selection process P_TPATH in case of a miss is completed. In step AKS449, the address of the variable pattern type distribution table to be used is set to a pointer by adding the offset value indicated by the specified data read in the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS448 to the starting address of the variable pattern type distribution table, thereby making the variable pattern type distribution table determinable.

Figure 10-28 (B1) shows an example AKD21 for determining the distribution table for a losing animation corresponding to a first special symbol loss. A first special symbol loss occurs when the designated value for entry into the starting slot is "1", and the special symbol display result in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is "loss". When the designated value for entry into the starting slot is "1", the count value of the first starting slot entry memory counter can be obtained in step AKS444 of the loss variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH. The count value of the first starting slot entry memory counter indicates the first reserved memory count. Then, in the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS445, the designated data corresponding to the count value of the first starting slot entry memory counter is read, and in step AKS446, the losing animation distribution table corresponding to the first reserved memory count can be determined. In the example AKD21 for determining the losing animation distribution table, the losing animation distribution table can be determined to one of AKV01 to AKV04, corresponding to the first reserved memory count of "0" to "3".

Figure 10-28 (B2) shows an example AKD22 for determining the distribution table for a losing animation corresponding to a second special symbol miss. A second special symbol miss occurs when the designated value for entry into the starting slot is "2", and the special symbol display result in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is "miss". When the designated value for entry into the starting slot is "2", the count value of the second starting slot entry counter can be obtained in step AKS444 of the loss variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH. The count value of the second starting slot entry memory counter indicates the second reserved memory count. Then, in the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI in step AKS445, the designated data corresponding to the count value of the second starting slot entry memory counter is read, and in step AKS446, the losing animation distribution table corresponding to the second reserved memory count can be determined. In the example AKD22 for determining the losing animation distribution table, the only possible outcome is the common losing animation distribution table AKV11, corresponding to the second reserved memory count of "0" to "3".

Figure 10-28(C) shows example AKD23 of determining the variable pattern type distribution table in the case of the losing animation distribution table AKV01. The losing animation distribution table AKV01 can be determined in example AKD21 of determining the losing animation distribution table when the starting slot entry specification value is "1" and the first reserve memory number is "0". When the starting slot entry specification value is "1", in step AKS447 of the losing variable pattern type table selection process P_TPATH, the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation can be read from the first losing animation selection buffer with buffer number "0". Then, in step AKS448, the distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI reads the specified data corresponding to the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation, and in step AKS449 the variable pattern type distribution table can be determined. In the example AKD23 for determining the variation pattern type distribution table, the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation corresponds to one of the variation pattern type distribution tables AKU21 to AKU25.

Figure 10-29 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the variation pattern type distribution table. The variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA shown in Figure 10-27(A) is executed in step AKS365 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. In response to the determination result of the specified value of the jackpot symbol, it can be determined to be one of several variation pattern type distribution tables, such as any of the variation pattern type distribution tables AKU01 to AKU03 in the variation pattern type distribution table determination example AKD11 shown in Figure 10-27(B1). The winning variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATA shown in Figure 10-27(A) is executed in step AKS370 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26. In response to the determination result of the small win symbol specification value, it can be determined to be one of several variation pattern type distribution tables, such as either variation pattern type distribution table AKU11 or AKU12 in the variation pattern type distribution table determination example AKD12 shown in Figure 10-27(B2). The losing variation pattern type table selection process P_TPATH shown in Figure 10-28(A) is executed in step AKS449. In this case, it can be determined to be one of several variation pattern type distribution tables, such as either variation pattern type distribution tables AKU21 to AKU25 in the variation pattern type distribution table determination example AKD23 shown in Figure 10-28(C). Then, the variation pattern distribution table selection process P_TPATTBL, executed in step AKS373 of the variation pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, uses the random number MR3-3 for variation pattern type selection read in step AKS372 to refer to the variation pattern type distribution table, thereby selecting a variation pattern type, and enabling the selection of a variation pattern distribution table corresponding to the selection result.

Figure 10-29(A) shows an example of the configuration of the variation pattern type distribution table AKU01. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU01 is included in multiple variation pattern type distribution tables that can be determined in accordance with the specified jackpot symbol value. In Figure 10-29(A), the variation pattern type distribution table AKU01 is configured such that, in accordance with the random number MR3-3 used for variation pattern type selection, it can be determined to one of the variation pattern types CPA01 to CPA05.

Figure 10-29 (B1) shows an example of the configuration of the variation pattern type distribution table AKU11. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU11 is included in multiple variation pattern type distribution tables that can be determined in accordance with the specified value of the minor win symbol. In Figure 10-29 (B1), the variation pattern type distribution table AKU11 is configured such that, corresponding to the random number MR3-3 used for selecting all variation pattern types, only the common variation pattern type CPB01 can be determined.

Figure 10-29 (B2) shows an example of the configuration of the variation pattern type distribution table AKU12. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU12 is included in multiple variation pattern type distribution tables that can be determined in accordance with the specified value of the minor win symbol. In Figure 10-29 (B2), the variation pattern type distribution table AKU12 is configured such that, corresponding to the random number MR3-3 used for selecting all variation pattern types, only the common variation pattern type CPB02 can be determined.

Figure 10-29 (C1) shows an example of the configuration of the variation pattern type distribution table AKU21. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU21 is included in multiple variation pattern type distribution tables that can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation. In Figure 10-29 (C1), the variation pattern type distribution table AKU21 is configured such that, in accordance with the random number MR3-3 used for selecting the variation pattern type, it can be determined to either variation pattern type CPC01 or CPC02.

Figure 10-29 (C2) shows an example of the configuration of the variation pattern type distribution table AKU22. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU22 is included in multiple variation pattern type distribution tables that can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU22 in Figure 10-29 (C2) is configured such that, for all variation pattern type selections using the random number MR3-3, only the common variation pattern type CPC03 can be determined.

Figure 10-29 (C3) shows an example of the configuration of the variation pattern type distribution table AKU23. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU23 is included in multiple variation pattern type distribution tables that can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU23 in Figure 10-29 (C3) is configured such that, in accordance with the random number MR3-3 used for selecting all variation pattern types, only the common variation pattern type CPC04 can be determined.

Figure 10-29 (C4) shows an example of the configuration of the variation pattern type distribution table AKU24. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU24 is included in multiple variation pattern type distribution tables that can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation. In Figure 10-29 (C4), the variation pattern type distribution table AKU24 is configured such that, in accordance with the random number MR3-3 used for selecting the variation pattern type, it can be determined to one of the variation pattern types CPC05 to CPC07.

Figure 10-29 (C5) shows an example of the configuration of the variation pattern type distribution table AKU25. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU25 is included in multiple variation pattern type distribution tables that can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation. The variation pattern type distribution table AKU25 in Figure 10-29 (C5) is configured such that, for all variation pattern type selections using the random number MR3-3, only the common variation pattern type CPC08 can be determined.

Figures 10-30 to 10-32 illustrate example configurations of variable pattern distribution tables that can be used in relation to variable pattern types. In the variable pattern distribution table selection process P_TPATTBL, executed in step AKS373 of the variable pattern setting process P_TPATSET shown in Figure 10-26, a variable pattern distribution table is selected corresponding to the result of selecting the variable pattern type using the random number MR3-3 for variable pattern type selection. Subsequently, the second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS375 uses the random number MR3-4 for the variable pattern read in step AKS374 to refer to the variable pattern distribution table, enabling the determination of the variable pattern.

Figure 10-30 (A1) shows an example configuration of the variable pattern distribution table corresponding to variable pattern type CPA01. When using the variable pattern distribution table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the specified jackpot symbol value, variable pattern type CPA01 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 used for variable pattern type selection. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (A1), the variable pattern distribution table is configured such that the table data can be determined to one of the variable patterns PA01-PA03, PA51, or PA52, corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for the variable pattern. Thus, the distribution determination value is set by the stored data of the variable pattern distribution table so that variable pattern type CPA01 can be determined to one of the variable patterns PA01-PA03, PA51, or PA52.

Figure 10-30 (A2) shows an example configuration of the variable pattern distribution table corresponding to variable pattern type CPA02. When using the variable pattern type distribution table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the specified jackpot symbol value, variable pattern type CPA02 can be determined at a predetermined ratio corresponding to the random number MR3-3 used for variable pattern type selection. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (A2), the variable pattern distribution table is configured such that the table data can be determined to one of the variable patterns PA04-PA11, PA21-PA23, or PA54, corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for the variable pattern. Thus, the distribution determination value is set by the stored data of the variable pattern distribution table so that variable pattern type CPA02 can be determined to one of the variable patterns PA04-PA11, PA21-PA23, or PA54.

Figure 10-30 (A3) shows an example configuration of the variable pattern distribution table corresponding to variable pattern type CPA03. Variable pattern type CPA03 can be determined at a predetermined ratio corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for variable pattern type selection, when using the variable pattern type distribution table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the specified jackpot symbol value. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (A3), the variable pattern distribution table is configured such that the table data can be determined to one of the variable patterns PA31-PA38, PA24-PA26, or PA55, corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for the variable pattern. Thus, the distribution determination value is set by the stored data of the variable pattern distribution table so that variable pattern type CPA03 can be determined to one of the variable patterns PA31-PA38, PA24-PA26, or PA55.

Figure 10-30 (A4) shows an example configuration of the variable pattern distribution table corresponding to variable pattern type CPA04. When using the variable pattern type distribution table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the specified jackpot symbol value, variable pattern type CPA04 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 used for variable pattern type selection. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (A4), the variable pattern distribution table is configured such that, corresponding to the random numbers MR3-4 for all variable patterns, only the common variable pattern PA41 can be determined. Thus, the distribution determination value is set by the stored data of the variable pattern distribution table so that variable pattern type CPA04 can only be determined to variable pattern PA41.

Figure 10-30 (A5) shows an example configuration of the variable pattern distribution table corresponding to variable pattern type CPA05. When using the variable pattern type distribution table AKU01, which can be determined in accordance with the specified jackpot symbol value, variable pattern type CPA05 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 used for variable pattern type selection. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (A5), the variable pattern distribution table is configured such that, corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for all variable patterns, only the common variable pattern PA42 can be determined. Thus, the distribution determination value is set by the stored data of the variable pattern distribution table so that variable pattern type CPA05 can only be determined to variable pattern PA42.

Figure 10-30 (B1) shows an example configuration of the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to variation pattern type CPB01. Variation pattern type CPB01 can be determined using the variation pattern type distribution table AKU11, which is determined in accordance with the specified value of the minor winning symbol, and corresponds to all random numbers MR3-3 used for variation pattern selection. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (B1), the variation pattern distribution table is configured such that it can determine only the common variation pattern PB01, corresponding to all random numbers MR3-4 for all variation patterns. Thus, the distribution determination value is set by the stored data of the variation pattern distribution table so that variation pattern type CPB01 can be determined only to variation pattern PB01.

Figure 10-30 (B2) shows an example configuration of the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to variation pattern type CPB02. Variation pattern type CPB02 can be determined using the variation pattern type distribution table AKU12, which is determined in accordance with the specified value of the minor win symbol, and corresponds to all random numbers MR3-3 used for variation pattern selection. In the configuration example of Figure 10-30 (B2), the variation pattern distribution table is configured such that the table data can be determined to one of variation patterns PB11 to PB14, corresponding to the random numbers MR3-4 for the variation pattern. Thus, the distribution determination value is set by the stored data of the variation pattern distribution table so that variation pattern type CPB02 can be determined to one of variation patterns PB11 to PB14.

Figure 10-31(A) shows an example configuration of the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to variation pattern type CPC01. When using the variation pattern type distribution table AKU21, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation, variation pattern type CPC01 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 used for selecting the variation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 10-31(A), the variation pattern distribution table is configured such that, corresponding to the random numbers MR3-4 for all variation patterns, only the common variation pattern PC01 can be determined. Thus, the distribution judgment value is set by the stored data of the variation pattern distribution table so that variation pattern type CPC01 can only be determined to variation pattern PC01.

Figure 10-31(B) shows an example configuration of the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to variation pattern type CPC02. When using the variation pattern type distribution table AKU21, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation, variation pattern type CPC02 can be determined at a predetermined rate corresponding to the random number MR3-3 used for selecting the variation pattern type. In the configuration example of Figure 10-31(B), the table data of the variation pattern distribution table is configured such that it can be determined to one of the variation patterns PC12, PC13, PC15, PC16, PC24, PC27, PC33, or PC49, corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern. Thus, the distribution determination value is set by the stored data of the variation pattern distribution table so that variation pattern type CPC02 can be determined to one of the variation patterns PC12, PC13, PC15, PC16, PC24, PC27, PC33, or PC49.

Figure 10-31(C) shows an example configuration of the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to variation pattern type CPC03. When using the variation pattern type distribution table AKU22, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation, variation pattern type CPC03 can be determined in accordance with all the random numbers MR3-3 used for selecting variation pattern types. In the example configuration of Figure 10-31(C), the table data of the variation pattern distribution table is configured such that it can be determined to one of the variation patterns PC11-PC18 or PC101 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern. Thus, the distribution determination value is set by the stored data of the variation pattern distribution table so that variation pattern type CPC03 can be determined to one of the variation patterns PC11-PC18 or PC101.

Figure 10-31(D) shows an example configuration of the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to variation pattern type CPC04. When using the variation pattern type distribution table AKU23, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation, variation pattern type CPC04 can be determined in accordance with all the random numbers MR3-3 used for selecting variation pattern types. In the example configuration of Figure 10-31(D), the table data of the variation pattern distribution table is configured such that it can be determined to one of the variation patterns PC19-PC27 or PC102 in accordance with the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern. Thus, the distribution determination value is set by the stored data of the variation pattern distribution table so that variation pattern type CPC04 can be determined to one of the variation patterns PC19-PC27 or PC102.

Figure 10-32(A) shows an example configuration of the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to variation pattern type CPC05. Variation pattern type CPC05 can be determined using the first ratio corresponding to the random number MR3-3 for variation pattern type selection, when using the variation pattern type distribution table AKU24, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation. In the configuration example of Figure 10-32(A), the table data of the variation pattern distribution table is configured such that it can be determined to one of variation patterns PC28 to PC43, corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern. Thus, the distribution judgment value is set by the stored data of the variation pattern distribution table so that variation pattern type CPC05 can be determined to one of variation patterns PC28 to PC43.

Figure 10-32(B) shows an example configuration of the variable pattern distribution table corresponding to variable pattern type CPC06. When using the variable pattern type distribution table AKU24, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation, variable pattern type CPC06 can be determined by a second percentage, which is different from the first percentage corresponding to the random number MR3-3 used for selecting the variable pattern type. The second percentage is lower than the first percentage. In the configuration example of Figure 10-32(B), the variable pattern distribution table is configured such that the table data can be determined to one of the variable patterns PC44 to PC59, corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for the variable pattern. Thus, the distribution determination value for variable pattern type CPC06 is set by the stored data of the variable pattern distribution table so that it can be determined to one of the variable patterns PC44 to PC59.

Figure 10-32(C) shows an example configuration of the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to variation pattern type CPC07. When using the variation pattern type distribution table AKU24, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation, variation pattern type CPC07 can be determined by a third percentage, which is different from the first and second percentages corresponding to the random number MR3-3 used for selecting the variation pattern type. The third percentage is lower than the first and second percentages. In the example configuration of Figure 10-32(C), the variation pattern distribution table is configured such that the table data can be determined to one of variation patterns PC60 to PC75, corresponding to the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern. Thus, the distribution determination value for variation pattern type CPC07 is set by the stored data of the variation pattern distribution table so that it can be determined to one of variation patterns PC60 to PC75.

Figure 10-32(D) shows an example configuration of the variation pattern distribution table corresponding to variation pattern type CPC08. When using the variation pattern type distribution table AKU25, which can be determined in accordance with the random number MR3-2 used for selecting the losing animation, variation pattern type CPC08 can be determined in accordance with all random numbers MR3-3 used for selecting variation pattern types. In the configuration example of Figure 10-32(D), the variation pattern distribution table is configured such that it can be determined only for the common variation pattern PC02, corresponding to the random numbers MR3-4 for all variation patterns. Thus, the distribution judgment value is set by the stored data of the variation pattern distribution table so that variation pattern type CPC08 can be determined only for variation pattern PC02.

Figure 10-33(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The normal symbol process processing P_FPROC is included in the processes that can be called from the timer interrupt processing P_PCT for game control shown in Figure 5, and can be executed in step AKS59 each time a timer interrupt occurs. When the CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC, it sets the gate switch pass-through flag (step AKS501). The gate switch pass-through flag setting is done by reflecting the state of the gate switch 21 included in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103 by executing a logical operation instruction, etc. At this time, if the zero flag in the flag register is on, it indicates that the gate switch pass-through flag is off. Conversely, if the zero flag is off, it indicates that the gate switch pass-through flag is on. After that, it is determined whether or not the gate switch pass-through flag is on (step AKS502). If the gate switch pass-through flag is set to ON (step AKS502; Yes), the gate switch pass-through process P_FZU_ON is executed (step AKS503).

If the gate switch passage flag is off in step AKS502 (step AKS502; No), or after the gate switch passage process P_FZU_ON in step AKS503, the normal symbol process processing jump table is set by a transfer instruction that sets a pointer (step AKS504). The normal symbol process processing jump table is an address management table that allows the selection and execution of processing corresponding to the read value of the normal symbol process code. The normal symbol process code can be updated to one of 00[H] to 04[H] in accordance with the progress of game control in the pachinko game machine 1, and is also called the normal symbol process code.

Following step AKS504, a transfer command to read stored data loads the normal symbol process code (step AKS505). Next, by executing the 2-byte data selection process P_ABXEXEC (step AKS506), the address of the process selected corresponding to the normal symbol process code is obtained. This obtained address is set as a pointer. After this, a subroutine call command executes the process pointed to by the pointer (step AKS507), making the process selected corresponding to the normal symbol process code executable. Once the selected process finishes and a return command returns to the normal symbol process process P_FPROC, this normal symbol process process P_FPROC also terminates, and a return command returns to the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT.

Figure 10-33(B) shows an example configuration of the normal symbol process jump table AKT51 used in the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The normal symbol process jump table is configured to include table data that allows the address of the process selected in accordance with the normal symbol process code to be set in an internal register of the CPU 103, which is used as a pointer. The normal symbol process jump table in configuration example AKT51 includes table data that allows the address values corresponding to the normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM when the normal symbol process code is 00[H], the normal symbol variation processing P_FSCRL when the normal symbol process code is 01[H], the normal symbol stop processing P_FSTOP when the normal symbol process code is 02[H], the normal electric bonus pre-operation processing P_FINT when the normal symbol process code is 03[H], and the normal electric bonus operation processing P_FOPEN when the normal symbol process code is 04[H] to be set in a pointer.

The normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM enables the determination of whether or not to start the normal symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored normal symbol hold information, the determination of the confirmed normal symbols to be displayed as stop symbols in the variable normal symbol display, and the determination of the normal symbol variation pattern, which is the variation pattern of the normal symbols. The normal symbol variation processing P_FSCRL measures the elapsed time since the normal symbols started to vary in the normal symbol display 20 and enables the determination of whether or not the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern has elapsed. The normal symbol stop processing P_FSTOP measures the elapsed time since the normal symbols stopped varying in the normal symbol display 20 and enables the determination of whether or not the normal symbol stop time has elapsed. If the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, it enables updating the normal symbol process code and various settings in accordance with the normal symbol display result. In this embodiment, it is sufficient that the normal symbol process code can be updated to 03[H] in accordance with all normal symbol display results. The standard electric prize mechanism pre-operation process P_FINT and the standard electric prize mechanism operation process P_FOPEN are processes that enable the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball entry device 6B to change from a closed state to an open state by controlling the standard electric prize mechanism solenoid 81.

Figure 10-34 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of a data configuration related to the control of a regular symbol game, which is a variable display of regular symbols. For example, the regular symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 10-33(A) executes the 2-byte data selection processing P_ABXEXEC in step AKS 506 using the regular symbol process code loaded in step AKS 505, thereby enabling step AKS 507 to execute the processing selected in accordance with the regular symbol process code. The regular symbol process code is provided in the regular symbol control data area, and its stored value can be updated in accordance with the control state of the regular symbol game and the second start prize entry point. The gate switch passage processing P_FZU_ON in step AKS 503 can read the random number MR2-1 for the regular symbol winning symbol, and the numerical data indicating the value of the read random number MR2-1 can be stored in the regular symbol winning symbol buffer. The buffer for normal symbol wins is located in the normal symbol win buffer area and can store numerical data representing the value of the read random number MR2-1 until the number of normal symbol hold memory reaches its upper limit. In this way, the normal symbol process P_FPROC and the processes that can be executed within it use the stored data in the normal symbol control data area and the normal symbol win buffer area to enable control over the normal symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols.

Figure 10-34(A) shows an example configuration of the normal symbol control data area AKB51. The normal symbol control data area of example configuration AKB51 can store various data related to control by the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC, such as the variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol game, and the closed and open states of the second starting prize entry point, which can be controlled based on the display results. This normal symbol control data area includes the normal symbol process code at address F03E[H], the gate passage memory counter at address F03F[H], the normal symbol buffer at address F040[H], the normal electric prize opening pattern timer at address F041[H], the normal electric prize opening pointer at address F043[H], the normal electric prize entry count counter at address F045[H], and the normal symbol process timer at address F04A[H].

The normal symbol process code can specify the processing to be selected in the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC. The gate passage memory counter can store the count value corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The normal symbol buffer can store data corresponding to the normal symbol specification value. The normal symbol specification value is a specification value corresponding to the confirmed normal symbol that is the display result in the variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display unit 20, and includes the normal symbol winning symbol specification value. The normal symbol winning symbol specification value is a specification value corresponding to the confirmed normal symbol that is displayed by the normal symbol display unit 20 when the display result in the variable display of normal symbols is "normal symbol win". The normal electric prize opening pattern timer can store a timing value corresponding to the remaining time to control the second start prize entry point to an open state. The normal electric prize opening pointer can specify the storage address of the normal electric prize opening pattern table in which the time to control the second start prize entry point to an open state is set. The standard electric prize ball counter can store the count value corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The standard symbol process timer can store the timing value corresponding to the control time by the standard symbol process P_FPROC.

Figure 10-34(B) shows an example configuration AKB52 for the buffer area used for normal winning symbols. The buffer area for normal winning symbols in example configuration AKB52 can store numerical data indicating the value of the random number MR2-1 for normal winning symbols, which is read when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41. This buffer area for normal winning symbols includes buffer numbers "1" to "4" for normal winning symbols at addresses F046[H] to F049[H]. Buffer numbers "1" to "4" are buffers for normal winning symbols to which buffer numbers "1" to "4" are assigned, and can store the values of the random number MR2-1 in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41. As a result, the buffer for normal winning symbols stores information indicating the number of game balls that passed through the passage gate 41, and also the value of the random number MR2-1 read out in response to each passage.

Figure 10-35 is a flowchart showing an example of the gate switch passage process P_FZU_ON. The gate switch passage process P_FZU_ON is included in the processes callable from the normal pattern process P_FPROC shown in Figure 10-33(A), and can be executed in step AKS 503 if the gate switch passage response flag is on in step AKS 502. When the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passage process P_FZU_ON, it sets the gate passage memory counter address using a transfer instruction to set a pointer (step AKS 601). The gate passage memory counter address is the address of the gate passage memory counter located in the game work area of RAM 102. Subsequently, the gate passage memory counter is loaded using a transfer instruction to read the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer (step AKS 602).

Following step AKS602, it is determined whether the count value of the gate passage memory counter is greater than or equal to the maximum counter value (step AKS603). For example, a comparison return instruction allows comparison between the value loaded in step AKS602 and the maximum counter value, such as "4". If the value is greater than or equal to the maximum counter value (step AKS603; Yes), the gate switch passage process P_FZU_ON terminates and the process returns to the normal pattern process P_FPROC. Conversely, if the value is less than the maximum counter value (step AKS603; No), the count value of the gate passage memory counter is updated to increment by 1 (step AKS604). In this case, an arithmetic logic operation instruction that increments the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer makes it possible to update the count value of the gate passage memory counter by incrementing by 1.

After step AKS604, the buffer address for the normal winning symbol is set by a transfer command or the like to set the pointer (step AKS605). In this case, the address of the normal winning symbol buffer with buffer number "0" located in the game work area of RAM102 is set in the pointer. Then, the value loaded in step AKS602 is added to the stored value of the pointer. This makes it possible to set the address of the normal winning symbol buffer that stores the random number MR2-1 for the normal winning symbol in the normal winning symbol buffer area in the pointer. Subsequently, the normal winning symbol random number counter is stored (step AKS606), and the gate switch passage process P_FZU_ON is completed. In step AKS606, a transfer instruction is used to write the value read from the lower address of the random number counter for normal symbol wins in the game work area of RAM102 to the memory area at the address pointed to by the pointer. The goal is to store the value of the random number MR2-1 obtained from the random number counter for normal symbol wins in the buffer for normal symbol wins.

Figure 10-36 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM. The normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM is included in the processing that can be called from the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 10-33(A), and can be executed in step AKS 507 when the normal symbol process code loaded in step AKS 505 is 00[H]. When the CPU 103 executes the normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM, it loads the gate passage memory counter (step AKS 621). In this case, it is sufficient to obtain the count value of the gate passage memory counter by a transfer instruction to set the value read by specifying the lower address of the gate passage memory counter in the game work area of RAM 102 into an internal register of the CPU 103. Then, it is determined whether the count value of the gate passage memory counter is "0" by an operation return instruction that returns the process when the second zero flag in the flag register of the CPU 103 is in the ON state (step AKS 622). At this point, if the second zero flag is ON, the count value of the gate passage memory counter is "0" (step AKS622; Yes), the normal symbol processing P_FNORM terminates, and the system returns to the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC.

If the count value of the gate passage memory counter is not "0" in response to step AKS622 (step AKS622; No), a transfer instruction to set a pointer sets the address of the normal symbol winning symbol setting table (step AKS623). The normal symbol winning symbol setting table address is the address of the normal symbol winning symbol setting table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Then, the normal symbol winning symbol buffer with buffer number "1" is loaded (step AKS624). In step AKS624, a transfer instruction to set the value read by specifying the lower address of the normal symbol winning symbol buffer with buffer number "1" in the game work area of RAM 102 into an internal register of CPU 103 is sufficient to read the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol winning symbol stored in the normal symbol winning symbol buffer with buffer number "1".

Step AKS624 reads the random number MR2-1 for the regular winning symbol, and then the second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 is executed (step AKS625). In step AKS625, the value of the random number MR2-1 read in step AKS624 is set as the comparison value, and the regular winning symbol designation value indicated by the distribution result data is made determinable as the display result by the regular symbol display 20, based on the stored data of the regular winning symbol setting table whose address was set in step AKS623. Once the regular winning symbol designation value is determined by the second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS625, that regular winning symbol designation value is stored in the regular symbol buffer (step AKS626). The normal symbol buffer is located in the normal symbol control data area shown in Figure 10-34(A), and is assigned address F040[H]. In step AKS626, the normal symbol winning symbol specification value should be stored by a transfer command to write to the storage area at the specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Following step AKS626, the count of the gate passage memory counter is decremented by 1 (step AKS627). Then, the buffer for normal symbol wins is shifted (step AKS628). In this case, in the buffer area for normal symbol wins provided in the game work area of RAM 102, the address of the normal symbol win buffer with buffer number "2" is set in the pointer that specifies the transfer source. Also, the address of the normal symbol win buffer with buffer number "1" is set in the buffer pointer that specifies the transfer destination. Furthermore, the number of transfers corresponding to the data size of the normal symbol win buffer area is set. After that, the contents of the normal symbol win buffers can be sequentially transferred and shifted using a block transfer instruction. At this time, the normal symbol win buffer with buffer number "4" is cleared to initialize its contents.

After step AKS628, a transfer command to set a pointer sets the address of the first normal symbol variation pattern distribution table (step AKS629). The address of the first normal symbol variation pattern distribution table is the address of the first normal symbol variation pattern distribution table stored in the game data area of ROM 101. Furthermore, a time-saving check process confirms that the time-saving function flag is not the time-saving activation specification value (step AKS630). If the time-saving function flag is the time-saving activation specification value (step AKS630; No), a transfer command to set a pointer sets the address of the second normal symbol variation pattern distribution table (step AKS631). The address of the second normal symbol variation pattern distribution table is the address of the second normal symbol variation pattern distribution table stored in the game data area of ROM 101.

If the time-saving function flag is not set to the time-saving operation specification value corresponding to step AKS630 (step AKS630; Yes), then after step AKS631, the RS3 soft latch random value register is loaded (step AKS632). In this case, the stored value read by specifying the address of the RS3 soft latch random value register in the function control register area should be set to an internal register of the CPU 103 by a transfer instruction, thereby making it usable as the random number MR3-1 for the normal pattern variation pattern. Then, the second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 is executed (step AKS633). In step AKS633, the second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 sets the value of the random number MR3-1 read in step AKS632 as the comparison value. Using the stored data of the first normal symbol variation pattern distribution table (address set in step AKS629) or the second normal symbol variation pattern distribution table (address set in step AKS631), it becomes possible to determine the normal symbol variation pattern indicated by the distribution result data.

In step AKS633, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined by the second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2, the normal symbol variation time corresponding to that normal symbol variation pattern is set (step AKS634). In step AKS634, the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the determination result of the normal symbol variation pattern is set by executing a time data expansion process using the normal symbol variation time table and the normal symbol variation pattern specification data. Next, the normal symbol variation work table address is set by a transfer command for setting a pointer (step AKS635). The normal symbol variation work table address is the address of the normal symbol variation work table stored in the game data area of ROM101. After that, the data set process P_DATASET is executed (step AKS636), and the normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM is completed. Step AKS636's dataset processing P_DATASET uses the normal symbol change work table, whose address was set in step AKS635, to set the normal symbol process code to 01[H], which is the specified value for normal symbol change processing, and sets the value stored in the normal symbol change display buffer to 01[H], which is the normal symbol change display data. Furthermore, the normal symbol display update timer is cleared to enable initialization.

Figure 10-37 is a diagram illustrating an example of the use of the data structure related to the normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM. In the normal symbol normal processing P_FNORM, the normal symbol winning symbol specification value can be determined by executing the second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS625 using the normal symbol winning symbol setting table whose address is set in step AKS623. Furthermore, the normal symbol variation pattern can be determined by executing the second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633 using the first normal symbol variation pattern distribution table whose address is set in step AKS629 or the second normal symbol variation pattern distribution table whose address is set in step AKS631. In step AKS634, the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the determination result of the normal symbol variation pattern can be set using the normal symbol variation time table. Furthermore, in step AKS507 of the normal symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 10-33(A), when the normal symbol process code corresponds to 03[H] and the normal electric mechanism pre-operation processing P_FINT is executed, the opening time of the normal electric mechanism provided corresponding to the second starting prize entry point can be determined using the normal electric mechanism operation work setting table, etc.

Thus, the normal symbol processing P_FNORM uses the normal symbol winning symbol setting table to determine the specified value for the normal symbol winning symbol. Furthermore, the normal symbol processing P_FNORM uses either the first or second normal symbol variation pattern distribution table to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. Additionally, the normal symbol processing P_FNORM uses the normal symbol variation time table to determine the normal symbol variation time. The normal electric mechanism pre-operation processing P_FINT, executed in response to the execution result of the normal symbol game, can determine the opening time of the normal electric mechanism.

Figure 10-37(A) shows an example configuration AKT61 for the normal symbol winning symbol setting table. In the normal symbol winning symbol setting table of configuration example AKT61, the value 00[H] corresponding to the first normal symbol winning symbol designation value is stored at the first address 1B54[H], and the value 03[H] indicating the number of processes is stored at the next address 1B55[H]. The stored data from address 1B56[H] onwards shows the distribution judgment values corresponding to the first to third normal symbol winning symbol designation values. The second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS625 can determine one of the first to third normal symbol winning symbol designation values, corresponding to the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol winning symbol, when using the normal symbol winning symbol setting table of configuration example AKT61. In configuration example AKT61, the first regular symbol winning symbol designation value is 00 [H], the second regular symbol winning symbol designation value is 01 [H], and the third regular symbol winning symbol designation value is 02 [H]. For example, when the random number MR2-1 for the regular symbol winning symbol is 00 [H], which corresponds to the minimum random number value "0", the first regular symbol winning symbol designation value is determined.

Figure 10-37 (B1) shows an example configuration of the first normal symbol variation pattern distribution table, AKT62. In the first normal symbol variation pattern distribution table of configuration example AKT62, the value 00 [H] corresponding to the specified value of the normal symbol variation pattern FPZ1 is stored at the first address 1B59 [H], and the value 04 [H] indicating the number of processes is stored at the next address 1B5A [H]. The stored data from address 1B5B [H] onwards represents the distribution determination value corresponding to the normal symbol variation patterns FPZ1 to FPZ4. The second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633 can determine one of the normal symbol variation patterns FPZ1 to FPZ4, corresponding to the random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern, when using the first normal symbol variation pattern distribution table of configuration example AKT62.

Figure 10-37 (B2) shows an example configuration of the second normal symbol variation pattern distribution table, AKT63. In the second normal symbol variation pattern distribution table of configuration example AKT63, the value 04[H] corresponding to the specified value of the normal symbol variation pattern FPZ5 is stored at the first address 1B5F[H], and the value 04[H] indicating the number of processes is stored at the next address 1B60[H]. The stored data from address 1B61[H] onwards represents the distribution determination value corresponding to the normal symbol variation patterns FPZ5 to FPZ8. The second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633 can determine one of the normal symbol variation patterns FPZ5 to FPZ8, corresponding to the random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern, when using the second normal symbol variation pattern distribution table of configuration example AKT63.

Figure 10-37(C) shows an example of determining the normal symbol variation time AKD61. In determination example AKD61, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be 1000 [ms] for normal symbol variation patterns FZP1 to FZP4, and the normal symbol variation time is determined to be 100 [ms] for normal symbol variation patterns FZP5 to FZP8. In step AKS634, the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern determined by the second distribution determination value comparison process P_HANTEI2 in step AKS633 is set. Normal symbol variation patterns FZP1 to FZP4 can be determined using the first normal symbol variation pattern distribution table of configuration example AKT61 when the time-saving function flag is off. Normal symbol variation patterns FZP5 to FZP8 can be determined using the second normal symbol variation pattern distribution table of configuration example AKT62 when the time-saving function flag is on. This allows the variable display time for regular symbols (the variation time for regular symbols) to be shorter when time-saving control is enabled compared to when time-saving control is disabled.

Figure 10-37(D) shows an example of determining the normal electric mechanism opening time, AKD62. In the normal electric mechanism pre-operation processing P_FINT, the normal electric mechanism opening time can be determined in accordance with the time-saving operation specification value and the normal symbol winning symbol specification value. The normal electric mechanism opening time is determined to 16 ms for all normal symbol winning symbol specification values 00[H] to 02[H] when the time-saving operation specification value is 00[H], which corresponds to "×" indicating that the time-saving state is not active. In contrast, the normal electric mechanism operation time is determined to 5000 ms for all normal symbol winning symbol specification values 00[H] to 02[H] when the time-saving operation specification value is 01[H], which corresponds to "○" indicating that the time-saving state is active.

Thus, the normal electric mechanism opening time can be determined at different times depending on the specified value for the normal symbol win, corresponding to the time-saving operation specification value, regardless of the value of the specified value for the normal symbol win. The specified value for the normal symbol win can be determined corresponding to the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol win read from the buffer for the normal symbol win. If the time-saving operation specification value is the same, the normal electric mechanism operation time is determined to be common whether the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol win is the minimum random number value "0" or any other random number value. Therefore, in correspondence with the special symbol game, which is a variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display unit 20, when the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol win is the minimum random number value "0", the display result is not determined to be more advantageous than when it is any other random number value. This allows for appropriate updates of the random number generator (MR2-1), which is used for the regular winning symbols, to prevent fraudulent activity caused by malfunctions in the second random number generator.

In the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 10-1, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B can update the numerical data representing the values of the random numbers included in the game random number generator: MR1-1 for special symbol determination, MR3-2 for losing animation selection, MR3-3 for variation pattern type selection, MR3-4 for variation patterns, and MR3-1 for normal symbol variation patterns. Furthermore, the CPU 103 can update the numerical data representing the values of the random numbers included in the game random number generator by executing the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12: MR1-2 for winning symbols, MR1-3 for initial winning symbols, MR2-1 for normal symbol winning symbols, and MR2-2 for initial normal symbol winning symbols.

In step AKS248 of the special symbol normal processing shown in Figure 10-18, if the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION shown in Figure 10-20 is executed, the special symbol jackpot determination process in step AKS304 and the special symbol minor win determination process in step AKS305 can determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "minor win" using the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination. Then, in step AKS308 of the special symbol determination process P_TDECISION, if the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET shown in Figure 10-22 is executed, the jackpot information data selection process P_TFVR_ZU in step AKS326 or step AKS333 can determine the jackpot symbol designation value and minor win symbol designation value corresponding to the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbol, using the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol. Furthermore, when the second distribution judgment value comparison process P_HANTEIS is executed in step AKS625 of the normal symbol normal processing shown in Figure 10-36, it becomes possible to determine the normal symbol winning symbol designation value corresponding to the confirmed normal symbol that will be the display result of the normal symbol using the random number MR2-1 for the normal symbol winning symbol. The jackpot symbol designation value determined using the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol makes it possible to set the maximum number of times the jackpot opening will be opened in step AKS330 of the special symbol information setting process P_TZU_SET, as shown in the example AKD01 of the maximum number of times the jackpot opening will be opened shown in Figure 10-24(C). The random number MR2-1 for the regular winning symbol determines the specified value for the regular winning symbol. In step AKS507 of the regular symbol process processing P_FPROC shown in Figure 10-33(A), when the regular symbol process code corresponds to 03[H] and the regular electric mechanism pre-operation processing P_FINT is executed, the regular electric mechanism opening time can be set, as shown in the regular electric mechanism opening time determination example AKD62 shown in Figure 10-37(D). Therefore, the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is used to determine the display results of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, allowing the player to set a type of jackpot game state that is advantageous to them. The random number MR2-1 for the regular winning symbol is used to determine the display results of the regular symbol display device 20, allowing the player to set a change mode that changes the second starting entry point, which is the starting area, to a guiding state that makes it easier for the game ball to pass through.

In this way, various random numbers used for gameplay can be used to execute processes related to game control. The first random number, MR1-2, for the winning symbols, and the second random number, MR2-1, for the regular winning symbols, can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process, such as the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, which can be called and executed by the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12. Here, the random number MR2-1 for the regular winning symbols has an update range of "0" to "198", and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "199", so the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. Therefore, at least one of the first and second random numbers that can be updated by the common update process will have a total number of prime numbers included in its update range. In this way, the common update process prevents an increase in program size, and the fact that the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number suppresses the synchronous generation of random values, enabling appropriate updates of random values.

Furthermore, the random number MR1-2, which is the first random number for the winning symbols, has an update range of "0" to "199," and the total number of random numbers included in the update range is "200," so the total number of random numbers included in the update range is not a prime number. The random number MR1-2 for the winning symbols is used to determine the jackpot symbol designation value in the confirmed special symbols, and in some cases, it is determined whether or not the game enters a probability variation state after the jackpot game state ends, corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation value. In this case, the determination ratio of the jackpot symbol designation value corresponds to the probability variation entry rate, which is the ratio of the game being controlled to enter a probability variation state. The probability variation entry rate is an important specification in pachinko game machine 1, and it is desirable to make it a value that is easy to understand. However, if the total number of random numbers included in the update range of the random number MR1-2 for the winning symbols is a prime number, the denominator of the probability variation entry rate will be a prime number, making it difficult to express it as a percentage, which may make it difficult to understand the probability variation entry rate. Therefore, among the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols and MR2-1 for regular winning symbols, which can be updated by a common update process, the total number of random values included in the update range of MR2-1 for regular winning symbols may be prime numbers, while the total number of random values included in the update range of MR1-2 for winning symbols may not be prime numbers. This allows for appropriate random number updates while suppressing the synchronous generation of random values and clearly recognizing the specifications of the pachinko machine 1.

The random number MR1-2, which is the first random number used for the winning symbol, may also be configured so that the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number. This allows for more reliable suppression of synchronous generation of random numbers that can be updated by a common update process, enabling appropriate random number updates.

In the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12, steps AKS61 to AKS64 can update the first random number MR1-2, and steps AKS65 to AKS68 can update the second random number MR2-1. The random number update process P_RANDOM can update the first random number MR1-2 and the second random number MR2-1 using the HL register, B register, and DE register of the CPU 103, which are common internal storage means. In this way, the first and second random numbers can be stably updated using common internal storage means, enabling the updating of appropriate random numbers.

The CPU 103, which executes the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12, becomes a first update means that can update the first and second random numbers within their respective update ranges by random number update processing when the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols are set as the first random number and the random number MR2-1 for normal symbols and winning symbols are set as the second random number. Furthermore, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B become a second update means that can update the third and fourth random numbers within their respective update ranges by system clock input, which serves as the random number clock signal, when the third and fourth random numbers are set from among the random numbers MR1-1 for special symbol determination, MR3-2 for loss effect selection, MR3-3 for variation pattern type selection, and MR3-4 for variation pattern. For example, the random number MR2-1 for the regular winning symbols has an update range of "0" to "198", and the total number of random values included in the update range is "199", so the total number of random values included in the update range of the second random number is a prime number. In contrast, for example, the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing animation has an update range of "0" to "65518", and the total number of random values included in the update range is "65519", the random number MR3-3 for selecting the type of variation pattern has an update range of "0" to "240", and the total number of random values included in the update range is "241", and the random number MR3-4 for variation patterns has an update range of "0" to "250", and the total number of random values included in the update range is "251", so at least one of the third random number and the fourth random number will have a total number of prime numbers included in the update range. Thus, the update methods differ between the first and second update means. Even if the update methods are the same, at least one of the random values will have a total number of prime numbers within its update range, thereby suppressing synchronization and enabling appropriate random value updates.

The 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B become a first update means that can update the first and second random numbers by a system clock input which serves as a random number clock signal, when the first and second random numbers are set from among the random numbers MR1-1 for special symbol determination, MR3-2 for selecting losing animations, MR3-3 for selecting variation pattern types, and MR3-4 for variation patterns. The CPU 103, which executes the random number update process P_RANDOM shown in Figure 10-12, becomes a second update means that can update the third random number by a random number update process when the third random number is set from among the random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols and MR2-1 for normal winning symbols. Based on the start of power supply to the pachinko game machine 1, the CPU 103, which executes the main game control process P_MAIN shown in Figure 4, sets the stored value in the function setting register area by the function setting register store instruction in step AKS13 when it executes the power supply start corresponding process P_POWER_ON shown in Figure 10-7 in step S1. At this time, by setting the stored value in the maximum value setting register provided in correspondence with the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, it is possible to execute a maximum value setting process that sets the maximum random number value of the random number values updated by the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B. Then, in the maximum value setting process, the 16-bit random number circuit 104A and the 8-bit random number circuit 104B, which are the first update means, start updating the first random number when the maximum random number value of the first random number value is set, and then start updating the second random number when the maximum random number value of the second random number value is set. The CPU 103, which executes the main game control process P_MAIN shown in Figure 4, executes the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON in step S1. Then, during the loop processing from steps S8 to S11, in response to a timer interrupt, it becomes possible to execute the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT shown in Figure 5. In step S56, it executes the random number update process P_RANDOM, thereby starting the update of the third random value. Thus, the CPU 103, which executes the random number update process P_RANDOM (the second update means), enables the update of the third random value after executing the maximum value setting process in the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON. By starting the update of random values highly correlated with game value, such as the random number MR1-1 used for special symbol determination, first, uncertainty is increased, enabling the updating of appropriate random values.

In the bit data RAP of the RWM access protect register shown in Figure 10-9(B), the bit data RAM0 with bit number "0" is set to the initial value 0[B] in response to the start of power supply in the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, RAM 102, which is the RWM, becomes inaccessible in response to the storage value of the RWM access protect register, which is a specific storage area, being set to the first storage value. The CPU 103, which has executed the power supply start response process P_POWER_ON shown in Figure 10-7, sets the storage value of the function setting register area by the function setting register store instruction in step AKS13, and then stores the access permission output value in the RWM access protect register by step AKS14. In this way, after setting the storage value in the function setting register area, which is a storage area related to functions, it is possible to set a second storage value that permits access to RAM 102 as a storage means in the RWM access protect register, which is a specific storage area. Then, as the next process after setting the second stored value, the main game control process P_MAIN process shown in Figure 4 executes the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2, thereby enabling a verification process to confirm whether the control state can be restored based on the contents of the RAM 102, which is the storage means. In this way, the contents of the storage means are not unnecessarily changed, ensuring reliable execution of the verification process and enabling appropriate updating of random values.

The CPU 103, which executes the power-off process P_POWER_OFF shown in Figure 10-10, stores the checksum data created by the checksum calculation process P_SUM_CALC in step AKS39 into the checksum buffer in step AKS40. This allows the CPU to perform a stop-time storage process, storing the checksum data, which serves as recovery information for restoring the control state in response to the power supply interruption, in a storage area such as the checksum buffer of the RAM 102, which is a storage means. After this stop-time storage process is performed, the CPU 103 can perform a stop-time storage process, which sets the first stored value to a specific storage area, by storing the clear data set in the output value data in step AKS41 into the RWM access protect register in step AKS42. After the stop-time storage process is performed, the CPU transitions to a standby state in which game control is not performed by the loop processing of steps AKS48 and AKS49. In response to the restoration of power supply while in this standby state, if the power confirmation signal input bit in step AKS49 is not "0", then in step AKS50, the power-off recovery vector table address is set in the stack pointer, and then the power-off process P_POWER_OFF is terminated by an interrupt return instruction. This makes the main process P_MAIN for game control, shown in Figure 4, executable from the beginning as a startup process based on the startup of the pachinko game machine 1. This prevents unstable operation when power supply is restored and enables the updating of appropriate random values.

In the address map of the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 10-2, the function setting register area of the built-in registers to which addresses FE00[H] to FEBF[H] are assigned becomes the first area for function setting using various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100, and the function control register area of the built-in registers to which addresses FF00[H] to FFFF[H] are assigned becomes the second area for function control using various circuits included in the game control microcomputer 100. Of these, the RWM access protect register at address FF00[H] is a specific storage area where a storage value indicating whether or not to allow access to the RAM 102, which is RWM, can be set. Based on the start of power supply to the pachinko game machine 1, the CPU 103, which executes the main game control process P_MAIN shown in Figure 4, can perform a control storage process to set the storage values in the second area, the function control register area, via steps AKS5 to AKS7, if it executes the power supply start corresponding process P_POWER_ON shown in Figure 10-7 in step S1. After such a control storage process is performed, a setting storage process to set the storage values in the first area, the function setting register area, can be performed via steps AKS11 to AKS13. After such a setting storage process is performed, step AKS14 allows setting the storage value that permits access to the memory means, RAM 102, in the RWM access protect register, which is a specific storage area. In this way, it is possible to prevent the contents of the memory means from changing unnecessarily and to update the random value appropriately.

(Means for solving the problems of feature section 01AK and their effects)
(1-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to be in a favorable state for the player,
A means of updating random values,
A first display means capable of performing variable display of special identification information,
It comprises a second display means capable of performing variable display of ordinary identification information,
In response to the display result by the first display means, the type of advantageous state is determined.
In response to the display result from the second display means, a change mode is determined that changes the starting area to a guided state that facilitates the passage of the game medium.
The update method is,
The first random number used to determine the display result by the first display means and the second random number used to determine the display result by the second display means can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process.
The first random value and the second random value can be updated using a common internal storage means.
The first random value is determined when the total number of random values included in the update range is not a prime number.
The second random value is determined by the total number of random values included in the update range being a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a random number update process P_RANDOM. The special identification information may be, for example, a special symbol. The first display means may be, for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. The ordinary identification information may be, for example, an ordinary symbol. The second display means may be, for example, an ordinary symbol display device 20. The display result by the first display means may be, for example, a confirmed special symbol which is the display result of a special symbol. The display result by the second display means may be, for example, a confirmed ordinary symbol which is the display result of an ordinary symbol. The type of advantageous state may be, for example, the maximum number of times the big prize opening occurs. The change mode may be, for example, the opening time of the ordinary electric mechanism. The first random value may be, for example, a random number MR1-2. The second random value may be, for example, a random number MR2-1. The update process could be, for example, an initial value change random number update process P_RANCP. The internal storage means could be, for example, the HL register, B register, DE register of the CPU 103. The total number of first random values could be, for example, the size of random number MR1-2 being "65536". The total number of second random values could be, for example, the size of random number MR2-1 being "199".
With this configuration, the common update process prevents an increase in program size, and because the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number, the synchronous generation of the first and second random values is suppressed, enabling appropriate updates of random values.

(1-2) When the update means performs an update process, it may be possible to update the random number to be updated and change the initial random number after setting the random number to be updated, the maximum random number value, and the initial random number value.
The settings for executing the update process can be, for example, in steps AKS61 to AKS63 and AKS65 to AKS67. The update of the random number to be updated and the change of the initial random number value can be, for example, in steps AKS64 and AKS68, in the part where the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed.
In this configuration, it becomes possible to update the random values appropriately by updating the set random values to be updated.

(1-3) The update means may update the second random value after updating the first random value by a specific update process.
Here, the specific update process could be, for example, a random number update process such as P_RANDOM.
In this configuration, by updating the first random number, which is used to determine the display result that is of high interest to the player, before the second random number, malfunctions can be suppressed, and appropriate updates of random numbers can be made.

(1-4) The update means may update the first random value and the second random value by calling a common update process corresponding to the first random value and the second random value through a specific update process, and may also change the initial values of the first random value and the second random value.
Here, the common update process could be, for example, the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in steps AKS64 and AKS68 of the random number update process P_RANDOM.
In this configuration, the common update process prevents an increase in program size, and the first and second random values are updated stably, enabling appropriate updates of random values.

(1-5) The update means may update the first random value and the second random value using a common internal storage means through a specific update process.
For example, in the random number update process P_RANDOM, the HL register is set by steps AKS61 and AKS65, the B register is set by steps AKS62 and AKS66, and the DE register is set by steps AKS63 and AKS67, after which the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP is executed in steps AKS64 and AKS68.
In this configuration, the first and second random values can be stably updated using a common internal storage mechanism, enabling the updating of appropriate random values.

(1-6) When the update means stores reference destination information in the internal storage means before the common update process by a specific update process, it may be possible to set different reference destination information in the internal storage means using a common instruction corresponding to the first random value and the second random value.
Here, the internal storage means can be, for example, an HL register, a B register, a DE register, etc. The common instruction can be a transfer instruction such as an LD instruction or an LDQ instruction. Different reference information can be, for example, the address F081[H] of the random number counter for winning symbols and the address F052[H] of the random number counter for normal winning symbols, or the address F050[H] of the random number initial value data buffer for winning symbols and the address F053[H] of the random number initial value data buffer for normal winning symbols.
In this configuration, by using common instructions to update the first and second random values, it becomes possible to stably update the first and second random values and update the random values appropriately.

(1-7) When the update means performs an update process, after updating the random number to be updated, it is possible to change the initial random number value in accordance with the fact that the random number to be updated matches the initial random number value.
For example, in the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP, after updating the random number to be updated in step AKS101, in step AKS105, if it matches the value stored in the random number initial value data buffer, a new random number initial value can be stored in step AKS108.
In this configuration, it becomes possible to update the random number appropriately by updating the random number to be updated or by changing the initial value of the random number generator.

(1-8) When the update means updates the random value to be updated by executing the update process,
Compare the random number to be updated with the maximum random number value.
If the result of the comparison is less than the maximum random number value, add 1 to the random number value to be updated.
A single compare-add instruction may be executed first, which includes changing the random number to be updated to the minimum random number if the result of the comparison is greater than or equal to the maximum random number.
Here, the comparison and addition instruction can be, for example, in the step AKS101 section.
In this configuration, executing the comparison and addition instruction first helps suppress malfunctions and enables the updating of random values appropriately.

(1-9) The update means may execute a comparison and addition instruction first in both cases, whether updating the first random value or updating the second random value.
For example, this could be the part of step AKS101 in the initial value change random number update process P_RANCP in steps AKS64 and AKS68.
In this configuration, executing the compare-add instruction first suppresses the occurrence of errors in the first and second random values, enabling the updating of random values appropriately.

(1-10) When determining the display result by the first display means, when the first random value is the minimum random value, the display result is not determined to be more favorable than when the first random value is not the minimum random value.
When determining the display result by the second display means, it is not necessary to determine a display result that is more advantageous when the second random value is the minimum random value than when the second random value is not the minimum random value.
Here, it is acceptable for the display result not to be determined to be one with a high degree of advantage, for example, in the example of determining the number of times the big prize slot is opened AKD01 or the example of determining the manner in which the big prize slot is opened AKD02.
In this configuration, it becomes possible to update the random values appropriately to prevent fraudulent activity caused by defects in the first or second random values.

(1-11) The means of updating is,
It is possible to perform an initial value update process that allows updating the random value used for initial random numbers when changing the initial random number values.
After executing the compare-add instruction, the updated random number value after the compare-add instruction is compared with the initial random number value.
If the updated random number does not match the initial random number value, the updated random number is stored as the current random number.
If the updated random number matches the initial random number value, the initial random number value obtained through the initial value update process may be stored as the current random number value and also as the new initial random number value.
Here, the initial random values can be, for example, random numbers MR1-3 or random numbers MR2-2. The initial value update process can be, for example, the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT. The comparison with the initial random value can be, for example, in step AKS105. If it does not match the initial random value, it can be, for example, in the case of Yes in step AKS105. If it matches the initial random value, it can be, for example, in the steps AKS106 to AKS108 when No is answered in step AKS105.
In this configuration, setting a new initial random number value increases the uncertainty of the random number, and storing it as the current random number prevents an increase in data capacity, enabling appropriate updates of the random number.

(1-12) The means of updating is,
In response to the case where the random number to be updated is the first random number, a first initial value update process is performed to update the first initial value random number used when changing the initial random number value,
In cases where the random number to be updated is the second random number, it may be possible to execute an initial value update process that includes a second initial value update process, which updates the second initial value random number used when changing the initial random number value.
Here, the first random value for initial values can be, for example, random numbers MR1-3. The first initial value update process can be, for example, steps AKS81 and AKS82 in the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT. The second random value for initial values can be, for example, random numbers MR2-2. The second initial value update process can be, for example, steps AKS83 and AKS84 in the initial value determination random number update process P_TFINIT.
In this configuration, updating the random values for the first and second initial values allows for the appropriate updating of random values.

(1-13) The update means may update the random value for the second initial value after updating the random value for the first initial value by an initial value update process.
For example, in the random number update process P_TFINIT for determining initial values, it would be acceptable to execute steps AKS83 and AKS84 after steps AKS81 and AKS82.
In this configuration, updating the first initial random value, which has a higher priority, before updating the second initial random value, which has a lower priority, suppresses the occurrence of errors and enables the updating of random values appropriately.

(1-14) When the update means performs an initial value update process, it does so based on the settings for the random number value to be updated for the initial value and the maximum value of the random number for the initial value,
Compare the random value used for the initial value to be updated with the maximum value of the random values used for the initial value.
If the result of the comparison is less than the maximum value of the initial random number, add 1 to the initial random number value to be updated.
A single compare-add instruction may be executed, which includes changing the random value used for the initial value to the minimum random value if the result of the comparison is greater than or equal to the maximum random value used for the initial value.
Here, the comparison and addition instruction can be, for example, in steps AKS82, AKS84, etc.
In this configuration, updating the random value used for the initial value to be updated using a comparison and addition instruction suppresses the occurrence of malfunctions and enables the updating of appropriate random values.

(1-15) The means of updating is,
A random number update process that allows updating the random number to be updated,
It is possible to perform an initial random number update process that can update the initial random number used when changing the initial random number corresponding to the random number to be updated,
The first process that can be executed in response to a timer interrupt due to the elapsed time includes a random number update process and an initial value random number update process,
The second process, which can be executed repeatedly until the first process is executed, may not include a random number update process, but may include a random number update process for initial values.
Here, the random values to be updated can be, for example, random numbers MR1-2 and random numbers MR2-1. The random number update process can be, for example, random number update process P_RANDOM. The random values for the initial values can be, for example, random numbers MR1-3 and random numbers MR2-2. The random number update process for the initial values can be, for example, random number update process P_TFINIT for determining the initial values. The first process can be, for example, a timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control. The second process can be, for example, steps S8 to S10 in the main process P_MAIN for game control.
In this configuration, the uncertainty of the initial random number value is increased through the initial random number update process, enabling appropriate updates of the random number value.

(1-16) The update process is,
A random number update process that allows updating the random number to be updated,
This includes an initial random number update process that allows updating the initial random number used when changing the initial random number corresponding to the random number to be updated,
The random number update process and the initial value random number update process can be called and executed in the timer interrupt process that controls the progress of the game.
The process for updating the initial random number may be called and executed during the standby process, which is repeated after the startup process that is executed based on the start of power supply.
Here, the random values to be updated can be, for example, random numbers MR1-2 and random numbers MR2-1. The random number update process can be, for example, random number update process P_RANDOM. The random values for the initial values can be, for example, random numbers MR1-3 and random numbers MR2-2. The random number update process for the initial values can be, for example, random number update process P_TFINIT for determining the initial values. The timer interrupt process can be, for example, a timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control. The startup process can be, for example, steps S1 to S7 in the main process P_MAIN for game control. The standby process can be, for example, steps S8 to S10 in the main process P_MAIN for game control.
In this configuration, the uncertainty of the initial random number value is increased through the initial random number update process, enabling appropriate updates of the random number value.

(2-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to be in a favorable state for the player,
A means of updating random values,
The system comprises a processing means capable of executing processes related to game control using random values updated by an update means,
The update means can update a first random value for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state, and a second random value different from the first random value.
The first random value consists of a specific number of bytes, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a specific number.
The second random value is composed of a specific number of bytes, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a predetermined number that is less than a specific number.
The first random value can be updated faster than the second random value.
Here, the advantageous state can be, for example, a jackpot game state. The game machine can be, for example, a pachinko game machine 1. The update means can be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, etc. The processing means can be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The first random value can be, for example, random number MR1-1. The second random value can be, for example, random number MR3-2. The specific number can be, for example, 2 bytes. The specific number can be, for example, the size of random number MR1-1, "65536", etc. The predetermined number can be, for example, the size of random number MR3-2, "65519", etc. A fast update speed means, for example, that the update speed of random number MR1-1 in the random number comparison example AKA23 is 15,000 [times/ms] and the update speed of random number MR3-2 is 469 [times/ms].
In this configuration, the rapid update speed of the first random value related to the advantageous state makes it difficult to intentionally control the advantageous state, thus enabling appropriate updates of the random value.

(2-2) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A means of updating random values,
The system comprises a processing means capable of executing processes related to game control using random values updated by an update means,
The update means is capable of updating a first random value and a second random value that is different from the first random value.
The first random value has an update speed of 1,
The second random value is a second speed whose update rate is an integer multiple of the first speed.
The total number of random values included in the update ranges for the first random value and the second random value may be different, and the total number of random values included in the update ranges for both may be prime numbers.
Here, the gaming machine can be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means can be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, etc. The processing means can be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The first random value can be, for example, random number MR3-2. The second random values can be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The first speed can be, for example, 469 [times/ms]. The second speed can be, for example, 938 [times/ms]. The total number of random values can be, for example, the magnitude of random number MR3-2, "65519", the magnitude of random number MR3-3, "241", the magnitude of random number MR3-4, "251", etc.
In this configuration, even when the update speed is an integer multiple, the total number of random values included in the update range is a different prime number, which suppresses the synchronous generation of the first and second random values and enables appropriate random value updates.

(2-3) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A means of updating random values,
The system comprises a processing means capable of executing processes related to game control using random values updated by an update means,
The update means is capable of updating a first random value, a second random value different from the first random value, and a third random value different from both the first and second random values.
The processing means allows extraction when the first random value, the second random value, and the third random value satisfy a common extraction condition.
The first random value has an update speed of 1,
The second and third random values are second speeds whose update rate is an integer multiple of the first speed.
The total number of random values included in the update ranges for the first, second, and third random values may be different, and the total number of random values included in each update range may be a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine can be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means can be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, etc. The processing means can be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The first random value can be, for example, random number MR3-2. The second random value can be, for example, random number MR3-3. The third random value can be, for example, random number MR3-4. The first speed can be, for example, 469 [times/ms]. The second speed can be, for example, 938 [times/ms]. The total number of random values can be, for example, the magnitude of random number MR3-2, "65519", the magnitude of random number MR3-3, "241", the magnitude of random number MR3-4, "251", etc.
In this configuration, even when the update speed is an integer multiple, the total number of random values included in the update range is a different prime number, which suppresses the synchronous generation of the first, second, and third random values, enabling appropriate random value updates.

(2-4) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A means of updating random values,
The system comprises a processing means capable of executing processes related to game control using random values updated by an update means,
The update method is,
A first update means capable of updating the first random value and the second random value within their respective update ranges by a random number update process,
Includes a second updating means capable of updating a third random value and a fourth random value within their respective update ranges using a random number clock signal,
At least one of the first random number and the second random number is such that the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number.
At least one of the third and fourth random values may be a prime number if the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine can be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means can be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, or a CPU 103 that executes the random number update process P_RANDOM. The processing means can be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process P_TPROC or the normal symbol process process P_FPROC. The first random number value can be, for example, random number MR2-1. The second random number value can be, for example, random number MR1-2. The random number update process can be, for example, the random number update process P_RANDOM. The third random number value can be, for example, random number MR3-3. The fourth random number value can be, for example, random number MR3-4. The clock signal for random numbers can be, for example, a system clock. The total number of random values included in the update range should be, for example, "199" (the magnitude of random number MR2-1), "200" (the magnitude of random number MR1-2), "241" (the magnitude of random number MR3-3), "251" (the magnitude of random number MR3-4), and so on.
In this configuration, the first update means and the second update means use different update methods. Even if the update methods are the same, at least one of the random values will have a total number of prime numbers included in the update range, which suppresses synchronization and enables appropriate updating of random values.

(3-1) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A means of updating random values,
A processing means capable of executing game control processing using random values updated by an update means,
A storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of an update means and a processing means,
The processing means is capable of performing a maximum value setting process to set the maximum random number value of the random number values updated by the update means when setting a storage value in the storage area related to a function by a startup process that is performed based on the start of power supply.
The update method is,
A first update means capable of updating a first random value consisting of a specific number of bytes,
Includes a second update means capable of updating a second random value consisting of a predetermined number of bytes smaller than the specified number of bytes,
When the processing means performs a maximum value setting process, it may set the maximum random value of the second random value after setting the maximum random value of the first random value.
Here, the gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means may be, for example, a random number circuit 104. The processing means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The storage area for functions may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The startup processing may be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The maximum value setting processing may be, for example, the part of steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start corresponding processing P_POWER_ON. The specific number of bytes may be, for example, 2 bytes. The first random value may be, for example, a random number MR3-2. The first update means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A. The predetermined number of bytes may be, for example, 1 byte. The second random number can be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The second update means can be, for example, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B. Setting the maximum value of the first random number and setting the maximum value of the second random number can be done by executing step AKS13 using the function setting register storage value table AKT01.
In this configuration, by setting a first random value of a specific number of bytes and then setting a second random value of a predetermined number of bytes, the first and second random values can be updated stably, enabling the updating of appropriate random values.

(3-2) The update method may start updating the random numbers in order from the random number values for which the maximum random number value has been set.
For example, this could be a section that uses the function setting register storage value table AKT01 to set the maximum value for the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL0 for channel number "0", the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL2 for channel number "2", and the 8-bit random number circuit channels RS1 to RS3 for channel numbers "1" to "3".
In this configuration, the uncertainty of the random values is increased by the timing at which the random value update begins, reducing the processing load and enabling appropriate random value updates.

(3-3) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A means of updating random values,
A processing means capable of executing game control processing using random values updated by an update means,
A storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of an update means and a processing means,
The processing means is capable of performing a maximum value setting process to set the maximum random number value of the random number values updated by the update means when setting a storage value in the storage area related to a function by a startup process that is performed based on the start of power supply.
The update method is,
A first update means capable of updating the first random value and the second random value using a random number clock signal,
It includes a second update means that can update the third random value by a random number update process,
In the maximum value setting process executed by the processing means, the first update means starts updating the first random value when the maximum random value of the first random value is set, and then starts updating the second random value when the maximum random value of the second random value is set.
The second update means may start updating the third random value after the processing means has performed the maximum value setting process.
Here, the gaming machine can be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means can be, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a CPU 103 that executes the random number update process P_RANDOM. The processing means can be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process P_TPROC or the normal symbol process process P_FPROC. The storage area for functions can be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means can be, for example, the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The startup processing can be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The maximum value setting processing can be, for example, the part of steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start corresponding processing P_POWER_ON. The first random value can be, for example, random numbers MR1-1, MR3-2, etc. The second random value can be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The first update means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, etc. The third random value may be, for example, random numbers MR1-2, MR2-1, etc. The random number update process may be, for example, the random number update process P_RANDOM. The second update means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the random number update process P_RANDOM in step S56. The start of updating the first random value may be, for example, the part that sets the maximum value for the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL0 of channel number "0" and the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL2 of channel number "2" using the function setting register storage value table AKT01. The start of updating the second random value may be, for example, the part that sets the maximum value for the 8-bit random number circuit channels RS1 to RS3 of channel numbers "1" to "3" using the function setting register storage value table AKT01. The start of updating the third random value can be, for example, the part in the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control where the random number update process P_RANDOM in step S56 is executed after the power supply start corresponding process P_POWER_ON in step S1 is executed.
In this configuration, the uncertainty is increased by starting the update of random numbers such as MR1-1, which are highly correlated with the game's value, and this allows for the updating of appropriate random values.

(4-1) A storage means capable of storing information related to game control,
A storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of an update means and a processing means,
A specific storage area within the storage area related to a function can be set to a first storage value that prohibits access to the storage means in response to the start of power supply.
The processing means is,
After setting a storage value in the storage area related to the function, a second storage value that permits access to the storage means can be set in a specific storage area.
As the next step after setting the second stored value in a specific storage area, a confirmation process may be performed to check whether the control state can be restored based on the contents of the storage means.
Here, the storage means may be, for example, RAM 102. The storage area for functions may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The specific storage area may be, for example, the RWM access protect register. The first stored value may be, for example, 00[H]. The second stored value may be, for example, 01[H]. The ability to set the second stored value in the specific storage area may be, for example, by executing step AKS14 in the power supply start corresponding process P_POWER_ON. The confirmation process may be, for example, the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2.
In this configuration, the contents of the memory device are not unnecessarily altered, ensuring that the verification process is reliably executed and enabling the updating of appropriate random values.

(4-2) Processing means are,
In response to a power supply interruption, it is possible to perform a shutdown storage process that stores recovery information in a storage means to restore the control state.
After the shutdown storage process is executed, it is possible to execute a shutdown storage process that sets the first stored value to a specific storage area.
After the shutdown storage process is executed, the system may transition to a standby state in which no game control is performed. In response to the restoration of power supply while the system is in this standby state, the startup process based on the startup of the game machine may be made executable from the beginning.
Recovery information can be, for example, checksum data. Stop-time storage processing can be, for example, the checksum calculation process in step AKS39 or the part of step AKS40 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF. Stop-time storage processing can be, for example, the parts of steps AKS41 and AKS42 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF. Transitioning to standby state can be, for example, by executing steps AKS48 and AKS49 in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF. Being executable from the start of startup processing can be, for example, by executing step AKS50 and then the RET instruction in the power-off process P_POWER_OFF.
In this configuration, unstable operation can be prevented when power supply is restored, and appropriate random value updates can be performed.

(4-3) A storage means capable of storing information related to game control,
A storage means including a storage area relating to the functions of an update means and a processing means,
The storage means, as a storage area related to the function,
The first area for function settings,
It includes a second domain for functional control,
The second area includes a specific storage area where a storage value indicating whether or not to allow access to the storage means can be set,
The processing means, in the startup process executed based on the start of power supply,
It is possible to execute a control storage process to set a value in the second area.
After the control storage process is executed, a setting storage process can be executed to set the stored value in the first area.
After the configuration storage process is executed, it may be possible to set the storage value that permits access to the storage means in a specific storage area.
Here, the memory means may be, for example, RAM 102. The storage area for functions may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The first area may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01. The second area may be, for example, the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The specific storage area may be, for example, the RWM access protect register. The startup processing may be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The control storage processing may be, for example, the part of steps AKS5 to AKS7 in the power supply start corresponding processing P_POWER_ON. The setting storage processing may be, for example, the part of steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start corresponding processing P_POWER_ON. The ability to set the stored value to a specific storage area can be achieved, for example, by executing step AKS14 in the power supply start-up processing P_POWER_ON.
In this configuration, it is possible to prevent the contents of the memory device from changing unnecessarily, while also enabling the updating of appropriate random values.

(SKY2021-664) A gaming machine that can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
A means of updating random values,
The aforementioned random values include a first random value and a second random value that is different from the first random value.
The result of determining the first random value has a greater impact on the payout rate than the result of determining the second random value.
The update means is,
The first random value and the second random value can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process.
After updating the first random value, update the second random value.
Before updating the first random value through the update process, a specific instruction is used to set the reference information for the first random value in the internal storage means.
Before updating the second random value through the update process, the reference information for the second random value is set in the internally enabled means using the specified instruction.
Here, the payout rate is a rate calculated by using the number of game balls inserted into the gaming machine as the denominator and the number of game balls dispensed to the player as the numerator. It is set as a design value for each gaming machine. A rate exceeding 100% indicates that more game balls were dispensed to the player than were inserted into the gaming machine.
Here, the first random number corresponds to the random number for the winning symbol (MR1-2), and the second random number corresponds to the random number for the regular winning symbol (MR2-1). The random number for the winning symbol is used to determine the number of jackpot rounds, which is the main trigger for acquiring game balls (a random number that determines the display result of the special symbol linked to the number of jackpot rounds) (see Figure 10-24 (C)). The random number for the regular winning symbol is used to determine the opening time of the regular electric mechanism (a random number that determines the display result of the regular symbol linked to the opening time of the regular electric mechanism) (see Figure 10-37 (D)). The determination by the random number for the winning symbol is for determining the number of jackpot rounds, while the determination by the random number for the regular winning symbol is for determining the opening time of the regular electric mechanism, and the random number for the winning symbol has a greater influence on the number of game balls acquired. While 15 game balls can be obtained by entering the grand prize slot, only 1 game ball can be obtained by entering the regular electric prize slot.
In this configuration, since the first random number has a greater impact on the player's payout, processing it first helps to prevent the random number from becoming constant due to malfunctions or other issues (causing periods of bias due to no updates), and stable updates can be achieved by updating the random number using a common command.

(SKY2021-665) A gaming machine that can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
A means of updating random values,
The aforementioned random values include a first random value and a second random value that is different from the first random value.
The update means is,
The first random value and the second random value can be updated within their respective update ranges by a common update process.
A single compare-add command, which includes comparing the random value with the maximum random value, adding 1 to the random value if the comparison result is less than the maximum random value, and changing the random value to the minimum random value if the comparison result is greater than or equal to the maximum random value, is the first process of the update process for the first random value and the update process for the second random value.
If the first random value is the minimum random value, the decision result will not be more favorable than if the first random value is not the minimum random value.
If the second random value is the minimum random value, the decision result will not be more favorable than if the second random value were not the minimum random value.
Here, it is acceptable for the display result not to be determined to be highly advantageous, for example, in the example of determining the number of times the big prize opening is opened AKD01 or the example of determining the manner in which the big prize opening is opened AKD02. Also, in the example of determining the opening time of the normal electric mechanism in Figure 10-37(D), the opening time of the normal electric mechanism is designed to be uniformly 16 ms in the normal state (time-saving operation specified value ×) and uniformly 5000 ms in the special state (time-saving operation specified value ○), so as to be without advantage or disadvantage. However, in the example of determining the opening time of the normal electric mechanism in Figure 10-37(D), the opening times of the normal electric mechanism for the normal symbol winning symbol specified value "00" are 16 ms and 5000 ms, but in order to make it relatively disadvantageous compared to other opening times, it may be set to 10 ms and 3000 ms. By doing so, if both the number of times the big prize slot opens, which is the result of the first random value (random number for winning symbols (MR1-2)), and the normal electric mechanism opening time, which is the result of the second random value (random number for normal winning symbols (MR2-1)), become the minimum random value (00H), it is possible to prevent a favorable determination result (10 times for the number of times the big prize slot opens, or 5000ms for the normal electric mechanism opening time).
In this configuration, executing the compare-add instruction first suppresses the occurrence of malfunctions and enables the updating of appropriate random values. If a malfunction does occur, the random values may be slightly biased towards the minimum random value. However, even in that case, the design prevents the decision result from being highly advantageous, thus preventing the deliberate induction of malfunctions and, as a result, enabling the updating of appropriate random values.

(SKY2021-708) A gaming machine that can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
A means of updating random values,
The aforementioned random values include a first random value used in the process of determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state, and a second random value different from the first random value.
The aforementioned first random value consists of a specific number of bytes, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a specific number.
The second random value is composed of the specified number of bytes, and the total number of random values included in the update range is a predetermined number that is smaller than the specified number.
The update speed of the first random value by the update means is faster than the update speed of the second random value by the update means.
Here, the advantageous state can be, for example, a jackpot game state. The game machine can be, for example, a pachinko game machine 1. The update means can be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, etc. The processing means can be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The first random value can be, for example, random number MR1-1. The second random value can be, for example, random number MR3-2. The specific number can be, for example, 2 bytes. The specific number can be, for example, the size of random number MR1-1, "65536", etc. The predetermined number can be, for example, the size of random number MR3-2, "65519", etc. A fast update speed means, for example, that the update speed of random number MR1-1 in the random number comparison example AKA23 is 15,000 [times/ms] and the update speed of random number MR3-2 is 469 [times/ms].
In this configuration, the rapid update speed of the first random value related to the advantageous state makes it difficult to intentionally control the advantageous state, thus enabling appropriate updates of the random value.

(SKY2021-709) A gaming machine that can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
A means of updating random values,
The aforementioned random values include a first random value and a second random value that is different from the first random value.
The aforementioned first random value has an update rate of first speed,
The second random value is a second speed whose update rate is an integer multiple of the first speed.
The first random value and the second random value are random values obtained under the same circumstances.
The total number of random values included in the respective update ranges of the first random value and the second random value are different.
The first random value is defined as a prime number, where the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
The second random value is defined as a prime number, where the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine can be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means can be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, etc. The processing means can be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The first random value can be, for example, random number MR3-2. The second random values can be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The first speed can be, for example, 469 [times/ms]. The second speed can be, for example, 938 [times/ms]. The total number of random values can be, for example, the magnitude of random number MR3-2, "65519", the magnitude of random number MR3-3, "241", the magnitude of random number MR3-4, "251", etc.
In this configuration, even when the update speed is an integer multiple, the total number of random values included in the update range is a different prime number, which suppresses the synchronous generation of the first and second random values and enables appropriate random value updates.

(SKY2021-710) A gaming machine that can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
A means of updating random values,
The aforementioned random values include a first random value, a second random value different from the first random value, and a third random value different from the first and second random values.
The aforementioned first random value has an update rate of first speed,
The second random value and the third random value are determined by a second speed at which the update rate is an integer multiple of the first speed.
The first random value, the second random value, and the third random value are random values obtained under the same circumstances.
The total number of random values included in the update ranges of the first random value, the second random value, and the third random value are different.
The first random value is defined as a prime number, where the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
The second random number is defined as a prime number, where the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number.
The third random value is defined as a prime number, where the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine can be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means can be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, etc. The processing means can be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The first random value can be, for example, random number MR3-2. The second random value can be, for example, random number MR3-3. The third random value can be, for example, random number MR3-4. The first speed can be, for example, 469 [times/ms]. The second speed can be, for example, 938 [times/ms]. The total number of random values can be, for example, the magnitude of random number MR3-2, "65519", the magnitude of random number MR3-3, "241", the magnitude of random number MR3-4, "251", etc.
In this configuration, even when the update speed is an integer multiple, the total number of random values included in the update range is a different prime number, which suppresses the synchronous generation of the first, second, and third random values, enabling appropriate random value updates.

(SKY2021-711) A gaming machine that can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
A first update means capable of updating the first random value and the second random value within their respective update ranges by a random number update process,
The system includes a second updating means capable of updating a third random value and a fourth random value within their respective update ranges using a random number clock signal,
At least one of the first random number and the second random number is such that the total number of random numbers included in the update range is a prime number.
At least one of the third random value and the fourth random value is such that the total number of random values included in the update range is a prime number.
Here, the gaming machine can be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means can be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, or a CPU 103 that executes the random number update process P_RANDOM. The processing means can be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process P_TPROC or the normal symbol process process P_FPROC. The first random number value can be, for example, random number MR2-1. The second random number value can be, for example, random number MR1-2. The random number update process can be, for example, the random number update process P_RANDOM. The third random number value can be, for example, random number MR3-3. The fourth random number value can be, for example, random number MR3-4. The clock signal for random numbers can be, for example, a system clock. The total number of random values included in the update range should be, for example, "199" (the magnitude of random number MR2-1), "200" (the magnitude of random number MR1-2), "241" (the magnitude of random number MR3-3), "251" (the magnitude of random number MR3-4), and so on.
In this configuration, the first update means and the second update means use different update methods. Even if the update methods are the same, at least one of the random values will have a total number of prime numbers included in the update range, which suppresses synchronization and enables appropriate updating of random values.

(SKY2021-712) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Game control means for controlling the game,
A first update means capable of updating the first random value and the second random value using a random number clock signal,
The system comprises a second update means capable of updating a third random value by a random number update process,
The game control means is capable of performing a maximum value setting process to set the maximum random values of the first random value and the second random value when setting a stored value in the storage area by a startup process that is performed based on the start of power supply.
The first update means, in the maximum value setting process, can start updating the first random value after the maximum random value of the first random value has been set, and then start updating the second random value after the maximum random value of the second random value has been set.
The second update means can start updating the third random value after the updating of the first random value and the updating of the second random value have started.
Here, the gaming machine can be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The update means can be, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a CPU 103 that executes the random number update process P_RANDOM. The processing means can be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process P_TPROC or the normal symbol process process P_FPROC. The storage area for functions can be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means can be, for example, the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The startup processing can be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The maximum value setting processing can be, for example, the part of steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start corresponding processing P_POWER_ON. The first random value can be, for example, random numbers MR1-1, MR3-2, etc. The second random value can be, for example, random numbers MR3-3, MR3-4, etc. The first update means may be, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 104A, an 8-bit random number circuit 104B, etc. The third random value may be, for example, random numbers MR1-2, MR2-1, etc. The random number update process may be, for example, the random number update process P_RANDOM. The second update means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the random number update process P_RANDOM in step S56. The start of updating the first random value may be, for example, the part that sets the maximum value for the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL0 of channel number "0" and the 16-bit random number circuit channel RL2 of channel number "2" using the function setting register storage value table AKT01. The start of updating the second random value may be, for example, the part that sets the maximum value for the 8-bit random number circuit channels RS1 to RS3 of channel numbers "1" to "3" using the function setting register storage value table AKT01. The start of updating the third random value can be, for example, the part in the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control where the random number update process P_RANDOM in step S56 is executed after the power supply start corresponding process P_POWER_ON in step S1 is executed.
In this configuration, the uncertainty is increased by starting the update of random numbers such as MR1-1, which are highly correlated with the game's value, and this allows for the updating of appropriate random values.

(SKY2021-713) A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Game control means for controlling the game,
A storage means capable of storing information related to the control of the game,
It includes a storage means that includes a storage area related to the control functions of the game,
The aforementioned storage means has a storage area related to a function,
The first area for setting functions related to game control,
It includes a second domain for functional control related to game control,
The second region includes a specific storage region on which a storage value indicating whether or not to allow access to the storage means can be set,
The aforementioned game control means, in the startup process executed based on the start of power supply,
The second region can be used to perform a control storage process to set a value to be stored in it.
After the control storage process is executed, a setting storage process can be executed to set the value stored in the first area.
After the setting storage process is executed, the storage value that permits access to the storage means can be set in the specific storage area.
Here, the memory means may be, for example, RAM 102. The storage area for functions may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01 or the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The storage means may be, for example, the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. The first area may be, for example, the function setting register area of setting example AKA01. The second area may be, for example, the function control register area of setting example AKA02. The specific storage area may be, for example, the RWM access protect register. The startup processing may be, for example, the main processing P_MAIN for game control. The control storage processing may be, for example, the part of steps AKS5 to AKS7 in the power supply start corresponding processing P_POWER_ON. The setting storage processing may be, for example, the part of steps AKS11 to AKS13 in the power supply start corresponding processing P_POWER_ON. The ability to set the stored value to a specific storage area can be achieved, for example, by executing step AKS14 in the power supply start-up processing P_POWER_ON.
In this configuration, it becomes possible to prevent the contents of the memory from changing unnecessarily, while also enabling the updating of appropriate random values.

The various forms described above are not limited to pachinko machines, but can also be applied to slot machines and other similar devices.

The control described above involves updating the first and second random values using a common internal storage means. However, the system is not limited to this; it may also be equipped with multiple light-emitting means, and light emission control may be performed using different luminance data tables corresponding to each light-emitting means. In this case, switching between light emission control for each light-emitting means becomes easier, allowing for optimal light emission control. A specific control is described below.

The embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the following examples.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
Before the display means switches the display from the background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table (Figures 28, 29, 48, 49, 50, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the demonstration display in a step-by-step design, allows attention to be drawn to the changes rather than starting everything at once, making the start of the demonstration display noticeable and resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
Before the display means switches the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the brightness data table for the normal state background display to the brightness data table for the demonstration display.
Before the display means switches the display from the special state background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the brightness data table for the special state background display to the brightness data table for the demonstration display (Figures 28, 29, 48, 49, 50, 52, 53, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the demonstration display in a step-by-step manner, allows attention to be drawn to the changes rather than starting everything at once, making the start of the demonstration display noticeable and resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in form 2-1,
The luminance data initially used in the demonstration display luminance data table is data that emits light in a different color than the final luminance data used in the normal state background display luminance data table and the final luminance data used in the special state background display luminance data table (Figures 90, 94, 98, 102, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that the color of the last luminance data during normal background display differs from the color of the first luminance data during demonstration display, and the color of the last luminance data during special background display differs from the color of the first luminance data during demonstration display. As a result, the color change of the light-emitting means is more noticeable when the demonstration display starts in each state, making it easier to understand that the demonstration display has started, and consequently enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means, a second light-emitting means, and a third light-emitting means.
The third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the first and second periods, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for background display and the luminance data table for demonstration display (Figures 39, 48, 49, 52, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means could mislead the player into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means. Therefore, by keeping the mode constant, it is possible to prevent such misunderstandings and, as a result, enable optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of type 4-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means, a second light-emitting means, and a third light-emitting means.
The third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display.
During the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for displaying the background in the normal state, the luminance data table for displaying the background in the special state, and the luminance data table for displaying the demonstration.
During the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table (Figures 39, 48, 49, 52, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means could lead players to mistakenly believe that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means. Therefore, by maintaining a consistent mode in both the normal and special states, it is possible to prevent players from being misled in either state, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of type 5-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means, a second light-emitting means, and a third light-emitting means.
The third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a first scene and a second scene,
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the first scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a luminance data table for the first scene corresponding to the first scene.
In the second scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a luminance data table for the second scene corresponding to the second scene.
In the first scene during the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the first scene and the luminance data table for the second scene.
In the second scene during the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first luminance data table (Figures 39, 48, 49, 52, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means could mislead the player into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means. Therefore, by keeping the mode constant, it is possible to prevent such misunderstandings and, as a result, enable optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
One luminance data table is different from the luminance data table used when a promotional effect is performed to prompt the operation of the performance control means, and the luminance data constituting the one luminance data table has less luminance change than the luminance data constituting the promotional effect luminance data table (Figures 107 to 115, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, one brightness data table is composed of brightness data that is less emphasized than when the operation of the performance control device is being prompted. This prevents players from mistakenly believing that the operation of the performance control device is being prompted, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The first luminance data table is characterized by being composed of luminance data for turning off the lights.
According to this feature, since one brightness data table consists of brightness data for turning off the lights, it is possible to prevent players from mistakenly thinking that they are being prompted to operate the performance control device, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The first light-emitting means is provided on the game board,
The second and third light-emitting means are provided in the game frame (Figure 46, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, although the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means are provided on the game frame, by managing them separately from other light-emitting means provided on the game frame using the same brightness data table, it is possible to suitably design the system to prevent players from mistakenly believing that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

The gaming machine of form 5-5 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The display means displays an indication that the device is starting up after the power is turned on.
The light emission control means is,
At a timing related to displaying an indication that the display means is activated, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display brightness data table.
The third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table at a timing related to displaying an indication that the display means is activated (Figures 57, 59, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for illumination using a luminance data table even before the background display is activated, enabling verification of the illumination mechanism's functionality at startup. Subsequently, the illumination pattern can be seamlessly transitioned to the customer waiting mode, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene displaying the title name, a scene displaying a warning, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned first model introduction scene is a scene in which text introducing the gaming machine is displayed.
The aforementioned second model introduction scene is a different scene from the aforementioned first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which text introducing the gaming machine is displayed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the title name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title name display scene corresponding to the title name display scene.
In the warning display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the warning display scene corresponding to the warning display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene, the luminance data table for the title name display, and the luminance data table for the warning display scene.
In the second model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the first luminance data table (Figure 39, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.

The term "company name" includes the names of the companies involved in the development, manufacturing, and sales of the gaming machine in question.
This feature allows for multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. However, since information such as company names, model titles, and warnings should be emphasized, each can be highlighted by using dedicated illumination to differentiate it from other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is the gaming machine described in form 6-1,
There are other scenes between the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene.
In other scenes, a different luminance data table is used (Figure 39, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows a common brightness data table to be used for both the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, enabling optimal light emission without increasing capacity, and consequently, optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is the gaming machine described in form 6-1,
The execution period for the model introduction scene, including the first and second model introduction scenes (30 seconds), is greater than the execution period for the company name display scene (10 seconds). The execution period for the model introduction scene, including the first and second model introduction scenes (30 seconds), is greater than the execution period for the warning display scene (5 seconds).
A key feature of this system is that the company name and warning text may appear at times other than during the demonstration.
This feature allows for longer emphasis on scenes introducing the machine or displaying the title name, which are only shown during demonstrations, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of type 7-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the text of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned first model introduction scene is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned second model introduction scene is a scene different from the aforementioned first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene.
In the second model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table.
The aforementioned brightness data table for the company name display scene includes brightness data that is linked to the animation of the text display of the company name related to the gaming machine.
The first brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene, nor brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (Figures 39, 41, 42, 101-108, and 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. In particular, to convey company names, using brightness data linked to the display animation allows for emphasis compared to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of type 8-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a title display scene, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text with animation.
The aforementioned first model introduction scene is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned second model introduction scene is a scene different from the aforementioned first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the title name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title name display scene corresponding to the title name display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period and the second model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for displaying the title name.
The aforementioned brightness data table for the title name display scene includes brightness data that is linked to the animation of the title name text display on the gaming machine.
The first brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene, nor brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (Figures 39, 41, 42, 101-108, and 129).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. In particular, to convey the model name, the brightness data is linked to the display animation, allowing it to be emphasized in comparison to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of type 9-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene displaying the title name, and a scene displaying a warning.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the title name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title name display scene corresponding to the title name display scene.
In the warning display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the warning display scene corresponding to the warning display scene.
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for corporate name display scenes is a more emphasized mode than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for warning display scenes.
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for title name display scenes is a more emphasized mode than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for warning display scenes (Figure 38, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the transmission of information through text displays in multiple scenarios. To emphasize each type of information, such as company names, machine titles, and warnings, dedicated illumination is used for each. In particular, the illumination patterns for company names and machine titles are emphasized compared to warning scenes, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is the gaming machine described in form 9-1,
The modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for company name display scenes are more emphasized than the modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for warning display scenes, and the modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for title name display scenes are more emphasized than the modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for warning display scenes, are any of the following: (1) modes with frequent flashing; (2) modes with many colors illuminated; (3) modes with a large number of light-emitting means used (Figure 38, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for emphasis on the company name and model title, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is the gaming machine described in form 9-1,
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for the corporate name display scene is characterized by being more emphasized than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for the title name display scene.
This feature allows for greater emphasis on the company name, making it easier for players to understand which company is associated with the gaming machine, and consequently enabling more effective customer waiting control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene showing the company name and a scene introducing the product model.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the model introduction scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the model introduction display scene corresponding to the model introduction display scene.
The plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the corporate name display scene are luminance data configured to be emitted by the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means.
The multiple luminance data sets that constitute the luminance data table for the aforementioned model introduction scene are luminance data configured such that the first light-emitting means emits light and the second light-emitting means does not emit light (Figures 39, 100 to 108).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, although there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, in the scene where the company name is displayed, both the first and second light-emitting means are made to illuminate, and in the scene where the model is introduced, the first light-emitting means illuminates but the second light-emitting means does not. This allows the scene where the company name is displayed to be relatively emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the first model introduction display scene corresponding to the first model introduction display scene.
In the second model introduction scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the second model introduction display scene corresponding to the second model introduction display scene.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using a single luminance data table during the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period.
According to this feature, although there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, in the scene where the company name is displayed, both the first and second light-emitting means are set to emit light in a dedicated emission mode. In the scenes where the first and second models are introduced, the first light-emitting means emits light in a dedicated emission mode, while the second light-emitting means emits light in a common emission mode. This allows the scene where the company name is displayed to be relatively emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow luminance data table.
When a specific effect is performed, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
The rainbow luminance data table used during the second period and the rainbow luminance data table used when the specific effect is performed are common luminance data tables (Figures 38, 41, 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more spectacular demonstration display by setting the light emission pattern to rainbow. Furthermore, by using the same luminance data table for setting the light emission pattern to rainbow as the luminance data table used for specific effects performed during gameplay, the system does not require increased capacity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
When a specific performance that can be executed in the normal state and a special performance that can be executed in the special state are executed, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
The rainbow brightness data table used in the second period after the first period following the end of gameplay in the normal state, the rainbow brightness data table used in the second period after the first period following the end of gameplay in the special state, and the rainbow brightness data table used when specific effects that can be performed in the normal state and special effects that can be performed in the special state are performed are all common brightness data tables (Figures 38, 41, 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more spectacular demonstration display by setting the light emission pattern to rainbow. Furthermore, by using the same luminance data table for setting the light emission pattern to rainbow as the luminance data table used for specific effects that can be performed in normal conditions and special effects that can be performed in special conditions, the system does not require increased capacity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is the gaming machine described in form 12-1,
The aforementioned specific effects and special effects are characterized by being effects that definitively inform the player that they will be controlled to a favorable state.
According to this feature, the luminance data table used for effects that are guaranteed to be controlled to a favorable state is also used for demonstration displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene that includes a title name display scene,
The aforementioned title name display scene consists of a main title name display part that displays the main title name of the gaming machine, and a subtitle name display part that subsequently displays the subtitle name of the gaming machine.
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for the subtitle name display part corresponding to the subtitle name display part at the timing of switching from the main title name display part to the subtitle name display part.
The luminance data table for the subtitle name display part is a luminance data table that uses multiple luminance data to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a manner that is linked to the animation of the subtitle name's text display (Figure 39, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the main title name and subtitle name are displayed in that order, and the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed. By illuminating the lighting means in conjunction with the display animation of the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene displaying the title name, and a scene displaying a warning.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the text of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text with animation.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed in animation when playing the gaming machine.
The animated display of the company name for the gaming machine is more emphasized than the animated display of warning text when playing the gaming machine.
The animated display of the game machine's title is more emphasized than the animated display of warning text when playing the game machine (Figures 130, 131, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the use of text displays to convey information in multiple scenarios. To emphasize each type of information, such as company names, machine titles, and warnings, dedicated display animations are used for each. In particular, emphasizing the display animations for company names and machine titles compared to warning scenes allows for greater emphasis on these elements, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a title display scene and a warning display scene.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned title name display scene, the title name of the gaming machine is displayed as an animation at a predetermined display position.
After that, the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text with animation.
In the aforementioned warning display scene, warning text for playing the gaming machine is displayed with animation at a designated display position.
Subsequently, warning text messages regarding gameplay are displayed without animation (Figures 130, 131, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by adding a lingering animation to the display of the game title, attention is drawn to the title, while by not using lingering animations for warnings, the text can be read clearly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display includes a warning display scene,
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned warning display scene consists of a first warning display part that displays a warning text for the first event, and a second warning display part that displays a warning text for the second event.
The background color of the text in the first warning display part is different from the background color of the text in the second warning display part (Figures 43, 44, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased attention to different events by using different background colors, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name and a scene displaying a warning.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The background color of the text displayed in the company name display scene is different from the background color of the text displayed in the warning display scene (Figures 43, 44, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased attention when switching between displaying the company name and warnings by using different background colors, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
After the second period has ended, the background display will be shown again.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table for the background display (Figures 60, 61, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the background display in a step-by-step design, prevents an unpleasant feeling after the demonstration display ends, and as a result enables optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
After the second period in the aforementioned normal state has ended, the background display of the normal state will be displayed again.
After the second period in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display will be displayed again.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal state background display, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the brightness data table for the demonstration display to the brightness data table for the normal state background display.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the special state background display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the brightness data table for the demonstration display to the brightness data table for the special state background display (Figures 60 to 62, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the background display in a step-by-step design, prevents a negative aftertaste when the demonstration display ends. Furthermore, the state can be quickly communicated to the player through the lamp's illumination pattern, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information (Figures 63 to 68, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, which in turn enables prompt notification that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the normal state background display is displayed.
During the first period after the variable display in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state, the demonstration display is displayed.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the variable display in the special state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display in the special state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state (Figures 63 to 68, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, both in normal and special states. This switching of the light-emitting means allows for prompt notification that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a background display is shown.
During the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, the demonstration display is displayed.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the termination of the second special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
When the first start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information.
When the second start condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information (Figures 63 to 68, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control, as the system switches control of the light-emitting means first, regardless of which starting condition is met. This switching of the light-emitting means quickly signals that the starting condition has been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in a more efficient customer waiting control system.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
When the aforementioned demonstration display is displayed and the activation condition is met, the display switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value (Figures 35, 64, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the switching from the demonstration display to be completed before the transparency of the performance identification information increases, thereby indicating that the activation conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the normal state background display is displayed.
During the first period after the variable display in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the aforementioned special state, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
In the normal state, if the start condition is met while the demonstration display is shown, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value.
In the aforementioned special state, if the activation condition is met while the demonstration display is shown, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value (Figures 35, 64, 134, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the completion of the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information increases, in both normal and special states. This signals that the activation conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a background display is shown.
During the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, the demonstration display is displayed.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
When the first activation condition is met while the demonstration display is being shown, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value.
When the demonstration display is shown and the second activation condition is met, the display switches from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value (Figures 35, 64, 134, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information increases, regardless of which activation condition is met, regardless of which activation condition is met.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Launching operation means,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
If the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being shown, the display will switch from the demonstration display to the background display.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the background display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the background display (Figures 69, 70, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, which in turn signals that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the firing mechanism. As a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of providing gaming services,
Menu operation means,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being shown, the system switches from the demonstration display to the menu display.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the menu is displayed, the light-emitting means is controlled using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display.
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display (Figures 71 to 73, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, which in turn promptly signals that the menu operation means has been operated and the demonstration display has ended. As a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of providing gaming services,
Menu operation means,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, a demonstration display is shown.
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being shown, the system switches from the demonstration display to the menu display.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
When the menu is displayed, the light-emitting means is controlled using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display.
In the normal state described above, when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display.
In the aforementioned special state, when the display means is showing the demonstration display, if the menu operation means is operated, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display (Figures 71 to 73, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, both in normal and special states. This switching of the light-emitting means allows for prompt notification that the menu operation means has been operated and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
After the second period ends, the switching display is shown, and then the background display is shown.
If an interrupt condition is met while the demonstration display is being shown, the system will switch from the demonstration display to the background display without displaying the switching display (Figures 60 to 73, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more abrupt transition when a demonstration display ends due to the passage of time, by inserting a switching display. Conversely, when a demonstration display ends due to an interruption condition, it appears to switch abruptly without an inserting switching display. This contrast highlights the fact that the display ended abruptly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
After the second period in the aforementioned normal state has ended, a switching display is shown, and then the background display of the aforementioned normal state is shown.
After the second period in the aforementioned special state has ended, the switching display is shown, and then the special state background display is shown.
When the demonstration display is shown in the normal state, if the interrupt condition is met, the system will switch from the demonstration display to the normal state background display without displaying the switching display.

When the demonstration display is displayed in the aforementioned special state, if the interrupt condition is met, the system switches from the demonstration display to the special state background display without displaying the switching display (Figures 60 to 73, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control by contrasting the two events: in normal and special states, the termination of a demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing abrupt by inserting a switching display; and the termination of a demonstration display due to an interruption condition is made to appear abrupt without inserting a switching display.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
If a power outage occurs and then the power is restored,
After power is turned on, the background display is displayed without showing the guidance message regarding the performance adjustment at the time the background display starts.
After that, a demonstration display will be shown.
Subsequently, the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the background display starts, and the background display is displayed.
If a power outage occurs and a power-on process is performed that involves initialization,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying the guidance display regarding the performance adjustment at the timing when the background display starts.
After that, the aforementioned demonstration display is shown,
Subsequently, the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the background display starts, and the background display is then displayed (Figures 54 and 55).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature suggests that the setup process before a gaming parlor opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization). In either case, the staff can check the display in the following order: checking the background display after power-on, checking the demonstration display, and checking the guidance display, thus increasing the efficiency of the checks. Furthermore, when the gaming parlor opens and welcomes players, if a background display is shown, it will be the background display that shows the guidance display. This allows for clear guidance regarding the adjustment of the presentation from the moment the game starts, providing players with a suitable gaming environment, and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, the normal state background display is shown,
In the aforementioned special state, the special state background display is shown,
In the aforementioned normal state, if a power outage occurs and the power is restored,
After the power is turned on, the guidance display regarding the performance adjustment is not displayed at the timing when the normal state background display starts, and the normal state background display is displayed.
After that, a demonstration display will be shown.
Subsequently, the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the normal state background display starts, and the normal state background display is displayed.
In the aforementioned special condition, if a power outage occurs and then the power is restored,
After the power is turned on, the guidance display regarding the performance adjustment is not displayed at the timing when the special state background display starts, and the special state background display is displayed.
After that, the aforementioned demonstration display is shown,
Subsequently, the guidance display is displayed at the timing of the start of the display of the special state background display, while the special state background display is displayed (Figures 56 to 59, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
Based on these characteristics, there are two possible states for the setup of a gaming parlor before it opens: a normal state and a special state. To allow players to confirm which state the parlor is in during startup, the system avoids displaying guidance messages in the background to avoid interference. If the background is displayed again afterward, it is highly likely that the state has already been confirmed. Therefore, by displaying guidance messages from the moment the background display starts, when the gaming parlor opens and welcomes players, the background display will be the one with the guidance message. This allows for clear guidance regarding adjustments to the game's presentation from the moment players start playing, providing them with a suitable gaming environment and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display has finished,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the performance adjustment, the normal background display is shown, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed while the normal background display is shown.
Subsequently, a demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the normal state background display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has finished,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the performance adjustment, a special state background display is shown, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed while the special state background display is shown.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the special status background display is shown (Figures 49 to 54, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the end of a variation, regardless of whether it is a normal or special state. Since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat after the demonstration display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display encourages the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, effective customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the performance adjustment, the normal background display is shown, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed while the normal background display is shown.
Subsequently, a demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the normal state background display is shown.
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended,
The normal state background display is displayed without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the normal state background display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended,
The special status background display is displayed without the aforementioned guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the special status background display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended,
The special status background display is displayed without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the special status background display is shown (Figures 49 to 54, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the change in the first special identification information in either the normal state or the special state has ended, and even after the change in the second special identification information has ended, the guidance display is not immediately displayed after the change has ended, preventing unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat after the demonstration display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display encourages the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, effective customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
After the variable display ends,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the production adjustment, the background display is shown, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed superimposed on the background display by displaying a specific animation.
Subsequently, a demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is displayed superimposed on the background display by displaying the specific animation (Figures 49 to 54, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments by not immediately displaying guidance after the end of a variation. Once the demonstration display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display encourages players to play in a suitable gaming environment. Furthermore, when displaying guidance immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, using the same animation as when displaying guidance after the end of a variation allows for appealing that guidance has been displayed without incurring additional costs, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display has finished and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has ended and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, the second specified period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, the demonstration display is shown after the second specified period has elapsed.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 49, 52, 57, 59, 133, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is shown immediately after the fluctuation ends, it may be annoying as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time is set. After the power is turned on, it is the store staff, not the players, who are present, so setting a shorter time allows the store staff to quickly check the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display has finished and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has ended and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, followed by a power-on process that includes initialization. After the second specified period has elapsed, the demonstration display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization is performed, the second specific period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 49, 52, 55, 133, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is shown immediately after the fluctuation ends, it may be bothersome as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time is set. Cold start (power on with initialization) is the starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By making the demonstration display appear immediately, the staff of the gaming parlor can quickly check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, a demonstration display is shown after a first specific period has elapsed.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, the first specified period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, followed by a power-on process that includes initialization. After the second specified period has elapsed, the demonstration display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization is performed, the second specific period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 55, 57, 59, 133, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the initial starting method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By making the demonstration display appear immediately, the staff can quickly check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display ends and a first specific period has elapsed, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the demonstration display ends and a predetermined period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed again.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has ended and the first specified period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the demonstration display has ended and the predetermined period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed again.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed after a second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display has finished, the demonstration display is displayed again after a predetermined period has elapsed.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed after the second specified period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display has finished, the demonstration display is displayed again after the predetermined period has elapsed.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 49, 52, 55, 133, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is shown immediately after the end of a variation, it may be bothersome as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time is set. Cold start (power on with initialization) is the initial starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By making the demonstration display appear immediately, the staff of the gaming parlor can quickly check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine. Furthermore, by making the period after the demonstration display is shown once in all situations—after the end of a variation in normal mode, after the end of a variation in special mode, and after a cold start—the demo movie can be shown stably, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued (Figures 75 to 77, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for stable notification of specific errors that occur during gameplay, whether during background display or demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the special state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the specific error has not occurred during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the specified error occurs during gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specified error corresponding to the specified error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the completion of gameplay in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during gameplay in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (Figures 75 to 78, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature ensures that the notification of specific errors that occur during gameplay is carried over and executed regardless of whether the game is in a normal or special state, whether it is during background display or demonstration display. This allows for stable notification of specific errors and, as a result, enables optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a background display is shown.
During the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, the demonstration display is displayed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error has not occurred during the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has finished, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has finished, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If a specific error occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during the variable display of the second special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has finished, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (Figures 75 to 78, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for stable notification of specific errors by ensuring that the lamp notification of specific errors occurring during the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information is carried over and executed during both background display and demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
The luminance data constituting the demonstration display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different proportions of colors (Figures 45, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for demonstration displays to have different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during the demonstration display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
The brightness data constituting the background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different proportions of colors (Figures 45, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for background display to have different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the specific error has not occurred during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the specified error occurs during gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specified error corresponding to the specified error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during gameplay in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the normal state background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different proportions of colors.
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the special state background and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors have different proportions of colors (Figures 45, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for normal state background display to use different main colors in the luminance data, and by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for special state background display to use different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern of the background display, regardless of which background display is being used, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the second period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for demonstration display.
The brightness data for the demonstration display and the brightness data for the specific error have different proportions of colors (Figures 45, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for specific errors and the luminance data for demonstration displays to have different main colors, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during the demonstration display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the background display brightness data corresponding to the background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data.
The colors that make up the majority of the background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are different (Figures 45, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for specific errors and the luminance data for background display to have different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the normal state background display brightness data corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the special state, if the specific error has not occurred, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the brightness data for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the background in the normal state.
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the end of the game in the special state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the special state background.
The colors that make up the majority of the normal state background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data are different.
The brightness data for displaying the background of the special state and the brightness data for the specific error have different proportions of colors (Figures 45, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data to use different main colors for luminance data for specific errors and luminance data for normal state background display, and by configuring the luminance data to use different main colors for luminance data for specific errors and luminance data for special state background display, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during background display, regardless of whether it is a normal or special state, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
The luminance data constituting the demonstration display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured to have different light emission operation patterns that the player can see (Figures 45, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for demonstration displays, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during the demonstration display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
The luminance data constituting the background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured to have different light emission operation modes that are visible to the player (Figures 45, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the special state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the specific error has not occurred during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the specified error occurs during gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specified error corresponding to the specified error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during gameplay in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the background in the normal state and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured to have different light emission operation patterns that are visible to the player.
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the special state background and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured to have different light emission operation patterns that the player can see (Figures 45, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for normal state background display, and the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for special state background display, so that it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during the background display, regardless of which background display is being used, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the second period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for demonstration display.
The luminance data for demonstration display and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light-emitting means and the light emission operation mode of the second light-emitting means are different as seen by the player (Figures 45, 88 to 99, 120 to 122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data for specific errors and the brightness data for demonstration displays, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during the demonstration display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the background display brightness data corresponding to the background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data.
The luminance data for background display and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light-emitting means and the light emission operation mode of the second light-emitting means are different as seen by the player (Figures 45, 88 to 99, 120 to 122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data for specific errors and the brightness data for background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the brightness data for the normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the special state, if the specific error has not occurred, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the brightness data for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the background in the normal state.
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the end of the game in the special state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the special state background.
The luminance data for displaying the background in the normal state and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light-emitting means and the light emission operation mode of the second light-emitting means are different as seen by the player.
The luminance data for displaying the special state background and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light-emitting means and the light emission operation mode of the second light-emitting means are different as seen by the player (Figures 45, 88 to 99, 120 to 122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ depending on whether the brightness data for a specific error is used or the brightness data for displaying the background in the normal state. By configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ depending on whether the brightness data for a specific error is used or the brightness data for displaying the background in a special state, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during background display, regardless of whether the state is normal or special, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
During the second period, when the specified error occurs, whether the number of game media exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit or the number of game media not exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit, the detection means switches from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for the demonstration display and controls the light-emitting means at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game media (Figures 45, 74, 75, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for seamless demonstrations of the game balls, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout unit. When the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emission mode of the light emission means is switched to a mode corresponding to the demonstration display. This enables the demonstration display to be shown without any unnaturalness, standardizes the processing, and as a result, enables optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
When the specified error occurs during the first period, whether the number of game media exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit or the number of game media not exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit, the detection means switches from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for background display and controls the light-emitting means at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game media (Figures 45, 74, 75, 88 to 99, 120 to 122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the background display to be shown quickly and seamlessly, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout unit. As soon as the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This enables standardization of processing and, as a result, allows for optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the second period, if the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met and the detection means does not detect a game medium for a predetermined period of time, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
When the specified error occurs during the second period, and a specified period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for the demonstration display (Figures 45, 74, 75, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while a state where the detection means does not detect anything may indicate a specific error, it could also be due to a ball delay or other issues. Therefore, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is not immediately switched. When a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is immediately switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the demonstration display. This allows the demonstration display to be shown without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of form 58-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the first period, if the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met and the detection means does not detect a game medium for a predetermined period of time, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the background display brightness data table to the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
When the specified error occurs during the first period, and a specified period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for background display (Figures 45, 74, 75, 88-99, 120-122, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while a state where the detection means does not detect anything may indicate a specific error, it could also be due to a ball delay or other issues. Therefore, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is not immediately switched. When a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is immediately switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This allows the background display to be shown without any unnaturalness, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Basic explanation)
First, we will explain the basic configuration and control of pachinko machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a typical pachinko machine).

Next, an embodiment for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following description, the front side of Figure 11 will be considered the front (front, front view) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be considered the rear (rear, back view) side. The description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front. In this embodiment, the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 refers to the surface facing the player playing the game. Furthermore, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "004SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach," and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 11 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or simply variable.

Furthermore, the special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, only one type of special symbol display device is required for the variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

Furthermore, the upper left corner of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5S for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols. The small symbols are displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state in the pachinko machine 1, the right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 (see Figure 31) prompting the player to shoot to the right, and the remaining time-saving display 004SG202 (see Figure 31) indicating the remaining time-saving rounds, etc., may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the performance images such as characters. This prevents the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the performance images. This prevents the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed in a variable form. For example, it is displayed in a variable form by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. Because the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable form, even if the decorative symbols are difficult to recognize, such as when the display content including the variable display of the decorative symbols momentarily disappears from the screen, or when the movable body 32 obscures all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable form. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the second variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the symbols displayed on the fourth symbol display device, which is installed in a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7, which is a designated location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, are also referred to as the fourth symbols.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (special symbol hold memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to the variable display. In this embodiment, a special symbol hold memory display area 5U is provided common to both the first and second special symbols. However, a first special symbol hold memory display area, which displays the first hold display representing a variable display whose execution for the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol hold memory display area, which displays the second hold display representing a variable display whose execution for the second special symbol is pending, may be provided separately.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 12). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric mechanism having a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, resulting in a closed state where no game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in the tilted position, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special game may be started. Furthermore, the variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to those described above, as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 11, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

Between the prize ball entry device 6A and the variable prize ball entry device 6B, a special variable prize ball entry device 7 with a large prize entry opening is provided. The special variable prize ball entry device 7 includes a large prize entry opening door driven by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 12), and this door forms a large prize entry opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 11, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols as general identification information, distinct from special symbols. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided through which the game ball can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3. Side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a, surrounding the game area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. These main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32, which operates according to the effects, is provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 11). The movable body 32 is equipped with a movable body lamp 9d. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. These attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." These main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are sometimes collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. Note that these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are composed of LEDs (see Figure 46). Further details about the various lamps will be described later.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A, which can be grasped and tilted by the player, is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is equipped with a trigger button that the player can press. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 12).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing the player to perform predetermined instruction operations by pressing it. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 12).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle 30 on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., a starting entry occurs, but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries are reached (for example, 4).

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol may differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a guaranteed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss."

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

During a jackpot, the large prize winning slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize winning slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize winning slot can be open in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize winning slot is open is called a round (round game). During a jackpot, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined maximum number of times (e.g., 15 times or 2 times).

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot entry point (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability-increasing state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. There may also be jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variation control is implemented that increases the probability of the displayed result being "Big Win" compared to the normal state. The probability variation state is even more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of special symbol variations and makes "Big Win" more likely.

The time-saving mode and the probability-increasing mode continue until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-restricted time-saving mode" (count-restricted time-saving mode, count-restricted probability-increasing mode, etc.).

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability-increasing state. It is a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the same settings as its initial state (for example, when a system reset is performed, or when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on).

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is sometimes called a low probability high base state, the probability variation state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A state that is both a high probability and a low base state is also called a high probability low base state.

Furthermore, the game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the jackpot entry point) during a jackpot game state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variation state after the jackpot game state.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of such displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If it's a "probability-increasing jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line. If it's a "non-probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols (normal symbols). After a reach pattern is reached with non-probability-increasing symbols, an upgrade animation may be performed that ultimately results in a "probability-increasing jackpot."

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may become a reach mode, and then the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the currently running variable display, and those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may perform a pseudo-consecutive display effect by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include an announcement of the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15, as shown in Figure 12. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board 004SG030, an information terminal board, and a launch control board. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of held symbols), execution of regular symbol games (including management of held symbols), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The payout control board 004SG030 is connected to a payout device 004SG031, which is driven to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to the player based on the receipt of a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 004SG032, which is installed in the payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls dispensed by the payout device 004SG031 pass. The board can stop the operation of the payout device 004SG031 according to the pattern of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 004SG032.

Furthermore, the payout control board 004SG030 is connected to a handle sensor 004SG034 for detecting the amount of operation performed by the player, and a touch ring 004SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting whether the player is gripping the ball-shooting handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 004SG030 controls the launching device 004SG033, which is capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. Signals indicating whether the touch ring 004SG035 is detected, and signals indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device 004SG033, are input from the payout control board 004SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and executes performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable parts 32, error notifications, and power outage recovery notifications) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when player operation is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the effects based on the effect execution instructions from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies video signals corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. It also performs display processing, outputting image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM region specified in the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area switch with each V-blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area allocated as the drawing area in one V-blank, and then in the next V-blank, it switches to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V-blank is displayed, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

Furthermore, the display control unit 123 generates an image for display on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) multiple layers. Therefore, the VRAM area contains a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image for display on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (combining) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower levels; images from higher layers have a higher display priority on the image display device 5, while images from lower layers have a lower display priority.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 3 images. Additionally, the VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is the area where the image drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create the image to be displaced, and then the displacement image is applied to this image to create the displacement image.

The display image creation area is the area where images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to form a display image for display on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area are set to have the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), images drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area are set to have a lower display priority than images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5 (display priority: medium), and images drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are set to have the lowest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: low). In other words, Layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, Layer 2 is the middle layer with a lower image display priority than Layer 1, and Layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The Layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing images to display a first interface image, which includes a special symbol hold memory display area 5U that clearly displays the first and second special symbol hold memory counts, at the bottom of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a second interface image, which includes small symbols smaller than the decorative symbols on the display screen and a hold memory count display, at the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5.

The Layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area located in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the Layer 3 image rendering area is a rendering area that renders the background display in order to display the background display across the entire display screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the image displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 1 image drawing area (Layer 1 image), the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 2 image drawing area (Layer 2 image), and the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 3 image drawing area (Layer 3 image). In particular, as mentioned above, the images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the topmost image on the image display device 5. The images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area (decorative patterns) have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as the middle layer image on the image display device 5. The images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area (background display) have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as the bottom layer image on the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the overlapping areas of the upper image and the lower image are not visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images that are displayed transparently or temporarily hidden may be provided on the display screen of the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound specification signal (a signal specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal specifying the on/off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to synchronize sound output with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals to operate the movable body 32, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is also "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 13(A) is just an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 13(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a performance control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpots to use if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 13(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command that indicates a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot A", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot B", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot C", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "Big Win" and the big win type will be "Non-Probability Variation Big Win," as well as the big win type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variation of decorative symbols in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has performed a cold start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). A cold start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the data is initialized without restoring the data from before power-on, and the game machine is made capable of performing various processes. Command 9200H is a power-out recovery specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has performed a hot start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). A hot start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the game machine is made capable of performing various processes based on the backed-up data. Since a hot start does not involve initialization, it is also called a power-on without initialization. Command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. Depending on the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, different EXT data is set using the game state specification command. For example, command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variation control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is the second game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variation control is not (low probability high base state, time-saving state). Command 9502H is the third game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variation control are performed (high probability high base state, time-saving probability variation state). Note that the time-saving probability variation state is sometimes simply referred to as the "probability variation state". Command 96XXH is an error specification command that specifies that an error has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 and that the error has been cleared.

Command A0XXH is a win start command (also called the "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a visual effect indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening is open during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a jackpot opening after notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening has changed from open to closed during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a win end command that specifies the display of a visual effect at the end of a jackpot game.

In the win start and win end commands, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command. Alternatively, in the win start and win end commands, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big prize slot open notification command and the big prize slot after opening notification command, different EXT data may be set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (e.g., "0" to "10").

Command B100H is a first-start-entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start-entry

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command that notifies the first reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory count notification command that notifies the second reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. The first reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start-up-entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up-entry Furthermore, the first and second reserved memory count notification commands may be sent in response to the start of the special game execution when either the first or second start condition is met (i.e., when the reserved memory count decreases). Command E100H is a customer-waiting demo specification command that specifies the execution of a customer-waiting demo (demo performance). Command F100H is a frame status display specification command that specifies the status of each input port (including the on/off state of the touch ring 004SG35).

Instead of sending the first and second pending memory count notification commands, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. That is, a total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify of an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 13(A) are just examples, and the system may omit some of these commands, use different commands in place of these, or add other commands. For example, a command to notify the number of prize balls dispensed based on each prize ball entering a prize slot, a gate passage notification command to notify when a game ball has passed through gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display rounds for which probability variation control or time reduction control is executed may be provided.

Figure 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 14, on the main board 11, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and MR4 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game-specific random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data that represents some or all of these random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may use a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and update various numerical data via software to count numerical data that represents some of the random values MR1 to MR4.

The random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is used to determine whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state by treating the variable display result, such as a special symbol, as a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536." The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type ("Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," or "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot") when the variable display result is a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "100."

The random value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of several pre-defined types, and takes values in the range of "0" to "997".

The random value MR4 used for determining the result of the regular symbol display is a random value used to determine whether the variable display result in the regular symbol game using the regular symbol display unit 20 is a "regular symbol win" or a "regular symbol loss," and it takes values in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 15 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for both the first and second special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special figures.

The display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) is assigned to the special symbol display result of "Big Win" or "Miss," depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" than when it is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) compared to the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when it is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control it to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 16(A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is referenced to determine the jackpot type from several types based on the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result should be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that was variably displayed (variable display) in the special symbol game was a first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or a second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination is assigned to one of several types of jackpots, such as "non-probability variation jackpot," "probability variation jackpot A," "probability variation jackpot B," and "probability variation jackpot C."

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 16(B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set as follows: "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," in which probability variation control and time reduction control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot," in which only time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) and this is repeated. On the other hand, the jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 2 times (so-called 2 rounds) and this is repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state resulting from "Non-Probability-increasing Jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. Therefore, "Bonus Win A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) bonus win, "Bonus Win B" as a 5-round (5R) bonus win, and "Bonus Win C" as a 2-round (2R) bonus win.

The probability variation control and time-saving control that begin after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the end of the jackpot game state of a non-probability variation jackpot is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed, or that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state before the completion of the 100 variable displays. Therefore, if the next jackpot is one of probability variation jackpots A to probability variation jackpot C, the probability variation control and time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called continuous jackpot state where jackpot game states occur continuously without going through the normal state. In other words, the probability variation state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. Therefore, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when a winning streak is about to end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 16(A), the assignment of determination values to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot" differs depending on whether the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, when the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds. On the other hand, when the variable-display special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination values are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C." This configuration allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the first start condition for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is met, or whether the second start condition for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is met. In particular, in special symbol games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never controlled to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which result in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are more likely to enter the second starting entry point formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent occurrences of jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, thus preventing a decrease in game enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 16(A), the assignment of determination values for the "non-probability variation" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variation jackpot and the probability of a probability variation jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game.

Therefore, as mentioned above, just as the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol, the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol. For "Probability Variation Jackpot A," which has a large number of rounds, it is set to be more likely to be determined when it is a special game of the second special symbol than when it is a special game of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, even in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a different range of predetermined judgment values than those used in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". For example, in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a smaller judgment value than in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special feature game using the first or second special feature, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 17 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are pre-prepared to correspond to cases where the variable display result is "miss," specifically when the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "not a reach" and when it is "a reach," as well as when the variable display result is "jackpot." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "not a reach" is called the "not a reach variation pattern" (also referred to as the "not a reach miss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "a reach" is called the "reach variation pattern" (also referred to as the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the "not a reach variation pattern" and the "reach variation pattern" are included in the "miss variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" is called the "jackpot variation pattern."

The jackpot variation patterns and reach variation patterns include normal reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a normal reach is executed, and super reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a super reach is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Furthermore, in this embodiment, three types of super reach variation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive wins), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive win), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive wins), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of super reach variation patterns, or two or fewer types, may be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the Super Reach variation patterns include: a variation pattern (PB1-2) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-2) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (no pseudo-consecutive spins); a variation pattern (PB1-3) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-3) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (one pseudo-consecutive spins); and a variation pattern (PB1-4) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-4) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (two pseudo-consecutive spins).

As shown in Figure 17, the special symbol variation time for the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment, during which the reach animation is performed, is set to be shorter than that for the super reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach. Therefore, in both the Normal Reach and Super Reach variation patterns, the longer the special symbol variation time, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved items, the game state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 18, if the variable display result is a non-probability-changing jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table A from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot A to C, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table B from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 70%.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is one or less, then the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and using this miss variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (variation pattern for no shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss), PA2-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss), and PA2-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) miss). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is 2, then the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected. Using this miss variation pattern determination table B, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 30% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is 3, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected. Using this miss variation pattern determination table C, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 20% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a high-base state (short-time state or probability-increasing state), the losing variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this losing variation pattern determination table D from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach loss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern). More specifically, in the losing variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 at a rate of 10%, PA2-2 at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is illustrated as determining the variation pattern according to the type of jackpot when the result is a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection ratio of any of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied regardless of the type of jackpot, for example, depending on the game state. By doing so, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern suitable for the game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 12 may be a backup RAM, where part or all of its contents are backed up by a backup power supply generated on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor acting as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary to restore the control state to what it was before the power outage occurred, based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage or the like. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data storage area 004SG150, as shown in Figure 19, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 004SG150 shown in Figure 19 includes a first special symbol hold storage unit 004SG151A, a second special symbol hold storage unit 004SG151B, a regular symbol hold storage unit 004SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 004SG152, a game control timer setting unit 004SG153, a game control counter setting unit 004SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 004SG155.

The first special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151A stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting entry opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a starting entry (first starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

The second special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151B stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting entry opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a starting entry (second starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

As an example, the first special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151A associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the second special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151B associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the second starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for variable display result determination, the random value MR2 for win type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

Thus, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 004SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 004SG151B indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved. This reserved information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will be achieved based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (when the game ball passes through the first start prize entry opening) and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the second start prize (when the game ball passes through the second start prize entry opening) are stored in separate reserved storage units in association with reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 004SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 004SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data such as a random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 004SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 004SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether it is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 004SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 004SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of several types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 004SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data representing random values MR1 to MR4, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 12 stores not only the program for performance control, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns.

As an example, ROM 121 stores a performance control pattern table containing multiple types of performance control patterns used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the performance operations of various performance devices (e.g., image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). The performance control patterns consist of data indicating the control content, corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The performance control pattern table should contain, for example, performance control patterns for when the special symbol is displayed, pre-announcement performance control patterns, and various other performance control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 12 is provided with a performance control data storage area 004SG190, as shown in Figure 20(A), which is a region for storing various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data storage area 004SG190 shown in Figure 20(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 004SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 004SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 004SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose status can be updated according to the performance operation status, such as the display status of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, or performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 is equipped with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 is equipped with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 stores data indicating the count value for each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start-up winning command buffer 004SG194A, as shown in Figure 20(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194. The start-up winning command buffer 004SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the first special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") and a storage area corresponding to the first special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0"). Furthermore, the start-up winning command buffer 004SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the second special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0"). When a starting prize is awarded at the first or second starting prize slot, two commands—a starting slot entry designation command (either the first or second starting slot entry designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (either the first or second reserved memory count notification command)—are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the starting prize award reception command buffer 004SG194A are allocated to store these starting slot entry designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands separately for the first and second special symbol reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted one by one to higher positions, as described later, when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which store the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition was met, are cleared during the special symbol win waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

The CPU 120 for performance control stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 004SG194A when a win occurs at the first start entry slot. Similarly, when a win occurs at the second start entry slot, the CPU 120 stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 004SG194A. During a win, commands from the start entry slot designation command to the hold memory count notification command are transmitted sequentially. Therefore, upon command reception, the start entry slot designation command and the hold memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" through "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol hold memory, respectively.

As shown in Figure 20(B), the commands stored in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 004SG194A are changed each time a variable display of decorative symbols is started. The commands stored in the entry corresponding to the previously completed variable display hold memory (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") are deleted, and the contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to the hold memory of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the hold memory of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 20(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols of the first special symbol hold memory is completed, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3", respectively. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the variable-display pending memory at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 21, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if the special symbols were changing, it is sufficient that the special symbol changes can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

Furthermore, if the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

After the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed, the CPU 103 sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically triggered at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, the loop process begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 22. Upon starting the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 22, the CPU 103 first performs a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error processing, the CPU 103 diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1 and, if necessary, generates a warning based on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.), which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Figure 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process performed in step S25 shown in Figure 22 as part of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first performs the start prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved number of items. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and this is stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the number of reserved items, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the number of reserved items, and the prediction judgment. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 22.

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the system may store the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots, and ensure that the conditions for starting the special game are met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "jackpot" or not. When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot state if the upper limit is reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

(Starting point prize determination process)
Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up prize determination process (S101) shown in Figure 23. In the start-up prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start-up switch 22A is ON or OFF based on a detection signal from the first start-up switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start-up prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A (004SGS101). At this time, if the first start-up switch 22A is ON (004SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special feature reserve memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for a special feature game using the first special feature, is at a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory count) (004SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special feature reserve memory count by, for example, reading the first reserve memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserve memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. If the number of reserved first special symbols stored in 004SGS102 is not the upper limit (004SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "0" (004SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off (004SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved special symbols has reached its upper limit (004SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is turned on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B, which is provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B (004SGS104). In this case, if the second start port switch 22B is on (004SGS104; Y), the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, is determined to be at a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit number of reserved symbols) (004SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol by reading the second reserved ball count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved ball count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. If the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not the upper limit (004SGS105; N), the CPU 103 sets the value stored in the start-up buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 to "2" (004SGS106).

After executing either process 004SGS103 or 004SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols, corresponding to the value stored in the start-up buffer, is updated by adding 1 (004SGS107). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start-up buffer value is "2", the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up entry-level slot and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. The second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the second start-up entry-level slot and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total number of reserved symbols is also updated by adding 1 (004SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, can be updated by adding 1.

After executing the processing in 004SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern (004SGS109). The numerical data representing each of these extracted random values and the start gate buffer value are stored as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol hold storage unit (004SGS110).

The numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols or decorative symbols is a "jackpot," and further, if the variable display result is a "jackpot," to determine the type of jackpot. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbols or decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of 004SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random values used to determine the variable display pattern, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 004SGS110, the transmission settings for the start-up entry designation command are performed according to the start-up buffer value (004SGS111). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the settings for transmitting the first start-up entry designation command are made to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the first start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Conversely, when the start-up buffer value is "2", the settings for transmitting the second start-up entry designation command are made to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the second start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The start-up entry designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing S27 shown in Figure 22.

Following the processing of 004SGS111, the CPU 103 configures the settings for sending a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (004SGS113), for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The pending memory count notification command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 22.

After executing the process in 004SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (004SGS114). If the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. Conversely, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS116), and then the start port entry process is terminated. This ensures that even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start port entry of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of valid start ports from both can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern processing as usual)
Figure 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Figure 23 as a normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 25, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" (step 004 SGS 141). The number of reserved second special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 004 SGS 141, the second reserved symbol count value stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0" or not.

If the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; N), the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out from the second special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 004SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 004SGS142, the second special feature hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the second special feature hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the second special feature hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the second special feature hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 004SGS143).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 004SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS141 is "0" (step 004SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS145 is "0". The number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS145 is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol, as displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 004SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol counter and determines whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 004SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 004SGS141 that the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS141 is "0", and it determines whether the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS145 is "0". As a result, special symbol games using the second special symbol are started with priority over special symbol games using the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the execution of the special feature game using the second special feature is not limited to prioritizing the execution of the special feature game using the first special feature. For example, the execution of the special feature game may be initiated in the order in which the game ball enters (passes through) the first and second starting prize entry points and a starting prize is generated. In this case, it would suffice to provide a table that stores data that can identify the order in which starting prizes occurred, and to determine whether to start the execution of the special feature game using the first or second special feature from that stored data.

If the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; N), then numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read from the first special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 004SGS146). The numerical data read at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 004SGS146, the first special symbol hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the first special symbol hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the first special symbol hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the first special symbol hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 004SGS147).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 004SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

In step 004SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 15 is selected and set as the table used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols, which is the special symbol display result, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result, "jackpot" or "miss", to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 004SGS150). In step 004SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) where the probability change flag is on, then if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (probability change state), it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if not, it is determined to be a "miss". Furthermore, if the probability variation flag is off and the machine is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result will be judged as a "jackpot" if it falls within the range of 1 to 219, and as a "miss" otherwise.

Thus, in the display result determination table selected in step 004SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability). Therefore, in the processing of step 004SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display such as the special symbol game starts is in a high probability state, different determination data (determination values) are used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot." As a result, when the game state is in a high probability state, the probability of determining a "jackpot" is higher than when it is in a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 004SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step 004SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 16(A) is selected and set as the table used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 004SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the system determines which of the several jackpot types it is based on whether the numerical data representing the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types in the jackpot type determination table: "non-probability jackpot," "probability jackpot A," "probability jackpot B," or "probability jackpot C" (step 004SGS154).

In step 004, the type of jackpot is determined by the processing of SGS154. This determines whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variation state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. This is determined before the confirmed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. The determined jackpot type is then stored by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the value stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 004, SGS155), in accordance with the determined jackpot type. For example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" which corresponds to a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation A" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot A, it should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation B" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot B, it should be set to "2". If it is "probability variation C" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot C, it should be set to "3". After processing in step 004SGS155, proceed to step 004SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the result is "incorrect" in step 004SGS150 (step 004SGS150; N), the process in step 004SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 004SGS152 to 004SGS155.

In step 004SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a confirmed special symbol in accordance with the prior determination result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determination result of the jackpot type when the game is in a jackpot state. For example, in accordance with the prior determination result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", the special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 004SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 004SGS154 is "probability variation jackpot A", the special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability-increasing jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "probability-increasing jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Note that these guaranteed special symbols are just examples; other guaranteed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as guaranteed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 004SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 004SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbol game entries using the first special symbol is "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; Y), the system performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 004SGS158) before ending the normal special symbol processing. This demo display setting determines whether a performance control command (customer-waiting demo specification command) specifying a demonstration display (demo screen display), such as displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, has been sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer-waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. If it has not been sent, the system performs the necessary settings to send the customer-waiting demo specification command before terminating the demo display setting.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control processing as shown in the flowchart of Figure 26. When the main performance control processing shown in Figure 26 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed while waiting.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets to interrupt disable. However, if a CPU that does not automatically set to interrupt disable is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, the control content of the performance operations using the various performance devices is determined, decided, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used for performances on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the random number update process for performances (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko game machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) for updating the background display shown on the image display device 5 to another background display, and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Furthermore, in the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the following is selected and displayed: the first background display 004SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode, the second background display 004SG082 corresponding to the second performance mode, and the third background display 004SG083 corresponding to the third performance mode. The first background display 004SG081 can be displayed when the game state is the normal state, the second background display 004SG082 can be displayed when the game state is the low probability high base state, and the third background display 004SG083 can be displayed when the game state is the high probability high base state.

The menu display process includes, in addition to displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, further processing to adjust the volume output from speakers 8L and 8R, and to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9, in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, etc., while the menu screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the demo performance control processing, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer-waiting demo performance start timer, based on the receipt of a customer-waiting demo specification command, and start the customer-waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer-waiting demo performance start timer is operating or while the customer-waiting demo performance is running, the customer-waiting demo performance start timer should be cleared, the customer-waiting demo performance should be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 should be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process processing)
Figure 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 26 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 27, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a hold display update process (step S161) which updates the hold memory display (first hold display 004SG101 and second hold display 004SG102) in the special hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents of the start-winning received command buffer 004SG194A, such as a shift display. After the hold display update process is executed, one of the processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, for example, according to the value of the performance process flag provided in RAM 122.

Furthermore, in step S161, a pre-announcement setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process. This process involves determining, deciding, and setting for executing a pre-announcement effect (for example, an effect that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when a prize is awarded upon start.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output sound and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, and performs various effect controls during the variable display of decorative symbols. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of the jackpot game state. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". If it does not receive a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state and the waiting time for such a command has elapsed, it determines that the display result in the special symbol game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special symbol win waiting process terminates.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "4". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing terminates.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "5". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

(Demo performance control processing)
Next, the operation of the CPU 120 for performance control will be explained. Figures 28 to 30 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S78 of Figure 26. In the demo performance control process, the CPU 120 for performance control first determines whether or not the demo movie display is currently running (step 004 SGS 501). Whether or not the demo movie display is currently running is determined by whether or not the demo movie running flag, which indicates that the demo movie display is currently running, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie is not currently being displayed, then it is determined whether or not the menu is currently displayed (step 004SGS502). Whether or not the menu is currently displayed is determined by whether or not the "menu displayed" flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is not currently displayed, it is determined whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on or not (step 004SGS503). Whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on or not is determined by whether the touch ring on flag, which indicates that the touch ring 004SG035 is on, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is not on, it is determined whether or not the system is waiting for the demo movie to start (step 004SGS504). Whether or not the system is waiting for the demo movie to start is determined by whether or not the demo movie start waiting flag, which indicates waiting for the demo movie to start, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the system is not waiting for the demo movie to start, it is determined whether or not a customer-waiting demo specification command has been received (step 004SGS505). Whether or not a customer-waiting demo specification command has been received is determined by whether or not the customer-waiting demo specification command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the customer-waiting demo specification command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that a customer waiting demo specification command has been received, a timer value equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (60000) is set as the demo movie start wait timer to measure the time until the demo movie display starts (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) is set as the guidance display start wait timer to measure the time until the guidance display starts (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag indicating that guidance display is waiting to start is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the performance control main process returns.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that a customer-waiting demo designation command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received (step 004SGS507). Whether or not a power-on designation command has been received is determined by whether or not the power-on designation command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the power-on designation command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on command has been received, the timer value for the demo movie start wait timer is set to approximately 60 seconds (30000) (step 004SGS508), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), the timer value for the guidance display start wait timer is set to approximately 30 seconds (15000) (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-down recovery command has been received (step 004SGS509). Whether or not a power-down recovery command has been received is determined by whether or not the power-down recovery command reception flag, which indicates the receipt of the power-down recovery command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power outage recovery command has not been received, the demo performance control process terminates and the system returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power outage recovery command has been received, the system sets a timer value equivalent to approximately 90 seconds (45000) as the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS510), sets the demo movie start wait flag (step 004SGS511), sets a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) as the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), sets the guidance display start wait flag (step 004SGS513), terminates the demo performance control process, and returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the system is waiting for the demo movie to start, it is determined whether or not termination condition E2 has been met, i.e., whether or not a starting prize has been awarded (step 004SGS514). Whether or not termination condition E2 has been met is determined by whether or not the starting prize award command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the starting prize award command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that termination condition E2 is met, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that termination condition E2 is not met, then it is determined whether termination condition E3 is met, i.e., whether the touch ring 004SG035 is ON or OFF (step 004SGS515). Whether termination condition E3 is met or OFF is determined by whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035, which is specified by the frame state display specification command, has changed from OFF to ON.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that termination condition E3 is met, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that termination condition E3 is not met, then it is determined whether termination condition E4 is met, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS517). Whether termination condition E4 is met is determined by whether the control of the menu display started in the previous menu display process in step 80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that termination condition E4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that termination condition E4 is not met, the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is deducted by 1 (step 004SGS523), and it is determined whether or not the system is waiting for the guidance display to start (step 004SGS524). Whether or not the system is waiting for the guidance display to start is determined by whether or not the guidance display start wait flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the system is waiting for the guidance display to start, the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is deducted by 1 (step 004SGS525), and it is determined whether the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is 0 or not, that is, whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the guidance display start waiting timer began counting (step 004SGS526).

If, in step 004SGS526, it is determined that the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is 0, the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS527), the guidance display is started (step 004SGS528), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the guidance display is not waiting to start, or if it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is not 0, then it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is 0 or not, that is, whether a specified time (60 seconds, 90 seconds, or 120 seconds) has elapsed since the start of timing by the demo movie start waiting timer (step 004SGS529).

If, in step 004SGS529, it is determined that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is not 0, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if, in step 004SGS529, it is determined that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS530), the demo movie execution flag is set (step 004SGS531), a timer value equivalent to approximately 55 seconds (27500) is set as the demo movie timer value for measuring the time until the demo movie display ends (step 004SGS532), the demo movie display is started (step 004SGS533), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is in progress, it is determined whether any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 have been met, i.e., whether a start-up prize has been awarded, the touch ring 004SG035 has been turned on, or the menu display has started (step 004SGS534).

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that none of the termination conditions E2 to E4 are met, the timer value of the demo movie timer is deducted by 1 (step 004SGS535), and it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0 or not, that is, whether 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of timing by the demo movie timer (step 004SGS536).

If step 004SGS536 determines that the timer value of the demo movie timer is not 0, the demo performance control process terminates and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if step 004SGS536 determines that the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS537), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS538), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) (step 004SGS539), the guidance display starts (step 004SGS540), the demo performance control process terminates, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 have been met, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS541), the timer value of the demo movie timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS542), the demo movie display is terminated (step 004SGS543), and it is determined whether or not termination condition E3 has been met, i.e., whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS544).

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that termination condition E3 is not met, then it is determined whether termination condition E4 is met, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS545).

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 is not met, i.e., termination condition E2 is met, the demo performance control process terminates and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that termination condition E3 has been met, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 has been met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is being displayed, it is determined whether or not termination condition 2 has been met, i.e., whether or not a starting prize has been awarded (step 004SGS546).

If, in step 004SGS546, it is determined that termination condition 2 is met, i.e., the menu display ends due to a starting prize, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS547), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that termination condition 2 is not met, it is determined whether the menu display has finished (step 004SGS548). Whether the menu display has finished is determined by whether the control of the menu display was completed in the previous step S80 menu display process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has not finished, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has finished, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS549), a timer value equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (60000) is set as the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) is set as the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is ON, it is determined whether or not termination condition 2 has been met, i.e., whether or not a starting prize has been awarded (step 004SGS550).

If it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 has been met, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 has not been met, it is determined whether termination condition 4 has been met, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS551).

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is not met, it is determined whether the touch ring 004SG035 is off or not (step 004SGS552). Whether the touch ring 004SG035 is off or not is determined by whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 has changed from on to off due to the frame state display specification command.

If, during step 004SGS552, it is determined that the touch ring 004SG035 is off, the touch ring on flag is cleared (step 004SGS553), a timer value equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (60000) is set as the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) is set as the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 has been met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

(Type of performance mode)
Next, the types of performance modes will be explained based on Figure 31. Figure 31 shows the configurations of the first performance mode (A1) and (A2), the second performance mode (B1) and (B2), and the third performance mode (C1) and (C2).

As shown in Figure 31(A1), the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in a low-base state (for low-base state) consist of: a number display section 004SG051 consisting of a circular number base section and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section; a character display section 004SG052 displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display section 004SG051; an information display section 004SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base section and information about the characters (for example, the character's name in this embodiment) displayed on the front of the information base section; and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG054 that surrounds the number display section 004SG051, the character display section 004SG052, and the information display section 004SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 004SG053 is shown to display the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various other information related to the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052 (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 31(B1) and (C1), the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in the high base state (for the high base state) consist of a number display section 004SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9", and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG064 that surrounds the number display section 004SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low base state.

Furthermore, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts, as well as a small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbols consist of the numbers "0" through "9" displayed in the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In this embodiment, while the numbers of the decorative symbols and the small symbols correspond, it is not necessarily required that all the numbers of both symbols correspond. For example, the numbers of the small symbols may be fewer than the numbers "0" through "9" of the decorative symbols, ranging from "1" to "5," or they may be different symbols or figures from the numbers of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Figure 31, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: a first presentation mode (see Figures 31(A1) and (A2)), a second presentation mode (see Figures 31(B1) and (B2)), and a third presentation mode (see Figures 31(C1) and (C2)). The first presentation mode is an execution mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability, low base state. The second presentation mode is an execution mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability, high base state, and the third presentation mode is an execution mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability, high base state.

As shown in Figure 31(A1), in the first performance mode, decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first background display 004SG081, which depicts a daytime city scene, is displayed as the background for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 31(A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative symbol is displayed in the frame from the top edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards, then moves linearly downwards and is displayed out of the frame from the bottom edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards. Also, when the preceding decorative symbol that is displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" symbol) passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative symbol (for example, the "4" symbol) is displayed in the frame and moves downwards. In other words, when the preceding "3" symbol is passing the stopping position, the preceding "2" symbol and the following "4" symbol are not visible, but after the preceding "3" symbol has passed the stopping position, the preceding "3" symbol and the following "4" symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," and so on, returning to "0" after "9," and the display of "0" through "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 screen displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and small symbols. The special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F located at the bottom of the image display device 5 screen display the first reserved display 004SG101 and the second reserved display 004SG102, which correspond to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 004SG103, which corresponds to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, small symbols, the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in all performance modes, and therefore their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in Figure 31(B1), in the second performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second background display 004SG082, which depicts a city scene in the evening, is displayed as the background for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 31(B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by rotation in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, rotating around a rotation axis that faces vertically.

For example, in the second display mode, the decorative pattern has a first face and a second face opposite the first face. The first face displays the preceding decorative pattern (for example, the "3" pattern). On the other hand, when the first face is facing forward, it is not possible to determine whether the subsequent decorative pattern (for example, the "4" pattern) is displayed on the second face. In other words, because the base display section 004SG064 has low transparency (is opaque), it is not possible to see through the decorative pattern displayed on the second face from the front (to see it through the decorative pattern from the front).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns are rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in a plan view). By rotating in the order of the first face, second face, first face, second face, and so on, the numbers increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," and so on, returning to "0" after "9," and the display of "0" through "9" is repeated. In other words, the rotation of the decorative patterns is performed by looping the display of the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, the upper right portion of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "Right-Hand Shooting" to inform the player to shoot to the right. The lower left portion of the image display device 5 screen displays a time-saving control remaining display 004SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining," where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the number of times the time-saving control will be executed.

As shown in Figure 31(C1), in the third performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the third background display 004SG083, which depicts a night city scene, is displayed as the background for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 31(C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative symbol is displayed in the frame from the top edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards, then moves linearly downwards and is displayed out of the frame from the bottom edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards. Also, when the preceding decorative symbol that is displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" symbol) passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative symbol (for example, the "4" symbol) is displayed in the frame and moves downwards. In other words, when the preceding "3" symbol is passing the stopping position, the preceding "2" symbol and the following "4" symbol are not visible, but after the preceding "3" symbol has passed the stopping position, the preceding "3" symbol and the following "4" symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," and so on, returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increment from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the upper right corner of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "Right-Hand Shooting" to inform the player to shoot to the right.

Furthermore, the decorative patterns and sub-patterns have different variable display modes. For example, during the period when decorative patterns are displayed by high-speed scrolling, a predetermined period of time is required for a single decorative pattern to be displayed from the top edge of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R until it is displayed from the bottom edge. In other words, a predetermined period of time is required for a single decorative pattern to be displayed and for that decorative pattern display to end. On the other hand, during the predetermined period, the sub-patterns of losing combinations are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (for example, five times).

Furthermore, in the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in the first and third performance modes, and the rotating display in the second performance mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed at a constant speed from the start to the stop of the variable display.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is shown as an example of a configuration in which it can execute a first performance mode, a second performance mode, and a third performance mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute four or more types of performance modes. In particular, it may be possible to execute multiple types of performance modes corresponding to a single game state (for example, a low probability, low base state).

(Examples of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, examples of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be explained based on Figures 32 to 35. Figure 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first performance mode. Figure 33 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Figure 32. Figure 34 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third performance mode. Figure 35 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first performance mode (A) and the second and third performance modes (B).

Furthermore, in the following diagrams representing the display screen of the image display device 5, lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without labels do not represent images displayed on the screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in the first performance mode)
First, we will explain, based on Figures 32 and 33, examples of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the first performance mode.

Figure 32(A) shows the state in the first performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still being displayed variably. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 004SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 004SG101 (first hold memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 32(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 32(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the variation start action of the decorative symbols begins in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area. Furthermore, a shift display is started in which the two first held displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 004SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 004SG103 (see Figure 32(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins to move horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 32(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 32(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 004SG110 displayed in Figure 32(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins.

As shown in Figure 32(E), when the shift display, in which the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, moves to the active display area 5F, the action (character reversal) of the decorative symbol displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L ends and the upward action begins. Once the upward movement is complete, as shown in Figure 32(F), downward movement begins and scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 32(F), the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R completes its (character inversion) and begins its upward movement. Once the upward movement is complete, as shown in Figure 32(G), it begins to move downward and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 32(G), the action of the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C (character reversal movement) ends and the upward movement begins. Once the upward movement is complete, as shown in Figure 32(H), the downward movement begins and scrolling display starts.

Thus, as the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins and the variable display of the small symbols begins, the variable display of the ornamental symbols that are currently displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol display area begins in that order. However, the scrolling display of the ornamental symbols displayed in ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 004SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, from the start of the shift display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols do not scroll, a variation start action is performed in which the characters reverse, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has started. The operation mode of the variation start action can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, when scrolling display begins, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increase in scrolling speed (movement speed) from low to medium to high speed. Simultaneously, the transparency of the images gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes approximately 90%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, as shown in Figures 32(F) and (G), starts at low speed immediately after the variable display begins, progresses through medium speed as shown in Figure 32(H), and then becomes high speed as shown in Figures 33(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transparency also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern at high speeds. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 32(G) to 33(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5R are initially displayed at a low speed, then at a medium speed, and finally at a high speed, while a fade-out display is performed where the transparency increases with acceleration.

(Example of variable display operation in the third performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the third performance mode will be explained based on Figure 34.

Figure 34(A) shows the state in the third performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still in variable display mode. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 004SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 004SG101 (first hold memory count "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 are displayed superimposed on the decorative symbols, on a higher layer (in front of them). (See Figure 34(A))

Next, as shown in Figure 34(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 34(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the variable display of the small symbols begins. However, because the base state is high, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 34(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display begins, in which the two first held displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 004SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 004SG103 (see Figure 34(C)). Furthermore, the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins moving horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 34(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 34(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 004SG110 displayed in Figure 34(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started.

As shown in Figure 34(C), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 004SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, is completed, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 34(D)). In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously.

Thus, when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols that are stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously. However, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 004SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display has ended) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, when scrolling begins, the scroll speed (movement speed) of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increases from low speed to medium speed to high speed. In proportion to the increase in display speed, the transparency of the image also gradually increases, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes approximately 90%. For example, as shown in Figures 34(E) and 34(F), the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are initially displayed at low speed, then progress to medium speed as shown in Figure 34(G), and finally to high speed as shown in Figure 34(H). Since the transparency also increases with increasing speed, at high speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually distinguish each decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the decorative pattern is set to a first value (0%) when the pattern is stationary, and gradually increases when variable display starts, finally reaching a second value (90%) during high-speed scrolling display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the first value is the minimum value of the transparency, and should be any value at which the decorative pattern is clearly visible. For example, if the pattern is most clearly displayed when the transparency is 5%, the first value may be set to 5% instead of 0%. Similarly, the second value is the maximum value of the transparency, and should be any value at which the decorative pattern is almost invisible. For example, if the pattern is almost invisible when the transparency is 100%, the second value may be set to 100% instead of 90%. In short, the first and second values can be changed in various ways.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the CPU 120 for performance control is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs the action to start the variation of the decorative symbols and prevents the scrolling display of the decorative symbols from starting until the shift display that switches the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F as the active display 004SG103 is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed, switching the corresponding hold display to an active display. Furthermore, while the shift display is active, a variation start action is performed, causing the decorative symbols to operate in a manner different from the moving display. This allows for effective use of the time required for the shift display. Additionally, since the variation start action is performed when the shift display is active in a high-base state (which is more advantageous than a low-base state), it enhances the excitement of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the high-base state.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 during the performance control process processing in step S76. It is possible to perform a common shift display whether the variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern specification command) or a second type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a reach variable pattern specification command). Therefore, even when variable displays are executed based on different types of variable display patterns, a common shift display is performed, thus reducing the number of shift display patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs a change start action for the decorative symbols and does not start the scrolling display of the decorative symbols until the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is switched to display as an active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in a high base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it does not perform a change start action for the decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a high base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it may perform a change start action for the decorative symbols and not start the scrolling display of the decorative symbols until the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is switched to display as an active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed, switching the corresponding hold display to an active display. Furthermore, while the shift display is active, a variation start action is performed, causing the decorative symbols to operate in a manner different from the moving display. This allows for effective use of the time required for the shift display. Additionally, since the variation start action is performed when the shift display is active in a high-base state (which is more advantageous than a low-base state), it enhances the excitement of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the high-base state.

Furthermore, even in a high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 during the performance control process processing in step S76. Since it is possible to perform a common shift display whether the variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern specification command) or a second type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a reach variable pattern specification command), a common shift display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns, thus reducing the number of shift display patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is illustrated in which, after the shift display that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display upon the start of the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. As long as the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins after the shift display that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display upon the start of the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin while the shift display is in operation.

(Operational behavior of each part when variable display starts)
As shown in Figure 35(A), in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved symbols is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach failure variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, after which the scroll display begins. In addition, a shift display of the reserved symbols is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins.

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decelerate and become slow-moving displays. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period is the same for all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the central decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in that order, temporarily stopping. During the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After the variable display ends and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the loop action for the decorative symbols ends and they are displayed in a stopped state. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

Next, as shown in Figure 35(B), in the second and third performance modes, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-3 is executed, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins. Simultaneously, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin rotating or scrolling without any variation start action. Furthermore, a shift display of the hold display is performed, and after this shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins.

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping time approaches for decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns in these areas simultaneously and gradually decelerate, becoming slow-speed displays. Simultaneously, the transparency (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all stop and are displayed simultaneously. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action seen in the first and second performance modes are not executed; the variable display simply ends, and the decorative symbols, along with the smaller symbols, stop and are displayed. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling is performed in the first performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when rotation display is performed in the second performance mode or when scrolling display is performed in the third performance mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21. See Figures 35(A) and (B)).

Furthermore, in the first performance mode, regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated, the appearance will be as shown in Figure 35(A). Similarly, in the second and third performance modes, regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated, the appearance will be as shown in Figure 35(B).

(Example of SP Reach animation operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP Reach演出 (SP reach animation) will be explained based on Figures 36 and 37. Figure 36 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP Reach animation in a low base state. Figure 37 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP Reach animation in a high base state. Note that Figure 37 explains an example of the operation of the reach animation in the third animation mode, but it is also possible to execute a similar reach animation in the second animation mode, or to execute a different reach animation.

As shown in Figure 36(A), when a variable display based on a super reach variation pattern is initiated in a low base state, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on the variable display result, whether to execute a step-up performance in which multiple characters appear in stages, and whether to display a specific step-up performance display pattern (see Figure 36(B)) in which the background display becomes rainbow-colored at a predetermined step in the step-up performance, indicating a confirmed jackpot. If the execution of the step-up performance and the display of the specific step-up performance display pattern are decided, the step-up performance is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, and the specific step-up performance display pattern is displayed at the predetermined step (see Figure 36(B)). If it is decided not to execute the step-up performance, or if it is decided to execute the step-up performance but the display of the specific step-up performance display pattern is not decided, a step-up performance display pattern without a rainbow background is displayed.

Next, after the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined reach pattern, initiating the reach animation (see Figure 36(C)). At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode changes to the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070, which indicates the type of SP reach performance, is displayed, notifying the reach title, and the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as a notification performance to indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 36(D)). In the SP reach performance, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081, the normal background display, and represents space corresponding to the SP reach performance (see Figures 36(E) and (F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with different modes depending on the type of SP reach performance.

Next, from the moment the battle concludes until a predetermined valid operation period has elapsed, the operation prompt display 004SG071, consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to press the push button 31B, and a button display 004SG072, which mimics the push button 31B, are displayed to initiate the operation (see Figure 36(G)).

Then, when an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation validity period, or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period expires, the operation prompt display 004SG071 and the button display 004SG072 disappear, and the process ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color, the movable body 32 descends from the origin position to the performance position, an effect display 004SG073 emphasizing the movable body 32 is displayed, and a predetermined performance sound effect is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 36(H)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the allied character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP Reach演出 is displayed as the background display. After a combination of winning symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed (see Figure 36(I)), as the SP Reach演出 ends, the fourth background display 004SG084 disappears and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed. While the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, the combination of winning symbols (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed, after which the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed, and the winning result is derived and displayed (see Figure 36(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32 does not descend from the origin position to the performance position. Instead, the result notification display 004SG078, indicating that the ally character lost the battle against the enemy character, is displayed (see Figure 36(K)). Then, in the notification performance, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background display, a combination of symbols that is not a winning combination (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 36(L)).

Then, as shown in Figure 36(M), upon the end of the notification animation (SP Reach animation), the fourth background display 004SG084 disappears and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed. While the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that results in a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the loss result is derived and displayed (see Figure 36(M)).

Next, as shown in Figure 37(A), when a variable display based on a super reach variation pattern is initiated in a high base state, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on the variable display result, whether or not to display a specific cut-in performance display pattern (see Figure 37(D)) in which a specific character appears and the background display becomes a rainbow pattern indicating a confirmed jackpot, and stores the determination result.

Then, after the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined reach pattern, initiating the reach animation (see Figure 37(B)). At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode changes to the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070, which indicates the type of SP reach performance, is displayed, notifying the reach title. Then, the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as a notification performance to indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 37(C)).

Here, if a specific cut-in animation display pattern is determined at the start of the variable display, the reach title display 004SG070 will be displayed, and then the cut-in animation will begin with the specific cut-in animation display pattern (see Figure 37(D)). If it is determined that the cut-in animation will not be performed, or if it is determined that the cut-in animation will be performed but the display of the specific cut-in animation pattern is not determined, a cut-in display with a background color other than rainbow will be displayed.

Furthermore, during the SP Reach演出 (SP Reach演出), a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081 (normal background display) and represents space corresponding to the SP Reach演出 (see Figures 37(E) and 37(F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with different characteristics depending on the type of SP Reach演出.

Furthermore, the flow shown in Figures 37(G) to (M) is almost identical to that in Figures 36(G) to (M), except for the third background display 004SG083 for high base in Figures 37(J) and (M). Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute a specific step-up performance with a rainbow background in a low base state (see Figure 36(B)) and a specific cut-in performance including a rainbow background in a high base state (see Figure 37(D)) as a specific performance to announce a confirmed jackpot. Although the backgrounds for the specific step-up performance and the specific cut-in performance are both rainbow-colored, their display patterns differ; however, the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and side lamps are the same. In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the illumination of the panel lamps and side lamps based on a common brightness data table (common table), thus reducing the data capacity required for illumination.

(Customer waiting demo performance [Demo movie display])
Next, the customer waiting demo presentation will be explained based on Figures 38 to 44. Figure 38 shows (A) the start and end conditions for the demo movie display, and (B) the configuration of the demo movie display. Figure 39 shows an example of the operation of each part during the demo movie display. Figure 40 is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demo presentation. Figure 41 shows an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Figure 42 shows an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Figure 43 shows an example of the display of (A) the first scene (company name), (B) the fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) the fourth scene (warning 2). Figure 44 is a diagram comparing the display patterns of the first scene (company name), the fourth scenes (warning 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small symbols.

The "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect used by the effect control CPU 120 to notify the player that the game is in a waiting state, meaning it is not currently in operation (e.g., variable display, jackpot game, or minor jackpot game). This is primarily achieved by displaying a demo movie (see Figures 41 and 42) on the image display device 5.

The demo movie display, which shows a different background than the one displayed during gameplay, is intended to inform players that a machine is vacant and not currently being played. It consists of scenes such as a company name indicating the company associated with the machine, a machine introduction scene explaining the story, characters, effects, and specifications of the pachinko machine, a machine introduction scene displaying the title and subtitle of the pachinko machine, and a warning scene before gameplay, outlining important points to remember while playing. Furthermore, the demo movie display can be modified in various ways; for example, the machine introduction scene may include explanations of effects and machine specifications.

As shown in Figures 38(A) to 40, the "customer waiting demo performance" (hereinafter also referred to as demo movie display or demonstration display) is started when the performance control CPU 120 determines that any of the following start conditions S1 to S6 have been met. Specifically, start condition S1 is met when one hour (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the customer waiting demo specification command output from the main board 11 upon the end of the variable display; start condition S2 is met when two hours (for example, 60 seconds) have elapsed since receiving the power-on specification command output from the main board 11 due to power-on accompanied by initialization; and start condition S3 is met when three hours (for example, 90 seconds) have elapsed since receiving the power-up recovery specification command output from the main board 11 due to power-on without initialization. The conditions are met as follows: Start condition S4 is met when the fourth hour (e.g., 120 seconds) has elapsed since the touch sensor (touch ring 004SG035) turned off; Start condition S5 is met when the fifth hour (e.g., 120 seconds) has elapsed since the menu screen display ended; and Start condition S6 is met when the sixth hour (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display, which has gone through conditions S1 to S5, ended (from the second week onwards, similar to condition S6, the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the customer waiting demo performance ends).

Furthermore, the "demo movie display" terminates when the performance control CPU 120 determines that any of the following termination conditions E1 to E4 have been met. Specifically, termination condition E1 is met when the end time (e.g., 55 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display started; termination condition E2 is met when a start-up win occurs; termination condition E3 is met when the touch ring 004SG035 is detected as being ON; and termination condition E4 is met when the menu screen display start operation is performed.

Furthermore, even when the demo movie is not being displayed, if the above termination conditions E2 to E4 are met while the timer is being set for the 1st to 6th hours during the waiting period for the above start conditions to be met (demo movie start waiting period), the timer will be stopped. Subsequently, when the above start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are met, the timer will be reset (re-set).

Furthermore, during the waiting period for the demo movie to start, the demo movie display is not shown. However, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed on the various background displays as guidance for adjusting the effects (see Figures 47 (A4) and 133).

Furthermore, the guidance displays for adjusting the effects may include not only menu guidance displays 004SG401, which guides the operation of push button 31B to display a menu screen that allows for the customization and reset of various effects functions such as the vibration function, V-flash function, auto button function, and effects mode provided on push button 31B, and volume/brightness guidance displays 004SG402, which guides the operation of buttons for adjusting volume and brightness, but also guidance displays for adjusting effects functions other than those mentioned above.

Furthermore, if termination condition E3 is met, termination condition E2 is almost never met. In other words, since the ball-hitting handle 30 must be operated for a starting prize to occur, termination condition E3 is generally met before termination condition E2. However, in the following irregular cases, termination condition E2 may be met without termination condition E3 being met.

Irregular Case 1: If a "grape" (a ball jam between the pins) occurs, the player calls a staff member. However, if the demo movie starts playing before the staff member arrives, and then the grape is cleared, resulting in a starting win, the demo movie ends without the player operating the ball-shooting handle 30. Therefore, termination condition E2 is met instead of termination condition E3.

Irregular Case 2: If a malfunction occurs in CPU 103 or the CPU 120 for performance control, and the CPU 120 for performance control cannot confirm the touch sensor's ON state, a starting win may occur even though the touch sensor's ON state cannot be confirmed. Therefore, termination condition E2 is met instead of termination condition E3.

Furthermore, termination condition E3, which is met when the touch sensor is on, does not necessarily need to be set as a termination condition. In such cases, the demo movie display will not end with steering wheel operation alone; rather, termination condition E2 will be met and the demo movie display will end when a starting prize is awarded.

As shown in Figure 38(B), the demo movie display consists of four scenes: Scene 1 to Scene 4. Specifically, Scene 1 is the "Company Name" part (Company Name Part), which displays the names and slogans of the companies involved in the development, manufacturing, and sales of the product (see Figures 41(A) and 41(B)).

The second scene consists of "Machine Introduction 1" to "Machine Introduction 3" parts (Machine Introduction 1 to 3 parts) which introduce the story of the performances that take place in the pachinko game machine. In "Machine Introduction 1" part (Machine Introduction 1 part), the allied characters and their names that appear in the performance are displayed (see Figures 41 (C) to (F)). In "Machine Introduction 2-1" part (Machine Introduction 2-1 part), the confrontation scene between the allied characters and enemy characters and the narration text are displayed (see Figures 41 (G) and (H)). In "Machine Introduction 2-2" part (Machine Introduction 2-2 part), the confrontation scene between the allied characters and enemy characters and the narration text are displayed (see Figures 41 (J) and (K)). In "Machine Introduction 2-3" part (Machine Introduction 2-3 part), the confrontation scene between the allied characters and enemy characters and the narration text are displayed (see Figures 42 (M) to (O)). In the "Model Introduction 3-1" section, between the "Model Introduction 2-1" section and the "Model Introduction 2-2" section, the cut-in displays of allied characters are shown without text (see Figure 42(I)). Similarly, in the "Model Introduction 3-2" section, between the "Model Introduction 2-2" section and the "Model Introduction 2-3" section, the cut-in displays of allied characters are shown without text (see Figure 42(L)).

The third scene consists of a "Machine Name Main Title" section (Main Title Section) and a "Machine Subtitle" section (Subtitle Sections 1 and 2), which display the main title of the pachinko machine (see Figures 42(P) to (V)). The "Machine Main Title" section displays the main title, "FEVER POWERRFUL," while the "Machine Subtitle" section displays the subtitle, "II/All Together Ver."

Furthermore, the "Main Title Name" is the main theme of the pachinko machine 1, a concise expression of its theme. The "Subtitle Name" is the secondary title of the pachinko machine 1, and can be supplementary information added to the main title (for example, "II" indicating it's the second installment, or the heading "All Together Ver."). The content can be changed in various ways.

The fourth scene consists of a "Warning 1" part (Warning 1 Part) and a "Warning 2" part (Warning 2 Part) that provide warnings to the player (see Figures 42 (W) to (X)). Specifically, "Warning 1" part displays warnings to prevent excessive gaming, while "Warning 2" part displays warnings to prevent physical accidents caused by the pachinko machine.

As shown in Figure 39, the demo movie display shows various demo images in the order of the first scene, second scene, third scene, and fourth scene after the start condition is met. The display period tb2a for the first scene is approximately 10 seconds (tb2a = 10 seconds), the display period tb2b for the second scene is approximately 30 seconds (tb2b = 30 seconds), the display period tb2c for the third scene is approximately 10 seconds (tb2c = 10 seconds), and the display period tb2d for the fourth scene is approximately 10 seconds (tb2d = 5 seconds), so the display period tb for one demo movie display is approximately 55 seconds (tb2 = 55 seconds). Then, as shown in Figure 40, if the first demo movie display ends without the termination conditions E2 to E4 being met during the display of the demo movie, that is, if the first demo movie display which started with the fulfillment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5 ends with termination condition E1, the system proceeds to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Subsequently, if 30 seconds (6 hours) have elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is considered met, and the demo movie display starts again. From this point onward, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are met.

During the period when the demo movie is displayed on the image display device 5, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, and the display of the reserved memory count and small symbols is maintained (see Figures 41 and 42). In this embodiment, the reserved memory count and small symbols are shown while the demo movie is displayed; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved memory count and small symbols may be hidden while the demo movie is displayed.

Furthermore, during the period when the demo movie is displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the illumination of the panel lamps (attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f) and frame lamps (main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b) based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo), while controlling the illumination of the button lamp 9e based on the brightness data table for white illumination (default) that does not correspond to the demo movie display (lamp data table described later: button white illumination). Also, while background music is not output from speakers 8L and 8R, music for the demo movie display may be output.

The brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (the lamp data table described later: customer waiting demonstration) consists of multiple brightness data tables (grandchild tables described later).

For details, the main lamp 9a, which constitutes the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (the lamp data table described later: customer waiting demonstration), has brightness data tables corresponding to the period of the company name section, the period of the model introduction section 1 to the period of model introduction sections 2-3, the period of the main title section, the period of subtitle section 1, the period of subtitle section 2, and the period of warning section 1 to the period of warning section 2. Light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table for each period.

Furthermore, the system includes luminance data tables (grandchild tables, described later) for the side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, and decorative lamps 9f that constitute the luminance data tables for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data tables, described later: customer waiting demonstrations). These tables correspond to the periods of the company name section, the model introduction 1 section, the model introduction 2-1 section, the model introduction 3-1 section, the model introduction 2-2 section, the model introduction 3-2 section, the model introduction 2-3 section, the main title section, the subtitle section 1, the subtitle section 2, and the warning section 1 to warning section 2. Light emission control is performed based on the corresponding luminance data table for each period.

Furthermore, the control using the luminance data table during the period when the demo movie is displayed will be described in detail later.

(Example of demo movie display operation)
Next, we will explain the operation examples of the demo movie display based on Figures 41, 42, and 129 to 131. Figure 129 shows examples of the operation of text display and illumination patterns in each scene, from (A1) to (A4). Figure 130 shows examples of the operation of the first scene (A), the third scene (B), and the fourth scene (C). Figure 131 is a comparison table showing the text animation display.

Furthermore, an example of the expression used to indicate the display method in the following explanation is provided.
"Fade-out display" increases the transparency of the displayed image over time, while "fade-in display" decreases the transparency of the displayed image over time.

"Animated display" refers to a dynamic display (video display) that creates movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame earlier. This change in visibility is achieved by altering at least one of the following: position, size, color, or transparency, compared to the image one frame earlier. In other words, "animated display" includes not only displays involving image displacement, such as "moving display," "rotating display," "enlarging display," "shrinking display," "frame-in display," and "frame-out display," but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display," where the display characteristics, such as color tone, change. In this embodiment, the number of still images (frames) displayed in one second of video is 30, meaning the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of "animated display." It refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) where the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous frame, resulting in no change in the display format whatsoever.

Furthermore, an example of an expression used to describe the light emission pattern in the following explanation will be provided.
"Wave lighting" is a light emission pattern that sequentially changes the brightness of the brightness data. Compared to the flashes described below, the change in brightness between each data point is smaller. For example, the brightness of the lamp increases at a predetermined interval, the color changes at a predetermined interval, or a predetermined color moves within the light emission area. It is also used when simply keeping the lamp lit continuously would be a dull element of the effect, or when you want to emphasize the image display device 5 or other elements more than the lamp, as in the flashes described below, and you want the lamp to not stand out too much.

"Flash" is a light emission pattern that alternates between high-luminance data and low-luminance data (including off). By varying the intensity of the light, it can significantly alter the brightness perceived by the player, and is a light emission pattern used for emphasis.

The "Rainbow" pattern is commonly used when the display shown in Figure 36(B) is executed in a low base state, and when the effect shown in Figure 37(D) is executed in a high base state. In this embodiment, a rainbow wave pattern is used, which creates a wave-like illumination by sequentially changing the brightness data of seven colors. However, a rainbow flash pattern may also be used, where low-brightness (including off) brightness data is alternately used between the brightness data while sequentially changing the brightness data of seven colors.

As shown in Figures 41(A) and (B), when the conditions for starting the demo movie display are met, the display of the first scene begins. Note that, as will be described later, depending on the start conditions, a transition display may be shown before the display of the first scene begins. In the first scene, a background display for the company name 004SG301 consisting of white text is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302, mainly consisting of a blue company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B, is displayed in the center of the screen in a "small" size. Then, it gradually enlarges while decreasing transparency and fades in, making it appear as if the company name display 004SG302 is moving from the back to the front of the display screen. The display area 5S in the upper left of the display screen remains showing the number of reserved symbols and small symbols. In this way, even when the decorative symbols are not displayed, the small symbols are still displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

Furthermore, in the first scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) change their illumination pattern (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302. For example, as the transmittance of the company name display 004SG302 decreases, the brightness of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may increase or their color may change.

To explain in detail using Figure 130(A), first, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed in a "small" size in the center of the screen. Then, for approximately 3 seconds, it gradually enlarges while fading in and decreasing in transparency (see Figure 130(A1)). When it reaches the designated position, a bounce display is shown, where the company name display 004SG302 appears to have hit a wall and bounced back before reappearing in the designated position (see Figure 130(A2)). Finally, it remains statically displayed in the designated position in the center of the screen for approximately 4 seconds (see Figure 130(A3)), and then fades out for 1 second (see Figure 130(A4)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129 (A1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash white when the company name display 004SG302 is displayed, and then illuminate in white. This white flash at the start of the demo movie display emphasizes the start of the company name display 004SG302 display. Then, the brightness increases in conjunction with the company name display 004SG302 fading in while expanding (white fade-in illumination), flashes white in conjunction with the bounding display of the company name display 004SG302, then illuminates in white, and finally decreases in conjunction with the fade-out display (white fade-out illumination).

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 1" part of the second scene begins to display, the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the text displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D showing the names of each character will sequentially fade in (animate display), and the effect display 004SG502 will be displayed in the background (see Figures 41(C) to (F)). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129(A2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will light up in the color corresponding to each character before lighting up white, in accordance with the appearance of each character and the fade-in display of their names.

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 2-1" part of the second scene begins to display, the enemy character 004SG510A, which appears in various scenes, is displayed in animation, and the text "The enemy is rampaging through the city!" 004SG511A fades in (animates) (see Figures 41(G) and (H)). Then, when the "Machine Introduction 3-1" part begins to display, the background display 004SG503 showing the city and the ally character 004SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in display showing the ally character flying through the city to the scene is shown (see Figure 41(I)).

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 2-2" section of the second scene begins to display again, the allied character 004SG500A, the enemy character 004SG510A, and the text display 004SG511B, which reads "Protect the city from the enemy!", are faded in (animated display) (see Figures 41(J) and (K)). Then, when the "Machine Introduction 3-2" section begins to display, the allied character 004SG500A is enlarged, and a cut-in display with the effect display 004SG504 in the background is shown (see Figure 41(L)).

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 2-3" section of the second scene begins to display again, an image of allied character 004SG500A and enemy character 004SG510A fighting, along with the text "Don't lose!" (004SG511C), fades in (animates) (see Figures 42(M) to (N)). Afterward, all allied characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D, along with the text "All together!" (004SG511D), fade in (animates) (see Figure 42(O)).

Furthermore, while the animations for the allied characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A in the second scene involve actions such as enlarging, shrinking, and fighting, the various text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D and 004SG511A-004SG511D use animations that result in less noticeable changes in visibility compared to the animated displays of the allied characters 004SG500A-004SG500D.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129 (A2), in the second scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash green when "Model Introduction 3-1" and "Model Introduction 3-2" are displayed, but basically they light up in a white wave pattern. The lighting pattern (e.g., on, flashing, off, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or never) changes in conjunction with the animation display (fade-in display) of various character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D and 004SG511A to 004SG511D. Basically, the lighting pattern (e.g., on, flashing, off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes in conjunction with the dynamic animation display of friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and enemy characters 004SG510A, such as running, jumping, and punching.

Specifically, for example, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may light up, flash, or change color in accordance with the movements of allied characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A, such as running, jumping, or punching.

In the second scene, the main lamp 9a is controlled to be off, but the main lamp 9a may also be made to change its illumination pattern, similar to the other panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Next, when the third scene begins to display, the effect display 004SG505 appears in the background, and the main title name display 004SG520A, consisting of the words "FEVER POWERFUL" and a cloud-shaped background, is displayed in the center of the display screen (default display position) in a "small" size. Then, it gradually enlarges while decreasing its transparency and fades in (animates), making it appear as if the main title name display 004SG520A is moving from the back to the front of the display screen (see Figures 42(P) to (R)).

Next, the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, consisting of the letters "II," is displayed in "extra-large" size to the right of the model main title name display 004SG520A (the default display position). It then fades in, slightly shrinking and decreasing in transparency, and bounces in "large" size to the right of "FEVER POWERRFUL" (the default display position) (see Figures 42(S) to (T)).

Furthermore, the subtitle name display 004SG520C, consisting of the text "All Together Ver.", is displayed in "extra-large" size in the center in front of the main title name display 004SG520A (the standard display position). It then shrinks slightly and moves to the bottom of "FEVER POWERFUL" (the standard display position), bouncing back to "large" size (see Figures 42(U) to (V)).

Furthermore, in the third scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) basically light up in a rainbow (rainbow-colored) wave pattern, and the lighting pattern changes in conjunction with the animation display of the machine subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C. In particular, in the "Machine Subtitle Name" section, when the machine subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C moves and bounces to the designated display position, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash (blink).

Using Figure 130(B), the display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, consisting of the text "All Together Ver.", will be explained in detail. After being displayed in "extra-large" size in the center in front of the main title name display 004SG520A (the designated display position) (see Figure 130(B1)), it will move to the bottom of "FEVER POWERFUL" (the designated display position) while slightly shrinking over approximately 0.5 seconds, bouncing and displaying in "large" size (see Figure 130(B2)), and then remaining static at the designated display position for 0.5 seconds (see Figure 130(B3)). Subsequently, the entire model title name display 004SG520, consisting of the main title name display 004SG520A and the subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C, will gradually and slowly enlarge (animated) over approximately 1.5 seconds (see Figure 130(B4)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129 (A3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a rainbow pattern (rainbow wave illumination) when the main title name display 004SG520A is shown, and when the subtitle name display 004SG520B and subtitle name display 004SG520C are shown, they flash white in conjunction with the enlargement/reduction (animation) display, and then illuminate in a rainbow pattern (rainbow wave illumination).

Next, when the "Warning 1" part of the fourth scene begins to display, a dark green warning background display 004SG311 is shown, and the fall prevention display 004SG312 fades in (animates) in the center of the screen (see Figure 42(W)). Then, when the "Warning 2" part begins to display, the display switches to a black warning background display 004SG321, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is shown (see Figure 42(X)).

Using Figure 130(C), the display of the "Warning 1" part will be explained in detail. When the display of the "Warning 1" part of the fourth scene begins, a dark green warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 is displayed at the designated display position in the center of the screen, fading in (animated display) for 0.5 seconds (see Figures 130(C1) and (C2)). Subsequently, after the transparency of the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 becomes 0% (see Figure 130(C3)), it is displayed statically for 2 seconds (see Figure 130(C4)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 129 (A4), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not flash white in conjunction with the fade-in display of the anti-immersion indicator 004SG312 in the "Warning 1" and "Warning 2" parts, but instead continuously illuminate in a white wave pattern in the fourth scene.

Furthermore, in the fourth scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not change their illumination pattern (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the anti-immersion indicator 004SG312. Therefore, the anti-immersion indicator 004SG312 is not displayed more prominently than the company name display 004SG302, the main title name display 004SG520A, and the subtitle name displays 004SG520C and 004SG520C.

(Comparison of display methods for each scene)
Next, based on Figure 38(B), we will compare the display modes of the image display device 5 for each scene during the demo movie display, referring to Figures 41 and 42.

<Display Pattern at the Start of Text Display> In Scene 1 (Company Name), Scene 2 (Model Introduction 1 & 2), Scene 3 (Model Main Title, Model Subtitle), and Scene 4 (Warning 1), various texts are displayed with a fade-in (animated) effect. However, in Scene 2 (Model Introduction 3) and Scene 4 (Warning 2), various texts are not displayed with a fade-in (animated) effect.

<Text Animation Display (Degree of Visibility Change)> In Scene 1 (Company Name) and Scene 3 (Main Title Name, Subtitle Name), the animation display shows a "large" degree of visibility change. In Scene 2 (Model Introduction 1, 2), the animation display shows a "medium" degree of visibility change. In Scene 2 (Model Introduction 3) and Scene 4 (Warning 1), the animation display shows a "small" degree of visibility change. However, in Scene 2 (Model Introduction 3) and Scene 4 (Warning 2), the text display is not animated.

<Text Size> In Scene 1 (Company Name) and Scene 3 (Main Model Title), the text is initially displayed in "Small" size before being enlarged to "Large" size. In Scene 4 (Warning 1 & 2), the text is initially displayed in a consistent "Small" or "Medium" size. Furthermore, in Scene 2 (Model Introduction 1 & 2), the text is displayed in "Medium" size, and in Scene 3 (Model Subtitle), the subtitle text is initially displayed in "Extra Large" size before being reduced to "Large" size.

<Background Color> In the first scene (company name), the background color is white; in the second scene (model introductions 1-3), the background color is a color corresponding to the story; in the third scene (main model title, sub-model title), the background color is a color corresponding to the title; and in the fourth scene (warning 1), the warning 1 part is dark blue, and the warning 2 part is black.

Furthermore, regarding text display, for example, animations tend to be more emphasized than non-animated text; greater changes in visibility during animations result in greater emphasis than small changes in visibility; and text with multiple colors is more emphasized than text with fewer colors.

As shown in Figure 38(B), the animation of the company name display 004SG302, which consists of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B, displayed in the first scene (company name), involves the text fading in, then bouncing, and expanding in size. In contrast, the animation of the anti-collision display 004SG312, displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1), fades in, but its size remains "medium" and does not change. Therefore, the animation of the company name display 004SG302 is more emphasized than the animation of the anti-collision display 004SG312, meaning that the degree of change in the visibility of the text is greater.

Furthermore, in the third scene (main title name, subtitle name), the animation displays of the main title name 004SG520A, subtitle name 004SG520B, and 004SG520C show the text fading in to a predetermined position, and then expanding, contracting, or moving in size. In contrast, the animation display of the anti-immersion display 004SG312 shown in the fourth scene (warning 1) simply shows the text fading in to a predetermined position, and then does not expand, contract, or move in size. Therefore, the animation display of the company name 004SG302 is considered to be more emphasized than the animation display of the anti-immersion display 004SG312, meaning that the degree of change in the visibility of the text is greater.

Here, we compare the text animation displays in the first scene (company name), the third scene (main title name, subtitle name), and the fourth scene (warning 1), based on Figures 130 and 131.

As shown in Figure 131, in the first scene (company name), the company name display 004SG302 is displayed with an enlarged fade-in at the start of display (see Figure 130(A1)), bounces when it reaches the specified position (see Figure 130(A2)), and remains static after reaching the specified position (see Figure 130(A3)). In the third scene (machine main title name), the machine main title name display 004SG520A is displayed with an enlarged fade-in at the start of display, then remains static when it reaches the specified position (see Figures 42(P) to (R)), and enlarges after reaching the specified position (see Figure 130(B4)). In the third scene (model subtitle name), the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C are enlarged and then reduced at the start of display (see Figures 130 (B1) and (B2)), displayed statically at the designated position (see Figure 130 (B3)), and enlarged after the designated position (see Figure 130 (B4)). In the fourth scene (warning 1), the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 fades in at the start of display (see Figures 130 (C1) and (C2)), displayed statically at and after the designated position (see Figures 130 (C3) and (C4)).

In other words, the degree of emphasis in the display is as follows: Company Name ≥ Model Title (Main, Sub) > Warning. Warnings only use a fade-in display at the start of the display, and there is no animation at or after the designated display position, resulting in a low degree of emphasis. On the other hand, the company name uses animation at two points: at the start of the display and at the designated display position, resulting in a higher degree of emphasis than warnings. Similarly, the model title (main, sub) also uses animation at two points: at the start of the display and after the designated display position, resulting in a higher degree of emphasis than warnings.

As described above, the demo movie display includes multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text. To emphasize each piece of information—such as the company name, machine title, and warnings—dedicated animations can be used for each. Among these, emphasizing the animations for the company name and machine title compared to the warning scene (Warning 1) effectively highlights these elements, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in the third scene (main title name, subtitle name), the main title name display 004SG520A and the subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C are faded in to their designated positions, and then animated to enlarge, shrink, or move their size. In contrast, in the fourth scene (warning 1), the anti-addiction display 004SG312 is faded in to its designated position, and then displayed without any animation to enlarge, shrink, or move its size.

In this way, by adding a lingering animation to the display of the machine title, attention is drawn to the title, while by avoiding the lingering animation for warnings, the text can be read clearly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Comparison of company names and warning display styles)
Here, based on Figures 43 and 44, we compare the display patterns of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2), the number of reserved items, and the small symbols.

As shown in Figure 43(A), in the first scene (company name), the background display 004SG301 for the company name is displayed, and the company name display 004SG302, consisting of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B, is displayed in the center of the screen. The display area 5S located in the upper left of the display screen shows the number of reserved items and small symbols.

As shown in Figure 43(B), in the fourth scene (Warning 1), a warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and an anti-addiction display 004SG312 is animated and displayed in the center of the screen. The anti-addiction display 004SG312 consists of a heading display 004SG313 with the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation," and a horizontally elongated rectangular heading frame display 004SG314 that serves as the background for the heading display 004SG313.

As shown in Figure 43(C), in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG321 is switched to display, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is also displayed. The accident prevention display 004SG322 consists of a first accident prevention display 004SG322A and a second accident prevention display 004SG322B.

The first accident prevention display 004SG322A consists of an illustration 004SG323A showing a situation where a player hits their head on the protruding part at the top of the gaming machine frame 3, a heading display 004SG324A consisting of the words "Caution: Head Overhead," a detailed warning display 004SG325A consisting of the words "The top protrudes. Please be careful not to hit your head," a warning mark 004SG326A consisting of a triangular mark with an exclamation mark inside, and a attention mark display 004SG327A consisting of an "x" mark.

The second accident prevention display 004SG322B consists of an illustration 004SG323B showing a situation where a player's fingers may get caught in the gap between the stick controller 31A and the casing, a heading 004SG324B with the words "Caution: Finger Pinching," a detailed warning 004SG325B with the words "The stick is moving. Please be careful not to pinch your hands or fingers," a warning mark 004SG326B with an exclamation mark inside a triangular mark, and a attention mark 004SG327B with a downward arrow.

As shown in Figure 44, in the first scene (company name), the company slogan display 004SG302A has medium-sized text and is chromatic (blue), the company logo display 004SG302B has large-sized text and is chromatic (blue), and the background display for the company name 004SG301 is achromatic (white).

In Scene 4 (Warning 1), the text of the heading display 004SG313 is medium-sized and achromatic (white), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the warning background display 004SG311 is chromatic (light blue). Furthermore, the border of the heading frame display 004SG314 is achromatic (black).

Furthermore, the background for the text display of the heading display 004SG313 includes not only the warning background display 004SG311, which covers the entire display screen, but also the heading frame display 004SG314, which is provided on a portion of the display screen.

In Scene 4 (Warning 2), the illustration display 004SG323A is large in size and achromatic (white) in color; the text of the heading display 004SG324A is medium in size and achromatic (white); the text of the detailed warning display 004SG325A is small in size and achromatic (white); the warning mark 004SG326A is medium in size and chromatic (yellow); the attention mark display 004SG327A is small in size and chromatic (red); and the warning background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black).

Furthermore, the "Warning Marks 004SG326A and 004SG326B" are marks that assist in making headlines that draw the player's attention more prominent, while the "Attention Marks 004SG327A and 004SG327B" are marks that assist illustrations that indicate areas that players should focus on. Unlike text, these are displayed as single marks, so it is preferable that they be chromatic in color to stand out more than the achromatic headline text.

The number of reserved symbols and the small symbols are specified as "small" in size and achromatic (black) in color.

As shown in Figures 43(A) and 44, comparing the display of the company name display 004SG302 with the number of reserved items and small patterns in the first scene (company name), the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B have larger font sizes, use more display colors, and have higher saturation and brightness in their color tones compared to the number of reserved items and small patterns. Therefore, the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more prominently than the number of reserved items and small patterns.

In this embodiment, the reserved memory count and small design elements are exemplified as being achromatic (black). However, they may also be chromatic. Even in such cases, the corporate slogan display 004SG302A and the corporate logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more prominently than the reserved memory count and small design elements if they satisfy at least one of the following conditions: larger font size, more display colors used, or higher saturation and brightness.

Next, as shown in Figures 43(B), (C), and 44, comparing the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) with the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG311 is chromatic (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 which forms the background of the heading display 004SG313 is chromatic (dark blue), while the warning background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black).

Thus, by using different background colors for the warning text in Warning Part 1 and Warning Part 2, the system can increase attention when switching from Warning Part 1 to Warning Part 2, which are warnings about different issues such as preventing excessive engrossment and preventing physical accidents. As a result, it enables more effective customer waiting control.

Next, comparing the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name), the drowsiness prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1), and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), we see that the background display 004SG301 for the company name in the company name display 004SG302 is achromatic (white), while the warning background display 004SG311 in the drowsiness prevention display 004SG312 is chromatic (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the warning background display 004SG321 in the accident prevention display 004SG322 is achromatic (black).

Thus, by using different background colors for the text display in the first scene (company name) and the fourth scene (warning 1, warning 2), the visual distinction between the company name and the warnings increases attention when the display switches, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration where the background colors of the text displays for the company name background display 004SG301, the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 are all different, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It is sufficient that the background color of at least one of the text displays among the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 differs from the background color of the text display for the company name background display 004SG301.

(Comparison of lighting patterns in each scene)
Next, based on Figure 38(B), we will compare the lamp illumination patterns of each scene during the demo movie display, referring to Figures 41 and 42.

<Synchronization with Text Animation Display> In Scene 1 (Company Name), Scene 3 (Main Title Name, Subtitle Name), and Scene 4 (Warning 1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in conjunction with the text animation display (fade-in display). However, in Scene 2 (Machine Introduction 1, 2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in conjunction with the character animation display (not synchronized with the text animation display).

<Emphasis Level> In Scene 1 (Company Name) and Scene 3 (Main Title Name, Subtitle Name), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will illuminate with a "high" emphasis level. In Scene 2 (Machine Introduction 1-3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will illuminate with a "medium" emphasis level. In Scene 4 (Warning 1, 2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will illuminate with a "low" emphasis level.

"Emphasis" refers to the degree of emphasis in the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). For example, flashing (blinking), i.e., when the interval between color changes in the luminance data is short, results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than wave lighting, where the interval between color changes in the luminance data is long. A larger number of lit lamps results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than a smaller number of lit lamps. A larger number of lit colors results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than a smaller number of lit colors. A higher proportion of chromatic colors results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than a lower proportion of chromatic colors. Rainbow lighting results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than non-rainbow lighting. Higher luminance results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than lower luminance.

Specifically, referring to Figure 129 based on Figure 38(B), the emphasis level for the first scene (company name) is "high" because a white flash is used in conjunction with the text animation display. The emphasis level for the second scene (model introductions 1-3) is "medium" because while there is a green flash, it is not linked to the text animation display. The emphasis level for the third scene (main model title, sub-model title) is "high" because a white flash is used in conjunction with the text animation display. The emphasis level for the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2) is "low" because it is not linked to the text animation display.

In other words, the intensity of the lights is higher when displaying the company name than when displaying a warning, and also higher when displaying the title than when displaying a warning. Furthermore, because the company name has more light changes linked to the animation than the model title, the intensity of the lights is higher when displaying the company name than when displaying the model title. Therefore, the order of intensity of the lights is: Company Name > Model Title (Main, Sub) > Warning.

Furthermore, since multiple panel lamps and frame lamps are provided in multiple locations, when comparing the degree of emphasis between the light emission of a first lamp (consisting of multiple lamps) and the light emission of a second lamp (consisting of multiple lamps), it is sufficient to compare the average light emission pattern of the entire first lamp with the average light emission pattern of the entire second lamp, rather than comparing the emphasis of a single first lamp with a single second lamp.

In the third scene of the <Rainbow> sequence (main title name, subtitle name), specifically in the "subtitle name" section (for example, Figures 42(P) to (V)), the panel lamps and frame lamps illuminate in a rainbow pattern. The luminance data table used at this time (the sub-table described later) is the same rainbow luminance data table (common table described later (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)) used in the aforementioned step-up effect (see Figure 36(B)) and cut-in effect (see Figure 37(D)).

<Specific Light Emission> In the third scene (title name), only in the designated frames of the machine's subtitle name (for example, Figure 42(S), (U)), the panel lamps and frame lamps will emit a white flash (specific mode). The luminance data table used at this time (the sub-table described later) is a different luminance data table for subtitle 1 and subtitle 2 than the main title luminance data table used for the machine's main title name, and it emits a white flash (specific mode) in conjunction with the text animation display.

As shown in Figure 38(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a different luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 39) is used from the corporate luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part), and in the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the same luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 39) as in the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the corporate luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part) is used in the first scene (corporate name). The brightness data table for Introduction 2 (a sub-table corresponding to parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 of the model introduction) includes brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302 shown in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), and does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), nor does it include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

As described above, while the demo movie display includes multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text, the company name information is particularly important. By using brightness data linked to the display animation, it can be emphasized in comparison to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

As shown in Figure 38(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a different luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 39) is used, which is different from the luminance data table for the main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the luminance data table for subtitle 1, and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts). In the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the same luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 39) as in the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the luminance data table for the main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the luminance data table for subtitle 1, and the luminance data for subtitle 2 are used. The tables (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the main title name display 004SG520A and the subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (main title name and subtitle name). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3) does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (introduction 2-1), nor does it include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (introduction 2-2).

As described above, while there are multiple scenes in the demo movie display where information is conveyed through text, we particularly want to convey the model name. By using brightness data linked to the display animation, we can emphasize it in comparison to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the configuration of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the corporate luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part) (see Figure 39) is more emphasized (more emphasized) than the configuration of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the warning luminance data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts) (see Figure 39). Similarly, the configuration of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the main title luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), subtitle 1 luminance data table, and subtitle 2 luminance data table (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) (see Figure 39) is more emphasized (more emphasized) than the configuration of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the warning luminance data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts).

Specifically, the first scene (company name) has a high level of emphasis because it uses a white flash in conjunction with the text animation display. Similarly, the third scene (main title and subtitle of the device) also has a high level of emphasis because it uses a white flash in conjunction with the text animation display. However, the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2) does not use a white flash in conjunction with the text animation display, resulting in a low level of emphasis.

As described above, the demo movie display includes multiple scenes that convey information through text. To emphasize each piece of information—such as the company name, model title, and warnings—dedicated lighting can be used for each. Specifically, by emphasizing the lighting patterns in the scenes displaying the company name and model title compared to the warning scenes, these elements can be highlighted, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part) are emphasized more than the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the warning brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts), and the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), subtitle 1 brightness data table, and subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) are emphasized more than the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are emphasized more than the modes in which the warning brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts) are emphasized if they are (1) modes with frequent flashing, (2) modes with many illuminated colors, (3) modes with a large number of light-emitting means used, or (4) modes with high brightness. This allows for emphasis on the corporate name and model title, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the configuration of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the corporate brightness data table (a sub-table corresponding to the corporate name part) is emphasized more than the configuration of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (a sub-table corresponding to the main title part), the sub-title 1 brightness data table, and the sub-title 2 brightness data table (a sub-table corresponding to sub-title 1 and 2 parts). This allows for greater emphasis on the corporate name, making it easier for players to understand which company is associated with the gaming machine, and ultimately enabling optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the Rainbow Brightness Data Table (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle parts 1 and 2) while the demo movie is being displayed. When step-up effects (see Figure 36(B)) or cut-in effects (see Figure 37(D)) are executed, the Rainbow Brightness Data Table (grandchild tables corresponding to the step-up and cut-in effects) is used to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). The Rainbow Brightness Data Table used during the demo movie display (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle parts 1 and 2) and the Rainbow Brightness Data Table used when step-up effects (see Figure 36(B)) or cut-in effects (see Figure 37(D)) are executed (grandchild tables corresponding to the step-up and cut-in effects) are common Brightness Data Tables (common table (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the illumination pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more visually appealing. Furthermore, by using the same brightness data table for setting the illumination pattern to rainbow as the brightness data table used for specific effects performed during gameplay (e.g., step-up effects and cut-in effects), the capacity is not increased, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the luminance data table for the rainbow effect used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) following the end of gameplay in the low-base state (normal state) (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle 1 and 2 parts), the luminance data table for the rainbow effect used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) following the end of gameplay in the high-base state (special state) (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle 1 and 2 parts), and the luminance data table for the rainbow effect used when step-up effects (see Figure 36(B)) (specific effects) that can be executed in the low-base state (normal state) and cut-in effects (see Figure 37(D)) that can be executed in the high-base state (special state) are all common luminance data tables (common table (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the illumination pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more spectacular. Furthermore, by using the same luminance data table for setting the illumination pattern to rainbow as the luminance data table used for specific effects that can be executed in normal conditions and special effects that can be executed in special conditions, the capacity is not increased, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the step-up animation (see Figure 36(B)) (specific animation) that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) and the cut-in animation (see Figure 37(D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) are animations that definitively notify that the game is being controlled to a jackpot state. Since the brightness data table (common table (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)) used for animations that definitively indicate control to a jackpot state is also used for demonstration displays, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved as a result.

Furthermore, the luminance data table for subtitle 1 and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) are luminance data tables that use multiple luminance data to illuminate the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in a manner that is linked to the animation display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520B and 004SG520C.

In this way, the main title name and subtitle name are displayed in that order. Since the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized by illuminating the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in conjunction with the subtitle name display animation, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 39, the multiple luminance data sets constituting the company name luminance data table (a sub-table corresponding to the company name part) are luminance data configured to illuminate the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means), the panel lamp, and the side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means). The multiple luminance data sets constituting the introduction luminance data table (a sub-table corresponding to the model introduction 1, model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, model introduction 3-1, and 3-2 parts) are luminance data configured to illuminate the side lamp 9b and the panel lamp, but not the main lamp 9a.

As described above, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display. In the scene displaying the company name, both the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) and the panel lamp and side lamps 9b (first light-emitting means) are illuminated. In the scene introducing the model, the panel lamp and side lamps 9b (first light-emitting means) illuminate, but the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) does not. This relatively emphasizes the first scene in which the company name is displayed, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, the first light-emitting means is described as the panel lamp and side lamp 9b, and the second light-emitting means as the main lamp 9a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the frame lamps may be used as the second light-emitting means that does not emit light in the second scene, and at least one of the panel lamps may be used as the first light-emitting means.

Furthermore, as a variation, the CPU 120 for performance control may control the first light-emitting means (e.g., panel lamp) in the second scene's machine introduction part using a brightness data table for introduction 1 (a grandchild table corresponding to machine introduction 1 part), control the first light-emitting means (e.g., panel lamp) in the second machine introduction part using a brightness data table for introduction 2 (a grandchild table corresponding to machine introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3), and control the second light-emitting means (e.g., frame lamp) in both machine introduction 1 and machine introduction 2 using a single brightness data table (a grandchild table).

As described above, while there are multiple scenes in the demo movie where information is conveyed through text display, in the scenes where the company name is displayed, both the first and second light-emitting means are set to emit light in a dedicated emission mode. In the parts 1 and 2 of the product introduction, the first light-emitting means emits light in a dedicated emission mode, while the second light-emitting means emits light in a common emission mode. This allows the scenes where the company name is displayed to be relatively emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control may, in the first part of the second scene's machine introduction, control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using a single brightness data table for machine introduction 1 (a grandchild table corresponding to the first part of machine introduction), which is different from the corporate brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part), the machine main title brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the machine subtitle brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the first and second subtitle parts), the warning 1 brightness data table, and the warning 2 brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the first and second warning parts). In the second part of the second scene's machine introduction 2, the same single brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the first part of machine introduction) may be used to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

As described above, there are multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. Since information such as company names, model titles, and warnings need to be emphasized, using dedicated illumination for each allows for greater emphasis compared to other text displays, ultimately enabling more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the execution duration of the machine introduction scene (including parts 1 and 2) is 30 seconds longer than the execution duration of the company name display scene (10 seconds), and the execution duration of the machine introduction scene (including parts 1 and 2) is 30 seconds longer than the execution duration of the warning display scene (5 seconds). The company name and warning text may be displayed at times other than during the demo movie. By making the machine introduction scene and title display scene, which are only shown during the demo movie, longer and more prominent, a suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, it is possible to display company names and warning text even when the demo movie is not playing. For example, the company name and warning text may be displayed during the ending period after the jackpot round ends, or the same text displayed during the demo movie may be displayed. In this case, the display time may be set shorter than during the demo movie to avoid disrupting the tempo of the jackpot and high base state.

(Lighting patterns of lamps corresponding to the game state)
Next, the lamp illumination patterns corresponding to the game state will be explained based on Figures 45 and 46. Figure 45 is a diagram showing the lamp illumination patterns corresponding to the game state. Figure 46 shows (A) a diagram indicating the arrangement of lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) a schematic diagram of (A).

As shown in Figure 45, the panel lamps and frame lamps on the pachinko game machine 1 are configured to illuminate in different ways depending on the state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, when an initialization notification is issued due to a cold start, when it is controlled to a low base state, when it is controlled to a high base state, when a demo movie is displayed, and when an error notification (described later) is issued.

Specifically, during the initialization notification period, the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e flash red.

In the low base state, the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) is used, and the panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamps 9b light up in a wave pattern with "blue" as the primary color, while the button lamp 9e lights up in "white".

In the low-probability, high-base state (time-saving state), the brightness data table for the time-saving background (lamp data table: background time-saving) is used. The panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in a wave pattern with "green" as the main color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white". Furthermore, in the high-probability, high-base state (probability variation state), the brightness data table for the probability variation background (lamp data table: background probability variation) is used. The panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in a wave pattern with "purple" as the main color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white". In the following, these brightness data tables for the time-saving background and the brightness data table for the probability variation background may be collectively referred to as the high-base background brightness data table (or high-B background brightness data table).

During the demonstration (demo movie display) period, a customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) is used. The panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamps 9b change their illumination patterns with "white" as the primary color, while the button lamp 9e lights up in "white".

During the error notification period, an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used. The panel lamps and side lamps 9b illuminate in a color corresponding to the state (low base state, high base state, demo effect), while the main lamp 9a flashes red and the button lamp 9e illuminates white.

Furthermore, the "main color" refers to the color that forms the base of the overall color scheme for each period. For example, it may be the color with the highest occupancy rate in terms of illumination time and illumination area (number of lamps) during each period. Other colors may also be emitted. Additionally, it may include multiple colors with different luminance, lightness, and saturation within a given hue. If the main color is "blue," then any similar shades of "blue" may be used.

For example, let's explain analogous colors based on Figure 132. Colors have three attributes: hue, lightness (luminance, brightness), and saturation (vividness). "Analogous colors" include: 1. Combinations of colors that are adjacent in hue and share the same tone (luminance, lightness, and saturation); 2. Combinations of colors with the same hue but different tones; and 3. Combinations of colors that differ only in lightness or saturation.

To explain the example of "1. Combinations of colors that are adjacent in hue and have the same tone (luminance and saturation)" based on Figures 132(A) and (B), if we arrange the three primary colors of light—red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F]—at 120-degree intervals in a color wheel of a predetermined number of colors (24 in this case), then each set of three colors will be non-analogous. Colors with a hue difference within a range of 30 to 60 degrees on this color wheel are considered "analogous," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the color wheel.

For example, if red (R) is the base color, colors within a 30-degree range towards yellow (Y) and a 30-degree range towards cyan (C) (total 60 degrees) are considered analogous to red (R). If green (G) is the base color, colors within a 30-degree range towards magenta (M) and a 30-degree range towards yellow (Y) (total 60 degrees) are considered analogous to green (G). If blue (B) is the base color, colors within a 30-degree range towards cyan (C) and a 30-degree range towards magenta (M) (total 60 degrees) are considered analogous to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the color wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, combinations of colors with a hue difference within a 30-60 degree range on the color wheel can be considered "analogous colors."

Furthermore, it is preferable that the same color family includes combinations of colors that fall under warm colors such as red and yellow, cool colors such as blue and purple, and neutral colors such as green and purple, which are intermediate between warm and cool colors.

As shown in Figure 46(A), the board lamps include the attacker lamp 9c built into the special variable prize ball device 7 located in the lower right of the game board 2, the movable lamp 9d built into the movable body 32 located at the top of the image display device 5, and the decorative lamp 9f built into the decorative body located on the left side of the image display device 5. Note that other lamps (for example, lamps built into the prize ball device) may also be included as long as they are provided on the game board 2.

Furthermore, the frame lamps include the main lamp 9a located at the top of the gaming machine frame 3, the side lamps 9b located on the left and right sides, and the button lamps 9e located on the push button 31B. Note that other lamps located on the gaming machine frame 3 (for example, lamps built into the ball-shooting handle 30, speakers 8L, and 8R) may also be included.

Furthermore, the attacker lamp 9c of the control panel is composed of multiple LEDs, the movable lamp 9d is composed of multiple LEDs, the decorative lamp 9f is composed of multiple LEDs, the main lamp 9a is composed of multiple LEDs, the side lamp 9b is composed of multiple LEDs, and the button lamp 9e is composed of multiple LEDs.

Furthermore, Figure 46(B) is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the various lamps shown in Figure 46(A). For convenience of explanation, the schematic diagram shown in Figure 46(B) may be used in subsequent explanations.

(Customer waiting demo performance begins, variation stopped version)
Next, the flow from when the variable display stops until the customer waiting demo performance begins will be explained based on Figures 47 to 52 and 133. Figure 47 shows an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance is initiated after the variable display of the first special symbol in a low base state ends (A1) to (A8). Figure 48 shows the main parts of Figure 47 (A4) to (A5). Figure 49 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a low base state. Figure 50 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a low base state. Figure 51 shows an example of operation of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state (B1) to (B8). Figure 52 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. Figure 53 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. Figure 54 shows an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance begins after the pachinko game machine is started with a cold start (power on with initialization). Figure 55 is a timing chart showing the sequence from when a pachinko machine starts up with a cold start until the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 56 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start (power on without initialization) in a low base state and the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 57 is a timing chart showing the sequence from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a low base state until the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 58 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a high base state and the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 59 is a timing chart showing the sequence from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a high base state until the customer waiting demo performance begins.

<Low base condition>
First, we will explain an example of how the customer waiting demo sequence works when the game state is in a low base state, based on Figures 47 to 50.

As shown in Figures 47 and 49, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the low base state, if the execution of pre-announcement effects or reach effects has been decided (see Figure 47(A1)), these effects will be executed (though not specifically shown in the illustrations). During variable display, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden.

Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin with a blue wave illumination based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e continues to illuminate in white based on the default brightness data table. Additionally, the speakers 8L and 8R output the normal background BGM. When a pre-announcement or reach animation is performed, a brightness data table for the pre-announcement or reach animation (a lamp data table corresponding to the pre-announcement or reach animation) is set, and the illumination control and BGM output are adjusted according to the animation.

Next, when the variable display ends and a losing combination of symbols (for example, "326") is displayed (see Figure 47 (A2)), the CPU 103 sends a demo waiting command, and the CPU 120 for performance control starts the demo movie start waiting timer (120 seconds), marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). The BGM output is stopped, but it may be configured to fade out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo ending condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 will appear in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 47 (A3)). Once it moves to the right and animates to its designated position, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will appear in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 47 (A4)).

After another 90 seconds have elapsed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, the customer waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 47 (A5) to (A8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table. Based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), control of the illumination pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamp 9e continues to illuminate white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

In order to start displaying the demo movie, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the screen to display the demo movie for the demo performance. This allows the CPU to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

For details, as shown in Figure 48 (A4), during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen shows a combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) as the background of the first background display 004SG081. Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, before the first background display 004SG081 switches to the demo movie display, the fade-out display of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) gradually increases, and the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) switches to the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from blue wave illumination to a white-based illumination pattern (see Figures 48 (A41), (A42)). Then, after the transparency of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) approaches 100% and the display screen whites out (see Figure 48 (A42)), the demo movie display begins (see Figure 48 (A5)).

In this manner, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the end of gameplay in the low base state (the variable display shows a stopped display), and displays the demo movie during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the first customer waiting period. Then, before switching the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, the CPU switches the brightness data table from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Therefore, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the demo movie display, the design allows users to focus on the changes rather than starting everything at once, making them aware of the start of the demo movie display, and ultimately enabling optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the start condition S1 for the demo performance is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the display of the demo movie. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command BF01, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the display of the demo movie. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie, the display control unit 123 waits for a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) to elapse before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance. Therefore, as shown in Figure 49, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo performance start condition S1 was met, the fade-out display (switching display) of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns is started, and after the display screen whites out, the display of the company name display 004SG302 is started. In other words, when the performance control CPU 120 meets the demo performance start condition S1, it switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, regarding the display content, it starts switching control to switch from the normal background display to a demo movie display that includes a fade-out display (switching display) of the normal background display. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo start condition S1 was met.

Therefore, the demo movie display begins after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switched. In particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see Figure 47 (A5)) for the demo movie display begins after the predetermined period tf and the display switching period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control for the customer-waiting demo of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, instead of the fade-out display switching described above, the illumination control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) switches first, preventing the player from feeling uneasy (see Figures 48 (A31), (A32), and 49).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf for delaying the start of the demo movie display is approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be varied in various ways. Furthermore, while a fade display was used as the switching display, other scene change displays may be used, or the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern may be maintained without using a fade display or similar.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 49, if 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo termination condition being met, the first demo movie display ends based on the determination that the demo performance termination condition E1 has been met. Then, the display screen shows the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols), along with the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see Figure 47 (A4)). Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table, and light emission control is performed based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). The button lamps 9e are controlled based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

Thus, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance termination condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated for subsequent attempts until any of the demo performance termination conditions E2 to E4 are fulfilled. Furthermore, from the second attempt onward, based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns are displayed. Along with the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns, the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begins. The demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see Figure 133).

Furthermore, the animation display (frame-in display) for the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 from the second time onward is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) for the first time (see Figure 47 (A3)).

Furthermore, when transitioning from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), as explained in Figure 48, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the end of gameplay in the low base state (variable display shows stopped). During the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the first customer waiting period, it displays a demo movie. During the first customer waiting period, it controls the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). During the second customer waiting period, it controls the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Meanwhile, during both the first and second customer waiting periods, it controls the illumination of button lamps 9e using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light), which is different from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo).

Thus, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a fixed state, this misunderstanding can be prevented, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

For details, as described above, when using the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated and flashed in conjunction with the display mode of the demo movie. For example, if button lamp 9e lights up when an operation prompt display encouraging the operation of push button 31B is shown during a performance introduction scene, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand and perform unnecessary operations. Therefore, the button lamp 9e is kept in a fixed mode.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other reason in a low base state, the process of the demo movie display starting after the variable display ends is the same as when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in a low base state, as shown in Figure 49. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

<High base condition>
Next, we will explain an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo when the game state is in a high base state, based on Figures 51 and 52.

As shown in Figures 51 and 52, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in the high base state, if the execution of a pre-announcement effect or a reach effect has been decided (see Figure 51(B1)), these effects will be executed (though not specifically shown in the illustrations). During the variable display, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden.

Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern based on the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background high-broadcast (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) for probability variation (or time-saving), and the button lamp 9e continues to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light). Also, the background music for high-B backgrounds is output from speakers 8L and 8R. When a pre-announcement or reach animation is performed, a brightness data table for the pre-announcement or reach animation (a lamp data table corresponding to the pre-announcement or reach animation) is set, and the lighting control and background music output are performed in a manner appropriate to the animation.

Next, when the variable display ends and a losing combination of symbols (for example, "326") is displayed (see Figure 51 (B2)), the CPU 103 sends a demo waiting command, and the CPU 120 for performance control starts the demo movie start timer (120 seconds), marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). The BGM output is stopped, but it may be configured to fade out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo ending condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 will appear in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 51 (B3)). Once it moves to the right and animates to its designated position, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will appear in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 51 (B4)).

After another 90 seconds have elapsed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figure 51 (B5) to (B8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table. Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the illumination pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamp 9e continues to illuminate white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

In order to start displaying the demo movie, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the screen to display the demo movie for the demo performance. This allows the CPU to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

For details, during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen shows a combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) as the background of the third background display 004SG083. Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a wave pattern of purple (or green) based on the high-B background brightness data table for probability variation (or time reduction) (lamp data table: background time reduction, or lamp data table: background probability variation).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, before the demo movie display switches from the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the fade-out display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG084) and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) gradually increases, and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) switches to the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from purple or green wave lighting to a white-based illumination pattern (see Figures 48 (A41), (A42)). Then, after the transparency of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) approaches 100% and the display screen whites out, the demo movie display begins (see Figure 51 (B5)).

In this manner, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the end of gameplay in the high base state (the variable display shows a stopped display), and displays the demo movie during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the first customer waiting period. Then, before switching the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, the CPU switches the brightness data table for the high base state (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Therefore, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the demo movie display, the design allows users to focus on the changes rather than starting everything at once, making them aware of the start of the demo movie display, and ultimately enabling optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the start condition S1 for the demo performance is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the display of the demo movie. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command BF01, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the display of the demo movie. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie, the display control unit 123 waits for a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) to elapse before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the display of the demo movie for the demo performance. Therefore, as shown in Figure 51, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo performance start condition S1 was met, the CPU 120 for performance control starts the fade-out display (switching display) of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, and starts displaying the company name display 004SG302 after the display screen has whited out. In other words, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to switch the display content from the high-base background display to a demo movie display that includes a fade-out display (switching display) of the high-base background display. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo start condition S1 was met.

Therefore, the demo movie display begins after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switched. In particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see Figure 51 (B5)) for the demo movie display begins after the predetermined period tf and the display switching period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control for the customer-waiting demo of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, by switching the illumination control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) before the fade-out display described above occurs, it is possible to prevent causing discomfort to the player (see Figures 48 (A31), (A32), and 52).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf is set to approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be varied in various ways. Furthermore, while a fade display was used as the switching display, other scene change displays may be used, or the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern may be maintained without using a fade display or similar.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 52, if 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo termination condition being met, the first demo movie display ends based on the determination that the demo performance termination condition E1 has been met. Then, the display screen shows the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols), as well as the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see Figure 47 (A4)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the illumination control is performed based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), while the button lamps 9e are illuminated based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

Thus, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance termination condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated for subsequent attempts until any of the demo performance termination conditions E2 to E4 are fulfilled. Furthermore, from the second attempt onward, based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns are displayed. Along with the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns, the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begins. The demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see Figure 133).

Furthermore, the animation display (frame-in display) for the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 from the second time onward is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) for the first time (see Figure 51 (B3)).

Furthermore, when transitioning from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance. It then starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state has ended (the variable display shows a stopped display), displays a demo movie during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period has ended, and controls the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the second customer waiting period. During the waiting period, the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is controlled using a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). Meanwhile, during the first and second customer waiting periods, the illumination of button lamp 9e is controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination), which is different from the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration).

Thus, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a fixed state, this misunderstanding can be prevented, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, by maintaining a consistent configuration for the button lamp 9e in both the low-base and high-base states, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings in either state, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the brightness data table for the background of the high probability B (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the brightness data table for the company corresponding to the first scene (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) during the first scene of the second customer waiting period (for example, the first scene (company name), etc.), the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 corresponding to the second scene (machine introductions 1, 2-1 The control panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are controlled using a sub-table corresponding to parts 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2. In the first scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit), which is different from the corporate brightness data table (sub-table corresponding to the corporate name part) and the brightness data tables for introductions 1-3 (sub-tables corresponding to parts 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2). In the second scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

Thus, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by maintaining a consistent mode, this misunderstanding can be prevented, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) is different from the brightness data table used when the promotional animation (lamp data table: button white blinking, lamp data table: button red blinking) is executed to prompt the operation of the push button 31B. The brightness data constituting the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) exhibits less brightness variation than the brightness data constituting the promotional animation brightness data table (lamp data table: button white blinking, lamp data table: button red blinking).

By doing this, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) is composed of brightness data that is less emphasized than when the push button 31B is being prompted to be pressed. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the push button 31B is being prompted to be pressed, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the default brightness data table may be configured to consist of brightness data for turning off the button lamp 9e. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing they are being prompted to press the push button 31B, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, although the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B is provided on the gaming machine frame 3, it is managed separately from the other main lamps 9a and side lamps 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3. This design prevents players from mistakenly believing that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, and as a result, allows for optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 49, in the low base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 47(A2)) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while the first background display 004SG081 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 52, in the high base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol has finished, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) begins, and instead displays the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 51 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing of the start of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

Thus, in both low-base and high-base states, by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the variable display ends, it is possible to prevent unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Furthermore, since the player may have left their seat after the demo movie display ends, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display encourages a more suitable playing environment, resulting in effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other reason in a high base state, the process of the demo movie display starting after the variable display ends is the same as when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state, as shown in Figure 52. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 50, in the low base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends due to an irregular win or the like, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 47(A2)) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while the first background display 004SG081 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53, in the high base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends due to an irregular win or the like, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) begins, and instead displays the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 51 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing of the start of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, even after the variable display of the first special symbol in both the low-base and high-base states has ended, and even after the variable display of the second special symbol has ended, by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the variable display has ended, it is possible to prevent unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Furthermore, since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat after the demo movie display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display encourages the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in effective customer waiting control.

<Cold Start>
Next, an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance starts after the pachinko game machine 1 has been started up with a cold start (power-on with initialization) will be explained based on Figures 54 to 55.

As shown in Figures 54(C1) and 55, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a cold start, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600 from the startup timing. Three seconds after the startup timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and at the timing when the performance control CPU 120 receives a power-on specification command and a first game state background specification command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the initialization display 004SG610 starts in place of the startup preparation display 004SG600 (see Figure 54(C2)), and initial operation control such as confirmation operation of the movable body 32 starts (not shown). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin flashing red based on the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification), and the initialization notification sound starts outputting from speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, the demo movie start waiting timer (60 seconds) begins, marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period).

Next, 10 seconds after receiving the power-on command and the first game state background command, the initialization process is completed. The initialization display 004SG610 ends, and the first background display 004SG081 begins (see Figure 54 (C3)). At this time, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden. Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light). Furthermore, the BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped.

Next, if 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo ending condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 will appear in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 54 (C4)), move to the right to its designated position, and animate. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will appear in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 54 (C5)).

After another 30 seconds have passed, and 60 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S2 has been met. Based on this, the customer waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 54 (C6) to (C9)). Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), control of the light emission pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamps 9e continue to light up white based on the default brightness data table.

Furthermore, the subsequent steps are the same as those shown in Figures 47-49 for the low-base state; therefore, detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

<Hot Start (Low Base State)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then the customer waiting demo performance begins will be explained based on Figures 56 to 57.

As shown in Figures 56 (D1) and 57, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start in a low base state, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation indicator 004SG600 from the startup timing. Three seconds after the startup timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B begin to light up. At the same time, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command and the first game state background specification command from CPU 103, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), the button lamps 9e begin to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light), and the BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R stops. Also, the demo movie start waiting timer (90 seconds) begins to count, and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the CPU 120 for performance control receives the power outage recovery command and the first game state background specification command from CPU 103, the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the first background display 004SG081 begins (see Figure 56 (D2)). At the same time, initial operation control, such as the confirmation operation of the movable body 32, begins (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer began without the demo end condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 56 (D3)), moves to the right to the predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 56 (D4)).

After another 60 seconds have elapsed, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S3 has been met. Based on this determination, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 56 (D5) to (D8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table. Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the illumination pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamps 9e continue to illuminate white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

Furthermore, the subsequent steps are the same as those shown in Figures 47-49 for the low-base state; therefore, detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

<Hot Start (High Base Condition)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then the customer waiting demo performance begins will be explained based on Figures 58 to 59.

As shown in Figures 58(E1) and 59, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started up with a hot start in a high base state, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600 from the startup timing. Three seconds after startup, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B begin to light up. Simultaneously, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command and the second and third game state background specification commands from CPU 103, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). Button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R stops. Additionally, the demo movie start waiting timer (90 seconds) begins, marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period).

Next, two seconds after the CPU 120 for performance control receives the power outage recovery command and the second and third game state background specification commands from CPU 103, the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) begins (see Figure 58 (E2)). At the same time, initial operation control, such as the confirmation operation of the movable body 32, begins (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer began without the demo end condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 58 (E3)), moves to the right to the predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 58 (E4)).

After another 60 seconds have elapsed, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S3 has been met. Based on this, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figure 58 (E5) to (E8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo). Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the light emission pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamps 9e continue to light up white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

Furthermore, the subsequent steps are the same as those shown in Figures 51 to 53 for the high-base state; therefore, detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 57 and 59, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and then a hot start is performed, the performance control CPU 120 will not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the display of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), but will instead display the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figures 56 (D2) and 58 (E2)), and will then display a demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the start timing of the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and a cold start is performed, the performance control CPU 120 will display the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 54 (C3)) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and then display the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will be displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while simultaneously displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Thus, before a gaming parlor opens, there are two possible startup scenarios: a hot start (power on without initialization) and a cold start (power on with initialization). In either startup scenario, parlor staff can verify the display by checking the background display, demo movie display, and guidance display after power-on, thus improving the efficiency of the verification process. Furthermore, when the parlor opens and welcomes players, if a background display is shown, it will be the background display that also shows the guidance display. This allows for clear guidance regarding performance adjustments from the moment players start playing, providing them with a suitable gaming environment and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, after a hot start or cold start, the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, followed by the display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 before the demo movie display begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the demo movie display may begin after the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, without the display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 55 and 57, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 while it is in a low base state, and then the power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 will display the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see Figures 54(C3) and 56(D2)), and then display the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will be displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while simultaneously displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 58, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 while it is in a high base state, and then the power is turned on, the performance control CPU 120 will not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) starts, and will instead display the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 58 (D2)), and then will display a demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing of the start of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

Thus, before a gaming parlor opens, there are two possible startup states: a low base state and a high base state. To allow players to confirm which state the parlor is in, the system avoids displaying guidance messages in the background to avoid interference. If the background reappears afterward, it's highly likely the state has already been confirmed. Therefore, by displaying guidance messages from the moment the background display begins, when the parlor opens and welcomes players, the background display will show the guidance message. This allows for clear guidance regarding adjustments to the game's presentation from the start of play, providing players with a suitable gaming environment and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, after the variable display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are not displayed, and the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. After a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed with a specific animation (fade-in display), thereby displaying the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) The first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed superimposed on the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). This is achieved by displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 using the same animation (frame-in display) as the first menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402.

In this way, by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the variable display ends, it is possible to prevent unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Furthermore, by prompting performance adjustments immediately after the demo movie display ends and the display switches from the demo movie to the background, it is possible to encourage players to play in a suitable gaming environment. Additionally, by using the same animation as when the guidance message is displayed immediately after the demo movie display switches to the background, it is possible to appeal to players that the guidance message has been displayed without incurring additional costs, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, a frame-in display is used as an example for the animation display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the direction of movement, movement speed, display position, etc., are not limited to those described above. Furthermore, other forms of animation display, such as fade-in display, moving display, or zoom display, may also be used.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 49, 52, 57, 59, and 133, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the low base state; displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the high base state; displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via hot start in the low base state; and displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via hot start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is a longer period than 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5).

Thus, after the variable display ends, immediately displaying the demo movie could be inconvenient because the player might not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer duration of 120 seconds is set for TC1 and TC2. However, after a hot start, since a store employee, not a player, is present, a shorter duration of 90 seconds is set for TC4 and TC5. This allows the employee to quickly check the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 49, 52, 55, and 133, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the low base state; displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the high base state; displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since the power-on specification command was received based on the pachinko game machine 1 starting up in a cold start in the low base state; and displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since the power-on specification command was received based on the pachinko game machine 1 starting up in a cold start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is a longer period than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

Thus, if the demo movie display is shown immediately after the variable display ends, it may be inconvenient as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time, TC1 and TC2 = 120 seconds, is set. After a cold start (power-on with initialization), since this is the initial start method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor, a shorter time, TC3 = 60 seconds, is set so that the demo movie display is shown immediately. This allows the parlor staff to quickly check the demo movie display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 55, 57, 59, and 133, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a hot start in the low base state; displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a hot start in the high base state; displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since receiving a power on command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a cold start in the low base state; and displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since receiving a power on command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a cold start in the high base state. In this case, 90 seconds (the third specified period tc4, tc5) is a longer period than 60 seconds (the second specified period tc3).

Thus, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the initial starting method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By ensuring that the demo movie is displayed immediately, parlor staff can quickly review the demo movie and become more familiar with the installed machine, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 49, 52, and 55, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the low base state, displays the demo movie again after 30 seconds (a predetermined period) have elapsed since the demo movie display ended, displays the demo movie again after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the high base state, displays the demo movie again after 30 seconds (a predetermined period) has elapsed since the demo movie display ended, and so on, in the low base state, the pachinko game machine 1 Based on the fact that the machine started up in a cold start state, a power-on command was received, and after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) elapsed, a demo movie was displayed. After the demo movie display ended, 30 seconds (a predetermined period) elapsed, and the demo movie was displayed again. Based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 started up in a cold start state in a high base state, a power-on command was received, and after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) elapsed, a demo movie was displayed. After the demo movie display ended, 30 seconds (a predetermined period) elapsed, and the demo movie was displayed again. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is a longer period than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

Thus, if the demo movie is displayed immediately after the variable display ends, it may be inconvenient as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer period of 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is set. Since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the initial start method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor, a shorter period of tc3 = 60 seconds is set so that the demo movie is displayed immediately. This allows the parlor staff to quickly check the demo movie and become more familiar with the installed machine. Furthermore, by ensuring that the demo movie is displayed once in all situations—after the variable display ends in a low base state, after the variation ends in a high base state, and after a cold start—and then the period until the demo movie is displayed again is consistent, the demo movie can be shown stably, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 57 and 59, after starting up via hot start, a startup preparation indicator 004SG600 is displayed to indicate that startup is in progress (see Figures 56(D1) and 58(E1)). At the timing associated with displaying the startup indicator, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). At the timing associated with displaying the startup preparation indicator 004SG600, the button lamps 9e are controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

In this way, by using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to illuminate the system even before the background display is shown, it is possible to confirm that the panel lamps and frame lamps are functioning correctly at the startup stage. Subsequently, the system can seamlessly transition to the illumination pattern for customer waiting, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Time elapsed since the end of the demo performance while waiting for customers)
Next, the process when the customer waiting demo performance ends after a certain amount of time will be explained based on Figures 60 to 62. Figure 60 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends after a certain amount of time in a low base state (A) to (E). Figure 61 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends after a certain amount of time in a low base state. Figure 62 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends after a certain amount of time in a high base state.

<Low base condition>
First, we will explain an example of what happens when the customer waiting demo sequence ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed while the game is in a low-base state, based on Figures 60 and 61.

As shown in Figures 60 and 61, in the low-base state, if the first demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 was met, ends based on the meeting of the end condition E1, that is, 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display, the system transitions to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Subsequently, if 30 seconds (the 6th hour) has elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is considered to be met, and the demo movie display starts again. From there, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demo movie display are met.

For details, as shown in Figure 60(A), when the second warning part of the fourth and final scene of the demo movie is displayed, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, when the termination condition E1 for the first demo movie display is met, the brightness data table switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins (see Figure 60(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E1 was met, a fade-out display (switching display) begins, in which the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the warning part 2 of the fourth scene gradually changes to black and blends in with the black warning background display 004SG321 (see Figure 60(C)). Then, after the display screen turns black and blacks out, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 60(D)), moves to the right to a predetermined position and is displayed as an animation, at which point the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 60(E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background display, including the fade-out display (switching display). However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the normal background begins after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was met (see Figures 60(C) and 61).

In detail, when the termination condition E1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the CPU 120 for performance control. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the CPU 120 for performance control starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display begins after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switched. In particular, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the demo (lamp data table: demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the normal background display, a gradual design is employed. This prevents a negative impression after the demo display ends, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period following the end of the variable display in the low base state, and using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) during the first customer waiting period following the end of the second customer waiting period in the high base state. Before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG081, it switches control from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, followed by the start of the background display. This step-by-step design prevents a negative aftertaste at the end of the demo movie display, and furthermore, the state can be quickly communicated to the player through the lamp illumination pattern, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display starts based on the fulfillment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display switched from the background to the demo movie display. Conversely, when the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed when the display switches from the demo movie to the background display.

<High base condition>
First, we will explain an example of what happens when the customer waiting demo performance ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed while the game is in a high-base state, based on Figures 60 and 62.

As shown in Figures 60 and 62, in the high base state, if the first demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 was met, ends when the end condition E1 is met, that is, when 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display, the system transitions to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Subsequently, when 30 seconds (6th hour) have elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is considered met, and the demo movie display starts again. From this point onward, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demo movie display are met.

For details, as shown in Figure 60(A), when the second warning part of the fourth and final scene of the demo movie is displayed, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, when the termination condition E1 for the first demo movie display is met, the brightness data table switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the purple (or green) wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins (see Figure 60(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E1 was met, a fade-out display (switching display) begins in which the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the warning part 2 of the fourth scene gradually changes to black and blends in with the black warning background display 004SG321 (see Figure 60(C)). Then, after the display screen turns black and blacks out, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns begins, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 60(D)), moves to the right to a predetermined position and is displayed as an animation, and then the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 60(E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, regarding the display content, it starts switching control to switch from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), which includes a fade-out display (switching display), and the background display of decorative symbols. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the high-B music background starts after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was met (see Figures 60(C) and 62).

In detail, when the termination condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative symbols. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative symbols to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative symbols. Meanwhile, the display control unit 123, after transmitting the extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display, switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display begins after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) switched. In particular, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns begins after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) for the high-B music background begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the high-B background display, a gradual design is employed. This prevents a negative aftertaste at the end of the demo display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using a brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period has ended following the end of the variable display in the high base state, and controls them using a brightness data table for high B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period has ended following the end of the second customer waiting period in the high base state, and then switches from demo movie display to third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082). Before switching the display, the system switches and controls from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). Similarly, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the system switches and controls from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, followed by the start of the background display. This step-by-step design prevents a negative aftertaste at the end of the demo movie display, and furthermore, the state can be quickly communicated to the player through the lamp illumination pattern, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display starts based on the fulfillment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display switched from the background to the demo movie display. Conversely, when the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed when the display switches from the demo movie to the background display.

(End of demo performance while waiting for customers. Start of prize-winning version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance ends with a starting win will be explained based on Figures 63 to 68. Figure 63 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends with a starting win in a low base state (A) to (E). Figure 64 shows details of the display modes in Figure 63 (A) to (G). Figure 65 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first starting win in a low base state. Figure 66 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second starting win in a low base state. Figure 67 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second starting win in a high base state. Figure 68 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first starting win in a high base state.

<Low base condition>
First, we will explain an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with the first start win in a low base state, based on Figures 63 to 65.

As shown in Figures 63 to 65, in a low base state, if the demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 was met, ends based on the meeting of the end condition E2, that is, the occurrence of the first start prize (start of variable display of the first special symbol) that occurred during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins.

For details, as shown in Figure 63(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the first start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins (see Figure 63(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative symbols begins, and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins (see Figures 63(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E2 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background (variable display) display and the variable display of decorative symbols. However, the normal background display and the variable display of decorative symbols begin at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E2 was met (see Figures 63(C) and 65).

More specifically, when the termination condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, as shown in Figure 64(A), when the first start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins. Meanwhile, the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of the small symbols begins until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met (see Figure 64(B)).

Next, after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E2 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative symbols begins. Simultaneously, the first reserved display 004SG101 is displayed in the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Following this, a shift display begins, moving the first reserved display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F (see Figures 64(C) and (D)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 64(C) to 64(E), the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C will remain temporarily displayed in these areas until the first hold display 004SG101 displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F, i.e., the hold display shift is completed. During this time, the scrolling display will not begin, and each character will perform a variation start action. A variation start action includes, for example, the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052 moving its face or body or changing its expression on the base display unit 004SG054, operating in a manner different from scrolling display.

Then, once the hold display shift display is complete, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C begin scrolling in the order of left, right, and center (see Figure 62(F)). Once scrolling begins, the scrolling speed (movement speed) gradually increases in the order of low, medium, and high, and a fade-out display begins. The image transparency gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, reaching approximately 90% at high speed (see Figures 62(G) and 65). Note that in the low base state (first performance mode), the appearance will be as shown in Figure 64 regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of decorative patterns begin after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination mode of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) has switched. Visually, the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the demo (lamp data table: demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has finished, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, extending over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 66, the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other event in a low base state is the same as the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in a low base state, as shown in Figure 65. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

<High base condition>
First, we will explain an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with the second start win while the game state is in a high base state, based on Figure 67, with reference to Figures 63 and 134.

As shown in Figure 67, in a high base state, if the demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 was met, ends based on the meeting of the end condition E2, that is, the occurrence of a second start win (start of variable display of the second special symbol) during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins.

For details, as shown in Figure 63(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while the button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the second scene introduction part 1 of the demo movie is displayed, if a second start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in purple (or green) waves (see Figure 63(B). In Figure 63(B), blue waves are lit). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols begins, and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins (see Figures 63(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E2 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols. However, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols begin at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E2 was met (see Figure 63(C)).

More specifically, when the termination condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Meanwhile, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns, and after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed, switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Therefore, as shown in Figure 134(A), when the second start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the first part of the second scene introduction in the demo movie is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the purple (or green) wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins. Meanwhile, the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of the small symbols begins until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met (see Figure 134(B)).

Next, after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols begins. Simultaneously, the second reserved display 004SG102 is displayed in the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Then, a shift display begins, moving the second reserved display 004SG102 to the active display area 5F (see Figure 134(C)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 134(C) to 134(D), the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C will remain temporarily displayed in these areas until the second hold display 004SG102, displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, moves to the active display area 5F—that is, until the hold display shift is complete. However, in the high base state, the character variation start action is not executed (see Figure 35(B)).

Then, once the shift display of the hold display is complete, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C begin scrolling simultaneously on the left, right, and center (see Figure 134(E)). Once scrolling begins, the scrolling speed (movement speed) gradually increases in the order of low, medium, and high speed, and a fade-out display begins. The transparency of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, reaching approximately 90% at high speed (see Figures 134(F) and (G)).

Furthermore, in the high base state (second and third performance modes), the appearance will be as shown in Figure 134 regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated.

Therefore, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the scrolling display of decorative patterns begin after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, the illumination control for the high-B background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the system switches to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the scrolling display of decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) by switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state when the first start condition is met while the demo movie display is shown, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state. Furthermore, when the demo movie display is shown in the high base state and the second start condition is met, the CPU 120 controls the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first in the high base state, the switching of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) allows for a quick indication that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has finished, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in both the low-base and high-base states, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly signal that the first or second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are positioned around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, and extend over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 68, the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other event in a high base state is the same as the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state, as shown in Figure 67. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) by switching from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol when a first start win occurs while the demo movie display is being shown. Similarly, when a second start win occurs while the demo movie display is being shown, the CPU 120 switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Thus, regardless of which type of starting win occurs, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) allows for quick notification that a starting win has occurred and the demo movie display has finished, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control, when a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, displays a scrolling display of decorative symbols so that the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%) that is higher than the first value. When a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, the CPU switches the display from the demo movie to the variable display of decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

In this way, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative patterns increases, it is possible to signal that a starting win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a scrolling display of decorative symbols so that the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%), which is higher than the first value, when a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed. When a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed in a low base state, the display switches from the demo movie to a variable display of decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%. When a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed in a high base state, the display switches from the demo movie to a variable display of decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

Thus, in both low-base and high-base states, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative symbols increases, it is possible to signal that a first or second win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, even if the variable display of the small symbols begins upon the occurrence of the first or second starting win, the transparency of the decorative symbols will not change while the decorative symbols are performing their variation start action. Therefore, the display will switch from the demo movie to the background display for the variable display of the decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from its initial value.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control, when a first starting win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, switches the display from the demo movie to a variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%. Similarly, when a second starting win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, switches the display from the demo movie to a variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

Thus, regardless of whether a first or second start-up win occurs, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative symbols increases, it is possible to signal that a start-up win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demo performance - steering wheel operation version)
Next, the process when the customer waiting demo performance ends with steering wheel operation will be explained based on Figures 69 to 70. Figure 69 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends with steering wheel operation in a low base state (A) to (C). Figure 70 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends with steering wheel operation in a low base state.

<Low base condition>
The following explains an example of how the waiting demo sequence ends with a handle operation when the game state is in a low base state, based on Figures 69 to 70. Note that while the following explanation focuses on the example of how the waiting demo sequence ends with a handle operation in a low base state, the example of how it ends with a handle operation in a high base state is almost identical, with only the background display and lamp data changing to those for a high base state; therefore, the explanation is omitted here.

As shown in Figures 69 to 70, in the low base state, if the demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met, ends when the end condition E3 is met, that is, when the display is terminated based on the handle operation, the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins.

For details, as shown in Figure 69(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the first part of the introduction to the second scene in the demo movie is displayed, if steering wheel operation is detected and termination condition E3 is met, the system switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins (see Figure 69(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E3 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left edge of the display screen, moves to the right to a predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 69(C)).

In other words, when the termination condition E3 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background (symbol stop) display. However, the normal background display and decorative symbols begin at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E3 was met (see Figures 69(C) and 70).

In detail, when the termination condition E3 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative patterns begin after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, this means that the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, decorative patterns, and guidance displays.

In other words, when the CPU 120 for performance control detects operation of the ball-hitting handle 30 while the demo movie display is shown, it switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display.

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the ball-hitting handle 30 has been operated and that the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, extending over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the termination condition E3 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

(End of customer waiting demo performance - Menu operation version)
Next, the process when the customer waiting demo performance ends with menu operation will be explained based on Figures 71 to 72. Figure 71 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends with menu operation in a low base state (A) to (C). Figure 72 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends with menu operation in a low base state. Figure 73 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends with menu operation in a high base state.

<Low base condition>
An example of how the game can end when the customer waiting demo is terminated by opening the menu display while the game is in a low base state will be explained with reference to Figures 71 to 73.

As shown in Figures 71 and 72, in the low base state, when the demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met, ends when the end condition E4 is met, that is, when the menu display 004SG410 is opened (hereinafter also referred to as the menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of them. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is defined as the operation of the push button 31B while the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed, but other operations such as the stick controller 31A may also be used.

For details, as shown in Figure 71(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the first part of the introduction to the second scene in the demo movie is displayed, if a menu operation is detected and termination condition E4 is met, the system switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins (see Figure 71(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E4 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 71(C)).

In other words, when the termination condition E4 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410. However, the normal background display and menu display 004SG410 start only after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E4 was met (see Figures 71(C) and 72).

In detail, when the termination condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the menu display 004SG410 begins after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, decorative symbols, and menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the CPU 120 for performance control detects an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 via push button 31B while the demo movie display is shown, it switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display and menu guidance display 004SG401.

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the demo movie display has ended due to the operation of push button 31B to display the menu guidance display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, and extend over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the termination condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

<High base condition>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demo sequence ends by opening the menu display while the game is in a high base state will be explained with reference to Figures 71 and 73.

As shown in Figures 71 and 73, in the high base state, when the demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 was met, ends when the end condition E4 is met, that is, when the menu display 004SG410 is opened (hereinafter also referred to as the menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (shown as the first background display 004SG081 in Figure 71) and decorative patterns begins, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of them. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is defined as the operation of the push button 31B while the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed, but other operations such as the stick controller 31A may also be used.

For details, as shown in Figure 71(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while the button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is shown, if a menu operation is detected and termination condition E4 is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern (they are blue in Figure 71(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E4 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern begins, the volume/brightness indicator 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 71(C)).

In other words, when the termination condition E4 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). However, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 start at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E4 was met (see Figures 71(C) and 73).

In more detail, when the termination condition E4 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. Meanwhile, the display control unit 123, after transmitting the extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410, switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 begins after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, the illumination control for the high-B background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the CPU 120 for performance control detects an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 via the push button 31B while the demo movie display is shown, it switches from the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410.

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the demo movie display has ended due to the operation of push button 31B to display the menu guidance display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, and extend over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the termination condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example was given in which a high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) was applied as the brightness data table for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) for the menu. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a brightness data table with a different light emission pattern from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) may be set as the brightness data table for the menu.

(End of customer waiting demo when the interruption condition is met)
In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 is displaying a demo movie, if an interrupt condition is met, that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start win), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation) are met, or 1 (time elapsed) is met, it will switch from the demo movie display to the normal background display or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out display or the like which would normally be displayed as a switching display.

Thus, by using a transition display to prevent the demo movie display from appearing abruptly when it ends due to the passage of time, and by using a transition display to make the demo movie display appear abrupt when it ends due to an interruption condition, the contrast between these events makes it particularly clear that the display ended abruptly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the performance control CPU 120 is displaying a demo movie in a low base state, if an interrupt condition is met—that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start winning), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation), or 1 (time elapsed) are met—it will switch from the demo movie display to the normal background display without displaying a fade-out or other transitional display. Similarly, when the demo movie is displaying in a high base state, if an interrupt condition is met—that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start winning), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation), or 1 (time elapsed) are met—it will switch from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out or other transitional display.

Thus, by using a transition display to prevent the demo movie display from appearing abruptly when it ends due to the passage of time, and by using a transition display to make the demo movie display appear abrupt when it ends due to an interruption condition, the contrast between these events makes it particularly clear that the display ended abruptly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the demo movie display is shown, if an interruption condition is met—that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start win), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation), or 1 (time elapsed) are met—the fade-out display that would normally be displayed as a switching display is not shown. Instead, the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) from the demo movie display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When any of termination conditions E2 to E4 are met while the demo movie display is shown, the menu display 004SG410 may be displayed as a background display without showing a switching display.

(Customer waiting demo performance ends - Error occurred version)
Next, we will explain the case where an error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance, based on Figures 74 to 77. Figure 74 shows (A) a timing chart illustrating an example of normal operation of the payout device upon winning a prize, and (B) a timing chart illustrating an example of erroneous operation of the payout device upon winning a prize. Figure 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation when a bulb failure error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance. Figure 76 is a diagram for explaining priority layers. Figure 77 is a diagram illustrating the flow when an error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance started in a low base state. Figure 78 is a diagram illustrating the flow when an error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance started in a high base state.

First, let's explain one of the errors: the ball failure error. The ball failure error occurs when the payout control unit operates the payout device 004SG031, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 fails to detect a game ball.

In detail, as shown in Figure 74(A), when the conditions for dispensing prize balls are met, such as when a prize is won, the dispensing device 004SG031 performs a dispensing operation (for example, the rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 5 balls), and the game balls are dispensed into the dispensing passage. If all 5 game balls are detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 after the dispensing operation has started, the CPU 103 considers the dispensing to have been successful and terminates the dispensing process. Therefore, the error display 004SG700 (see Figure 75(B)), consisting of a mark and the text "Ball failure error," will not be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a will not flash in the error manner described later.

Next, as shown in Figure 74(B), when a payout operation (e.g., rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) is performed by the payout device 004SG031 to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 5 balls) in response to a winning combination, the CPU 103 determines whether the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 has not detected any game balls while there are undispensed balls (e.g., 3 of the 5 game balls are not detected) for a period of time equal to the first determination period tl (e.g., tl = 5 seconds). If the CPU determines that no game balls were detected during this first determination period tl, that is, that no game balls were detected while there were undispensed balls, then the payout was deemed unsuccessful. The CPU then continues a retry operation, repeatedly performing the payout operation to dispense 5 game balls and the game ball detection check within the first determination period tl until the number of undispensed game balls (e.g., 5 balls) is detected.

Furthermore, if five game balls are not detected even after the third retry operation during this retry period—that is, if the period during which no game balls are detected while undispensed balls exist continues for the second judgment period tm (for example, 15 seconds, including the first judgment period tl)—the CPU 103 determines that there may be a problem such as insufficient supply of game balls to the dispensing device 004SG031, a malfunction of the dispensing device 004SG031, or a ball jam in the dispensing passage. It then sends an error designation command indicating a ball shortage error and continues the retry operation.

Meanwhile, the CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving an error specification command, switches the main lamp 9a to a red flashing light for error notification, while maintaining the previous illumination pattern control for the panel lamps and side lamps 9b. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error specification command, an error display 004SG700 (see Figure 75(B)) is displayed on the display screen to provide error notification.

Furthermore, after the CPU 103 sends an error specification command indicating a ball-out error, when it detects the first game ball through a retry operation, it sends an error specification command to the performance control CPU 120 indicating that the ball-out error has been cleared. In other words, even if there are two or more unpaid balls, when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the first judgment period tl or the second judgment period tm has elapsed since the first game ball was detected through the retry operation, an error specification command indicating the clearing of the ball-out error is sent. This allows the error notification to be terminated quickly without waiting for all unpaid balls to be detected. Also, when a predetermined period tk (e.g., tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error clearing specification command, the error display 004SG700 is erased from the display screen, and the error notification is terminated.

Furthermore, if unpaid balls remain after sending the error specification command to clear the error, a retry operation will be initiated again. If the number of unpaid balls is not detected even after the third retry operation has completed, an error specification command indicating a ball shortage error will be sent again, and the aforementioned error notification will be resumed by the performance control CPU 120.

<Low base condition>
Next, we will explain an example of operation when a bulb failure error that occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, which was started in a low base state, continues even after the demo movie display has started, based on Figures 75 to 77.

As shown in Figures 75 to 77, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the low base state, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background (see Figure 75(A)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamps 9e maintain a white illumination based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives an error command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). However, for the main lamp 9a, as shown in Figure 76, it switches to red flashing illumination control in order to set error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a of the priority layer (see Figure 75(B)).

Here, as shown in Figure 76, basically, the normal layer has a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the panel lamps and frame lamps set according to the state. On the other hand, the priority layer, which takes precedence over the normal layer, has an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) set when an error occurs as described above. Then, by using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) preferentially over the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer to output brightness data to the LED driver, the main lamp 9a will blink red. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the timing of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, as shown in Figure 75(C), after a bulb failure error occurs and the main lamp 9a switches to flashing red, a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) elapses. Then, the error display 004SG700 is displayed on the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen.

Subsequently, when the variable display ends and the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guidance display 004SG401 appears frame-in from the lower left edge of the display screen, moves to the right to its designated position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 appears in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 75(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is met, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b switches to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), and control of the light emission pattern based on white begins. Even after the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the red blinking of the main lamp 9a continue (see Figure 75(E)). Subsequently, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was met (see Figure 75(F)).

Subsequently, when the bulb failure error is cleared at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) in the normal layer. As a result, the main lamp 9a also begins light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see Figure 75(G)). At this time, since the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, it is possible to start the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) from a predetermined point in the demo movie display. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error was cleared, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see Figure 75(G)).

Furthermore, although not illustrated in detail, the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol (initiated by an irregular win, etc.) in a low base state and continues after the demo movie display begins is similar to the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol (initiated in a low base state) and continues after the demo movie display begins, as shown in Figure 75. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during variable display, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the notification of specific errors that occur during gameplay (e.g., a bulb failure error) is carried over and executed regardless of whether the background display or the demo movie is being shown, stable notification of bulb failure errors can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification for specific errors occurring during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is carried over and executed during both background display and demo movie display, stable notification of bulb failure errors can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

<High base condition>
Next, we will explain an example of operation when a bulb failure error that occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, which was started in a high base state, continues even after the demo movie display has started, based on Figure 78 and with reference to Figure 75.

As shown in Figure 78, in the high base state, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background (see Figure 75(A)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e maintains a white illumination based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives an error command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). However, for the main lamp 9a, as shown in Figure 76, it switches to red flashing illumination control in order to set error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a of the priority layer (see Figure 75(B)).

Here, as shown in Figure 76, basically, the normal layer has a high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the panel lamp and frame lamp set according to the state. On the other hand, the priority layer, which takes precedence over the normal layer, has an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) set when an error occurs as described above. Then, by using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) preferentially over the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) set in the normal layer to output brightness data to the LED driver, the main lamp 9a will blink red. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the timing of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) set in the normal layer.

Next, after a bulb failure error occurs and the main lamp 9a switches to flashing red, a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) elapses. Then, the error display 004SG700 is displayed on the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen (see Figure 75(C)).

Subsequently, when the variable display ends and the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guidance display 004SG401 appears frame-in from the lower left edge of the display screen, moves to the right to its designated position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 appears in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 75(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is met, the high-B background brightness data table corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) switches to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission pattern based on white begins. Even after the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the red blinking of the main lamp 9a continue (see Figure 75(E)). Subsequently, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was met (see Figure 75(F)).

Subsequently, when the bulb failure error is cleared at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) in the normal layer. As a result, the main lamp 9a also begins light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see Figure 75(G)). At this time, since the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, it is possible to start the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) from a predetermined point in the demo movie display. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error was cleared, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see Figure 75(G)).

Furthermore, although not illustrated in detail, the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol (initiated by an irregular win, etc.) in a high base state and continues after the demo movie display begins is similar to the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol (initiated in a high base state) and continues after the demo movie display begins, as shown in Figure 78. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in a low base state, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol in a high base state, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification for bulb failure errors that occur during variable display, regardless of whether the display is low-base or high-base, is carried over and executed during background display and demo movie display, stable bulb failure error notification can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification for specific errors occurring during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is carried over and executed during both background display and demo movie display, stable notification of bulb failure errors can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the dominant colors differ between the luminance data table for customer-waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer-waiting demonstration) and the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error). Specifically, white is the dominant color in the luminance data table for customer-waiting demonstrations, while red is the dominant color in the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to have different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the dominant colors differ between the luminance data that constitutes the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data that constitutes the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, blue is the dominant color in the luminance data that constitutes the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background), while red is the dominant color in the luminance data that constitutes the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 45).

By configuring the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) to use different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the dominant colors differ between the luminance data constituting the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and also between the luminance data constituting the high-B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the dominant color in the luminance data constituting the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) is blue, while the dominant color in the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 45). Furthermore, in the luminance data that constitutes the high-B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), the dominant colors are green (for time reduction) or purple (for probability change), while in the luminance data that constitutes the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), the dominant color is red (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to use different main colors in the brightness data, and by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to use different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the background display, regardless of which background is being displayed, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, during background display, if no bulb failure error occurs, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability variation background). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The colors that occupy a larger proportion differ between the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 45).

By configuring the luminance data for errors (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to use different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demo movie display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, during background display, if no bulb failure error occurs, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different proportions of colors (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) to use different primary colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

In this embodiment, an example was given in which, when an error notification is performed, the light emission control is performed by flashing red light based on an error brightness data table set in the priority layer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an error notification is performed, the light emission control may be performed based on dedicated error brightness data (grandchild data) that causes a dedicated error notification lamp to flash red.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error is announced, the main lamp 9a of the frame lamps is used to control the illumination for the error announcement. Since the error lamp is illuminated to alert the arcade staff, the main lamp 9a is positioned at the highest point of the frame lamps, where it is not obscured by the player and is most easily noticed by the staff. However, side lamps 9b or other lamps may also be used.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). Furthermore, the system controls the side lamps 9b and panel lamps. If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The colors that occupy a larger proportion differ between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that occupy a larger proportion differ between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the luminance data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) and error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) to use different main colors in the luminance data, and by configuring the luminance data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) to use different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the luminance data used in the luminance data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are visible to the player. Specifically, the luminance data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) uses a predominantly white illumination pattern, while the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) uses a red flashing pattern (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and the panel lamps are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability variation background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and the panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The brightness data constituting the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability variation background) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured to result in different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visible to the player. Specifically, the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) displays a blue wave pattern, the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: probability variation background (or lamp data table: reduced time background)) displays a purple (or green) wave pattern, while the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) displays a red blinking pattern (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the movement of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability change background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the luminance data for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data for the error background (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visible to the player. Similarly, the luminance data for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the luminance data for the error background (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visible to the player. Specifically, the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) uses a blue wave illumination, the high-B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) uses a purple (or green) wave illumination, and the error background luminance data table (lamp data table: error) uses a red flashing light (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the system to show different behaviors of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the system to show different behaviors of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). In addition, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the luminance data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured to produce different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) that the player can see. Specifically, the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) displays a blue wave pattern, the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: probability variation background (or lamp data table: reduced time background)) displays a purple (or green) wave pattern, and the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) displays a red blinking pattern (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the system to show different behaviors of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the system to show different behaviors of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different illumination patterns for the main lamp 9a, the panel lamps, and the side lamps 9b, as seen by the player. Specifically, in the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) illuminate in a white-based illumination pattern, while in the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b illuminate in patterns corresponding to the state (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that an error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the lighting patterns of the main lamp 9a, the panel lamps, and side lamps 9b, as seen by the player, are configured to differ between the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced time background, lamp data table: probability variation background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, in the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced time background, lamp data table: probability variation background), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in blue wave, green wave, or purple wave patterns. In the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b light up in patterns corresponding to the state (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability change background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). If a bulb failure error occurs, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The luminance operation patterns of the main lamp 9a and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b as seen by the player are different for the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The luminance operation patterns of the main lamp 9a and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b as seen by the player are different for the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave pattern; in the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: probability variation background (or lamp data table: reduced time background)), they light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern; and in the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks red, and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b light up in a pattern corresponding to the state (see Figure 45).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), it is possible to suggest that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned light emission patterns refer to light emission patterns that allow the player to perceive some kind of movement. These include, for example, flashing (alternating between on and off) and flickering (haze) (a pattern involving changes in brightness, such as a change from RGB: 700 to RGB: 400). On/off states without changes in brightness are not included in the light emission patterns. For example, in the case of flickering (haze), it is preferable that the brightness of the specific light emission means differs from the previous brightness data, assuming that the second brightness data is used after the first brightness data. For example, during the first brightness data xms, a specific light emission means is set to the first brightness (RGB is 100) (or the combination of brightness values for the first, second, and third colors constitutes the first combination), and during the second brightness data yms, a specific light emission means is set to the second brightness (RGB is A00) (or the combination of brightness values for the first, second, and third colors constitutes the second combination)...

Furthermore, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, resulting in undispensed game balls, a ball shortage error occurs. When a ball shortage error occurs during the second customer waiting period, the CPU 120 for performance control, regardless of whether the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031 (dispensing unit) exceeds the number of undispensed balls or whether the number of game balls supplied does not exceed the number of undispensed balls, switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) at a timing related to the detection of the first (1st) game ball supplied by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps are switched to an illumination pattern corresponding to the demo movie display. This allows the demo movie to be displayed without any unnaturalness, standardizes the processing, and as a result enables optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, resulting in undispensed game balls, a ball shortage error occurs. When a ball shortage error occurs during the first waiting period, the CPU 120 for performance control, regardless of whether the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031 (dispensing unit) exceeds the number of undispensed balls or whether the number of game balls supplied does not exceed the number of undispensed balls, switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background, lamp data table: increased background probability) at a timing related to the detection of the first (1st) game ball supplied by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp is switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This allows the background display to be shown without any sense of incongruity, standardizes the processing, and as a result enables optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, during the second customer waiting period, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met and the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 has not detected any game balls for the duration of the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl), the system switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps. Also, if a ball failure error occurs during the second customer waiting period, and a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected a game ball, the system switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps.

Thus, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a ball, there is a possibility of a ball failure error, but there is also a possibility of ball delay, etc. Therefore, instead of immediately switching the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp, when a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to the illumination mode corresponding to the demo movie display. This allows the demo movie to be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, during the first customer waiting period, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met and the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect game balls for the duration of the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl), the system switches from the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) to the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps. Also, if a ball depletion error occurs during the first customer waiting period, and a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected a game ball, the system switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps.

Thus, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a ball, there is a possibility of a ball failure error, but there is also a possibility of ball delay, etc. Therefore, instead of immediately switching the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp, when a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to the illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This allows the background display to be shown without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
Figure 79 is a diagram illustrating the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data to the LED driver (also referred to as the lamp driver) to turn on/flash/turn off one or more of the LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Hereinafter, the control of turning on/flashing/turning off LEDs and other lamps performed by the performance control CPU 120 will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing to each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/flash/turn off each lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/flashes/turns off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a lamp data table containing brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The lamp data table includes an error lamp data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach lamp data table used during a super reach, and a background lamp data table.

Furthermore, the background lamp data table includes a normal background lamp data table used in the normal state (normal background shown in Figure 87), a fanfare background lamp data table used in the fanfare state where a fanfare effect is performed, a jackpot background lamp data table used during rounds in the jackpot game state, an ending background lamp data table used in the ending state where an ending effect is performed to announce the end of the jackpot game state, a probability variation background lamp data table used in the probability variation state (probability variation background shown in Figure 87), a time-saving background lamp data table used in the time-saving state (time-saving background shown in Figure 87), and a waiting customer lamp data table used in the waiting customer state (waiting customer demo shown in Figure 87).

Each of the background lamp data tables described above is used without overlap. Depending on which of the multiple game states—normal state, fanfare state, jackpot state, ending state, probability variation state, time reduction state, and waiting state—is being controlled, one of the background lamp data tables is used. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background lamp data tables for each game state being controlled and outputs brightness data based on that background lamp data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority order is defined for each of the error lamp data tables, the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 79, the priority order for use is highest for the error lamp data table, followed by the SP reach lamp data table, and then the background lamp data table.

For example, when the CPU 120 for performance control is outputting brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in the normal state and the game progresses to a super reach performance, it prioritizes using the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach performance over the normal background lamp data table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the SP reach lamp data table. As a result, when the game effect lamps 9 are controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background lamp data table and the game progresses to a super reach performance, lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table has not been set will be controlled in a manner corresponding to the background lamp data table, while lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table has been set will be controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach performance based on the SP reach lamp data table. Furthermore, during the period when brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps where brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is set, brightness data based on the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. After the Super Reach performance ends and the system returns to the normal state, brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table is output to the LED driver. Also, after the Super Reach performance ends and a jackpot is achieved, resulting in the fanfare state, brightness data based on the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver, and all lamps are controlled in accordance with the fanfare background lamp data table.

More specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control measures the time for lamp control corresponding to the game state being controlled using a timer, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background lamp data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the game progresses to a super reach effect, the CPU 120 uses the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect, prioritizing it over the background lamp data table, to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the CPU 120 for performance control continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement for lamp control using the background lamp data table. In other words, even while the CPU 120 for performance control is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach lamp data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table. However, because the brightness data included in the background lamp data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the SP reach lamp data table, the CPU 120 does not output the brightness data included in the background lamp data table to the LED driver. Then, after the Super Reach animation ends, the CPU 120 for performance control begins outputting brightness data from the background lamp data table to the LED driver again, starting from where it left off updating the brightness data. For the game effect lamps 9 that do not have brightness data set based on the SP Reach lamp data table, the CPU continues to output brightness data from the background lamp data table to the LED driver.

Furthermore, for example, if an error occurs when the CPU 120 for performance control is outputting brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in a normal state, or when it is outputting brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table during a super reach performance, the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has not been set will be controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. However, for the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has been set, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error will be used preferentially over the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table, and brightness data will be output to the LED driver based on the error lamp data table. As a result, the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has not been set will be controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table, while the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has been set will be controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error lamp data table. Furthermore, during the period when brightness data based on the error lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps where brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table will not be output to the LED driver. Once the error is cleared and the game returns to the normal state or the state during a Super Reach animation, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table will be output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control measures the time for lamp control corresponding to the normal state and the lamp control corresponding to the super reach performance during control using a timer, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the normal background lamp data table corresponding to the normal state and the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach performance. However, if an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error lamp data table corresponding to that error, with priority given to the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. During this time, the CPU 120 for performance control continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the time for lamp control using the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. In other words, while the CPU 120 for performance control is controlling the game effect lamps 9 based on the error lamp data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error lamp data table, the CPU 120 does not output the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the CPU 120 for performance control begins outputting the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver again, starting from where it left off updating the brightness data. Note that for game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has not been set, the CPU 120 continues to output the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver.

[How the game effect lamp lights up]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the CPU 120 for performance control as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off,""partiallyoff,""on," and "flashing" are used to describe the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As mentioned above, the states of each game effect lamp 9 when "on" or "flashing" are also referred to as "lighting states."

The term "off" includes the state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and its brightness is 0. The term "partially off" includes the state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" as described later).

For example, if the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED will be "off". Also, if the luminance data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED will light up white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED with such RGB data as "111" may be referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "illuminated" includes three states: constant illumination (where the game effect lamp 9 is always lit), wave illumination (where multiple lamps within the game effect lamp 9 switch from off to lit in sequence), and hazy illumination (where the game effect lamp 9 dimly illuminates while its brightness changes). Specifically, "illuminated" includes the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is one of the values from "2" to "F". The brightness data is a hexadecimal value that can be specified from "0" to "F," where "0" represents no brightness, "1" represents the lowest brightness, and "F" represents the highest brightness.

The term "flashing" includes modes of operation other than the "off" and "on" states described above, where the brightness of each lamp alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "flashing" includes repeatedly switching between on and off or partially off. Specifically, "flashing" includes switching between a brightness data value of "2" to "F" and a brightness data value of "0" or "1" over time. As described above, in this embodiment, there is a "hazy illumination" mode for the lamps. However, hazy illumination is a state where the game effect lamps 9 are dimly lit while changing brightness, whereas flashing differs in that all the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 repeatedly switch between on and off or partially off.

[Explanation regarding the game effect indicator lights]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 80 to 86.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using lamp data tables]
The CPU 120 for performance control uses the lamp data table stored in the ROM 121 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by turning them on, blinking, or turning them off.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that decrements by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying each part, the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extended command (for example, extended command BXXX, where "X" is an arbitrary value (0 to F)) corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5, according to the display control it is performing, and transmits this extended command to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) controlled by the display control unit 123.

Figure 80 illustrates an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. As shown in Figure 80, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs a predetermined display control, it sends an extended command (BXXX) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the display control. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (XXX (parent)) corresponding to the predetermined display control.

The parent table stores information specifying which lamps (lit or unlit) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are subject to lamp control, information specifying the child table referenced during lamp control corresponding to the lamps subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table only stores information about the lamps subject to lamp control; information about lamps not subject to lamp control is not stored.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 82, side lamp 9b is specified as the target of lamp control. Furthermore, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX is specified corresponding to side lamp 9, and the maximum time for lamp control by this child table is specified as 600,000 ms (600,000/10). Note that for lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which corresponding information is not stored in the parent table (in Figure 82, main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), lamp control based on the information in the parent table that was last set previously will continue.

As shown in Figure 80, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a lamp specified in the parent table using the specified child table, for example, if the maximum time is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes), it decrements a counter by 1 every 10 ms to measure this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 measures 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter decrementing process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until it has measured the maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes). Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives another extended command after receiving an extended command but before it has measured the maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes), it stops the currently running lamp control and controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the newly received extended command. While it's not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) would require 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control via the child table is set to 600,000 ms, significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). Therefore, even if the performance control CPU 120 fails to receive the next extended command for any reason, it can continue the lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table stores information specifying the sub-table referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for each lamp control, for each lamp (illuminated location) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the child table only stores information about lamps that are subject to lamp control; information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control is not stored.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 83, corresponding to the side lamp 9b (XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX), the following are specified in the order in which the lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed: grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_1 with an execution time of 500 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table, grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 with an execution time of 500 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table, grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_3 with an execution time of 230 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table, and grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 with an execution time of 600,000 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table. Furthermore, in the sub-table, for the game effect lamps 9 for which no corresponding information is stored (in Figure 83, this includes the main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), the lamp control continues based on the information from the most recently set sub-table.

As shown in Figure 80, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it first controls the target lamp using the first specified grandchild table, measures the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then controls the target lamp using the next specified grandchild table. This process is performed for all specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, with the child table shown in Figure 83, for the side lamp 9b, it first controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 until 500 ms is measured, then controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 500 ms is measured, then controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 until 230 ms is measured, and then controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 600000 ms is measured. While it's not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) would require 600,000 ms, by setting the maximum time for lamp control via the last specified grandchild table to 600,000 ms—significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene)—the performance control CPU 120 can continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if it fails to receive the next extended command for any reason.

Furthermore, in the child table, when the side lamps 9b are to be controlled, there are cases where one grandchild table, XD___LWU_1_XXX_1, is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, as shown in Figure 84, or where two grandchild tables, XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 and XD___LWU_2_XXX_1, are specified, although these are not shown. When one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the CPU 120 for performance control uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified as the grandchild tables corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the CPU 120 for performance control uses one of the two grandchild tables to control the left side lamp 9b and the other grandchild table to control the right side lamp 9b. Therefore, if one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, common lamp control is performed for both the left and right side lamps 9b. However, if two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the left and right side lamps 9b.

The sub-table stores, for each lamp (the illuminated area) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 that are subject to lamp control, the brightness data referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time of the lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the sub-table only stores information about lamps that are subject to lamp control; information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control is not stored.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 84, corresponding to side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1), the brightness data is: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, The following are specified as the order in which lamp control based on brightness data is executed: 0x000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms. Furthermore, in the sub-table, for lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which corresponding information is not stored (in Figure 84, main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, button lamp 9e), lamp control based on the information in the last previously set sub-table continues.

In the luminance data for the left and right side lamps 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1) of the sub-table shown in Figures 82 to 84, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, and the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b. Furthermore, the last three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 represent the RGB values of the 6th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; the last four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 represent the RGB values of the 7th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; the last three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 represent the RGB values of the 8th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; the last four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 represent the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; the last three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 represent the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; and the last three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 11 represent the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, when separate sub-tables are specified for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, in the luminance data for the left side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_~), the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, and the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 are on the left side The RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top on side lamp 9b are shown, and the last three digits of the data corresponding to the 5th and 6th lamps indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last four to six digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th lamps indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last three digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th lamps indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last four to six digits of the data corresponding to the 9th and 10th lamps indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last three digits of the data corresponding to the 9th and 10th lamps indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last three digits of the data corresponding to the 11th lamp indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. This indicates the RGB value of the 11th lamp from the top of lamp b. In the luminance data for the right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_2_~), the 4th to 6th digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the 1st lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 1st to 3rd digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the 2nd lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 4th to 6th digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the 3rd lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 1st to 3rd digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the 4th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 4th to 6th digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of the 5th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 6th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8, from the fourth to the sixth digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 7th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 8th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10, from the fourth to the sixth digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to number 11, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LMAIN_~) specifying the main lamp 9a, the values in the first to third digits from the bottom indicate the RGB value of the main lamp 9a. Also, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LLOGO_~) specifying the movable lamp 9d, the values in the fourth to sixth digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the first lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, the values in the first to third digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, the values in the fourth to sixth digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, and the values in the first to third digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. Furthermore, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LSLMP_~) that specifies decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, and the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 5 indicate the RGB value of the fifth lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f. Furthermore, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LATAK_~) specifying attacker lamp 9c, the values from the fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the first lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c, the values from the first to third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c, the values from the fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c, and the values from the first to third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c. Additionally, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LPUSH_~) specifying button lamp 9e, the values from the first to third digits of the data indicate the RGB value of button lamp 9e.

The luminance data values correspond to the current values output to the lamps being controlled. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements: "R," "G," and "B." The luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (e.g., 0), and when the luminance data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when luminance data "A" is output to the "R" element, the current corresponding to that "A" luminance data flows to the "R" element. When luminance data "1" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to that "1" luminance data flows to the "G" element. When luminance data "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to that "F" luminance data flows to the "G" element.

The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can emit light in various colors by flowing a current corresponding to the luminance data through each RGB element. Furthermore, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can light up in colors corresponding to various effects and characters based on the luminance data. For example, if the luminance data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to this data flows, the LED lights up red. Similarly, if the luminance data "F0F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to this data flows, the LED lights up reddish-purple. Also, if the luminance data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to this data flows, the LED lights up yellow.

As shown in Figure 80, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the sub-table, for example, it first outputs the specified brightness data to the LED driver, measures the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputs the next specified brightness data to the LED driver. This process is performed for all specified brightness data in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 83, for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, until 100 ms is first measured, the brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, The system outputs 0x000 to the LED driver, then outputs brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, 0x5AA, until 120ms have elapsed. Then, it outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, 0x5AA, until 40ms have elapsed. The LED driver then supplies the corresponding current to the specified LED based on the received brightness data. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the CPU 120 for performance control has timers corresponding to the parent table, child table, and grandchild table. It controls the lamps based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while subtracting these timers at a fixed period (for example, a 10ms period).

Specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table. When it has finished outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still has a value remaining, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, while the CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the timer corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0, it then sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This causes the grandchild table to switch, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the CPU 120 for performance control will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of the child table. As shown in Figure 81, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, 500 ms is specified as the time for the first lamp control to be performed on the side lamp 9b, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 is specified. 500 ms is specified as the time for the second lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. 230 ms is specified as the time for the third lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 is specified. 600000 ms is specified as the time for the fourth lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, for side lamp 9b, the luminance data (RGB data) is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, The process is specified to execute at 100ms intervals in the order of "0x499". For the sake of explanation, the luminance data from the first 100ms will be referred to as Data 1, the luminance data from the second 100ms as Data 2, the luminance data from the third 100ms as Data 3, and the luminance data from the fourth 100ms as Data 4.

The CPU 120 for performance control, when performing lamp control for the second grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 specified in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, counts the specified 500ms by decrementing a counter by 1 every 10ms. Until the count reaches 500ms, it outputs brightness data 1, 2, 3, and 4 (data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4) to the LED driver at 100ms intervals based on XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. If the count has not yet reached 500ms after outputting data 1 through 4, it restarts outputting the brightness data to the LED driver, starting from the first data 1. When the count eventually reaches 500ms, the CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 and starts outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 (specified by the child table).

Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, which is the fourth entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, it counts down to the specified 600,000 ms by decrementing a counter by 1 every 10 ms. Until the count reaches 600,000 ms, it outputs brightness data 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. However, if the count has not yet reached 600,000 ms after outputting data 1 through 4, it outputs the brightness data to the LED driver again, starting from the first data 1 in order. When the count reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. In this case, since no further grandchild tables are specified in the child table, the output of luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 will begin. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the timer will not reach 600,000 ms. Before the timer reaches 600,000 ms, the display control unit 123 will receive the next extended command, and the output of luminance data based on the parent, child, and grandchild tables specified in the newly received extended command will begin.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 82, the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This 10-minute data in the parent table serves a role in troubleshooting. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables based on performance control commands from the main board 11 to perform lamp control. However, even if a malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a particular parent table, and the performance control CPU 120 fails to receive performance control commands from the main board 11, lamp control will continue for 10 minutes based on the same parent table. This prevents a chain reaction of different lamp controls from occurring due to the malfunction.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 83, the execution time for lamp control by the last specified grandchild table is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This 10-minute data in the child table serves to prevent the lamp control from being performed again by the first specified grandchild table when the timer value corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still active.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, the execution time for lamp control referencing the last specified brightness data may be set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This configuration prevents the lamp control from being performed again using the brightness data specified first in the grandchild table, even when the timer value corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, because the timer in the child table is still active. By setting the last specified brightness data in the grandchild table to 10 minutes, the lamp is maintained at a predetermined level of illumination, thus preventing the malfunction of continuously fluctuating lamp illumination. Moreover, specifying 600,000 ms (10 minutes) of brightness data at the end of the grandchild table, as specified at the end of the child table, can more effectively prevent the malfunction of continuously fluctuating lamp illumination.

[Regarding the lamp data table used during non-gameplay, Part 1]
Figure 87 shows the lamp data table used when not playing (only the white flashing button and red flashing button are used during gameplay).

The background shown in Figure 87 is the lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the normal background image. The CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B10E, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the normal background image, after the power outage is restored (when controlled to the normal state), after the initialization notification associated with the initialization of the game state is completed, after the variation in the normal state is completed, after the variation of the last game in the time-saving state is completed, after the jackpot game state is completed (when controlled to the normal state), after the demo movie in the normal state is completed, and after the menu display in the normal state is completed. In these cases, the CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the normal background.

The background time reduction shown in Figure 87 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the time reduction background image. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command B11D transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the time reduction background image after a power outage (when controlled to the time reduction state), after the end of the variation in the time reduction state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the time reduction state), after the end of the demo movie in the time reduction state, and after the end of the menu display in the time reduction state, uses the normal background to control the game effect lamp 9.

The background data table shown in Figure 87 represents the lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the background image for the probability variation mode. The CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B121, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the probability variation background image, after a power outage (when controlled to the probability variation state), after the end of the variation in the probability variation state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the probability variation state), after the end of the demo movie in the probability variation state, and after the end of the menu display in the probability variation state. In response, the CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the normal background data table.

The customer-waiting demo shown in Figure 87 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the customer-waiting demo performance. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command BF01 transmitted when the conditions for starting the customer-waiting demo performance are met and the display control unit 123 performs control to display the image corresponding to the customer-waiting demo performance, uses the customer-waiting demo to control the game effect lamp 9.

The white button illumination shown in Figure 87 represents the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e, corresponding to non-game states except during initialization notification. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 after power loss and recovery, after the initialization notification associated with the game state initialization, and after the operation-prompting performance ends, uses the white button illumination to control the game effect lamp 9.

The white flashing of the button shown in Figure 87 is the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompt effect. When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the extended command B002, which is transmitted in conjunction with the control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the operation prompt effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, it uses the white flashing of the button to control the game effect lamp 9.

The red flashing of the button shown in Figure 87 is the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompt effect. When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the extended command B003 transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of an image corresponding to the operation prompt effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash red during gameplay, it uses the white flashing of the button to control the game effect lamp 9.

Furthermore, button lamp 9e is not specified in the lamp data table used except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompting effects. Except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompting effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the button's white illumination. Also, since the white illumination, white blinking, and red blinking button illumination do not specify any game effect lamps 9 other than button lamp 9e, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying the white illumination, white blinking, or red blinking button illumination, it continues to control the game effect lamps 9 other than button lamp 9e based on the previous lamp data table.

The initialization notification shown in Figure 87 is a lamp data table corresponding to the initialization notification. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command BFF, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image corresponding to the initialization notification, it uses the initialization to control the game effect lamp 9.

The error shown in Figure 87 is the lamp data table for the main lamp 9a corresponding to the error notification. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to the error, it uses the error to control the game effect lamp 9.

Furthermore, since no game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a are specified in the error, the CPU 120 for performance control will continue to perform lamp control for game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a based on the previous lamp data table, even when it receives an extended command specifying an error.

[Lamp Data Table: Normal Background]
Figure 88 shows the settings of the normal parent table used when the extended command B10E is received, Figure 89 shows the settings of the normal child table used in the lamp data table, and Figures 90 to 91 show the settings of the normal grandchild table used in the lamp data table.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B10E transmitted by the display control unit 123 in conjunction with the display of the normal background image, it specifies the normal background parent table based on the extended command B10E. As shown in Figure 88, the normal background parent table is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a, referencing the child table XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B10E, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP specified by the normal background parent table.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a being referenced, as shown in Figure 89.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO (Figure 90), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 90, the sub-table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO contains the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO is based on a blue-based brightness, and the main lamp 9a operates in a lighting pattern where the brightness changes based on a blue color.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the newly received extended command and the lamp data table.

As shown in Figures 88 to 91, the background normal parent table has child tables set up that reference the side lamps 9b, movable lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacker lamps 9c. These child tables also have grandchild tables set up that they reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data set up in execution order. The performance control CPU 120 controls the side lamps 9b, movable lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacker lamps 9c in the same procedure as described above, by referencing the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

The background data, including the brightness data set in the grandchild table referenced by the normal child table for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, is also based on a blue-based brightness. Therefore, the lighting patterns for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also exhibit a brightness change pattern based on a blue color scheme.

Furthermore, since the background parent table does not have child or grandchild tables set for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Time Reduction]
Figure 92 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: background time reduction used when the extended command: B11D is received, Figure 93 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: background time reduction, and Figures 94 and 95 show the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background time reduction.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B11D transmitted by the display control unit 123 in conjunction with the display of a time-saving background image, it specifies the parent table for background time-saving based on the extended command B11D. As shown in Figures 92 to 95, the parent table for background time-saving contains child tables referenced for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. These child tables also contain referenced grandchild tables, and these grandchild tables contain referenced brightness data in execution order. The CPU 120 for performance control refers to the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables, and controls the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c in the same procedure as for normal background control.

The luminance data set in the grandchild tables referenced by the background time-saving child table for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c is set to a luminance based on green. Therefore, the lighting patterns for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also change in luminance based on green.

Furthermore, since the parent table for background time reduction does not contain child or grandchild tables for button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Probability Change]
Figure 96 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: background probability variation used when the extended command: B121 is received, Figure 97 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: background probability variation, and Figures 98 to 99 show the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background probability variation.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B121 transmitted by the display control unit 123 in conjunction with the display of the background image for the probability variation mode, it specifies the parent table for the background probability variation mode based on the extended command B121. As shown in Figures 96 to 99, the parent table for the background probability variation mode has child tables set up for reference for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. These child tables also have grandchild tables set up for reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data set up in execution order for reference. The CPU 120 for performance control controls the lamps of the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c in the same procedure as for normal background control, by referring to the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

The sub-table of the background probability variation refers to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. The brightness data set in these sub-tables is based on a purple color scheme. Therefore, the lighting patterns for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also change brightness based on a purple color scheme.

Furthermore, since the parent table for background probability variation does not contain child or grandchild tables for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo]
Figure 100 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, which is used when the extended command: BF01 is received. Figure 101 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo. Figures 102 to 108 show the settings of the grandchild tables of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command BF01 transmitted by the display control unit when performing display control for the customer-waiting demo, specifies the parent table of the customer-waiting demo based on the extended command BF01. As shown in Figure 100, the parent table of the customer-waiting demo is configured to control the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, upon receiving the extended command BF01, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer-waiting demo.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a in the order they are referenced, as shown in Figure 101.

The CPU 120 for performance control first controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 102), which is initially set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a blinks white at the start of the company name section that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the second grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 103 and 104), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up white for the duration of the company name segment of the customer waiting demo performance, and its illumination pattern changes in accordance with the movement of the company name characters.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 9500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02), refers to the common table (grandchild table) XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 124), which is set as the third item in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. The common table is a grandchild table that is referenced in common even if the parent tables are different. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for the duration of the parts of the customer waiting demo performance: machine introduction 1, machine introduction 2-1, machine introduction 3-1, machine introduction 2-2, machine introduction 3-1, and machine introduction 2-3.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 30,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 125), which is set as the fourth item in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table shared with the one used when displaying the title for the jackpot state. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes its illumination color to rainbow colors throughout the duration of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01), refers to the fifth grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 102) in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO to perform lamp control. As a result, at the start of the first subtitle part of the customer waiting demo performance, the main lamp 9a blinks white.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 125), which is set as the sixth item in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to control the lamps. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes its illumination color to a rainbow pattern for the duration of one subtitle part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01), refers to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 102), which is set as the seventh entry in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, at the start of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance, the main lamp 9a blinks white.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 125), which is set as the eighth item in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to control the lamps. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes its illumination color to a rainbow pattern for the duration of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 124), which is set as the 9th entry in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF), refers to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 108), which is set as the 10th entry in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up white during the duration of the warning 1 and warning 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06), refers to the common table (grandchild table) XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 124), which is set as the 11th item in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) sent by the display control unit 123 when performing display control such as a normal background. Upon receiving this extended command, the CPU switches to lamp control based on the lamp data table. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off until a new extended command is received, at which point it switches to the illumination mode based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figure 100, the parent table of the customer-waiting demo is configured to control the side lamp 9b by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command BF01, it refers to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the customer-waiting demo's parent table to control the side lamp 9b.

The child table, XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, contains the grandchild table of side ramp 9b and the execution time, in the order they are referenced, as shown in Figure 101.

The CPU 120 for performance control first controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 102), which is initially set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks white at the start of the company name section that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the second grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 103 and 104), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to control the lamps. As a result, the side lamps 9b illuminate in white for the duration of the company name segment of the customer waiting demo performance, and their illumination pattern changes in accordance with the movement of the company name characters.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing for 9500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 124), which is set as the third item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF), refers to the fourth grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03 (Figure 105), which is set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, during the duration of the machine introduction 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamps 9b change their illumination color in the following order: green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white, according to the type of character appearing.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 12,500 ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03), refers to the fifth grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 106), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up white and changes its illumination pattern in a predetermined sequence throughout the duration of the machine introduction 2-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 5000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04), refers to the sixth grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 107), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks green throughout the period of the machine introduction 3-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 1000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05), refers to the seventh grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 106), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up white and changes its illumination pattern in a predetermined sequence throughout the duration of the machine introduction 2-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 5000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 107), which is set as the eighth entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks green throughout the period of the machine introduction 3-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 1000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 106), which is set as the ninth entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, during the period of the machine introduction 2-3, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and its illumination pattern changes according to a predetermined pattern.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 5000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 124), which is set as the 10th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 125), which is set as the 11th entry in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table shared with the one used for displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the side lamps 9b change their illumination color to rainbow colors throughout the duration of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 102), which is set as the 12th entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, at the start of subtitle part 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b blinks white.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 125), which is set as the 13th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes its illumination color to rainbow colors for the duration of one subtitle part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 102), which is set as the 14th entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks white at the start of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 125), which is set as the 15th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamps 9b change their illumination color to rainbow colors for the duration of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 124), which is set as the 16th entry in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF), refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 108), which is set as the 17th entry in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamps 9b illuminate in white during the duration of the warning 1 and warning 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing for 4000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 124), which is set as the 18th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) sent by the display control unit 123 when performing display control such as a normal background. Upon receiving this extended command, the CPU switches to lamp control based on the lamp data table. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off until a new extended command is received, at which point it switches to the illumination mode based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figures 100 to 108, the parent table for the customer waiting demo has child tables that reference the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. These child tables have their referenced grandchild tables set in execution order, and these grandchild tables have their referenced brightness data set in execution order. The performance control CPU 120 controls the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c using the same procedure as described above, by referencing the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

As a result, the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c flash white for 500ms at the start of the company name part of the customer waiting demo performance after the start of the customer waiting demo performance, light up white for the duration of the company name part of the customer waiting demo performance, and change their illumination pattern in accordance with the movement of the company name letters, then turn off for 500ms, change their illumination color in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white according to the type of character that appears during the duration of machine introduction 1 of the customer waiting demo performance, light up white for the duration of machine introduction 2-1 of the customer waiting demo performance, and change their illumination pattern in a predetermined pattern, flash green for the duration of machine introduction 3-1 of the customer waiting demo performance, light up white for the duration of machine introduction 2-2 of the customer waiting demo performance, and change their illumination pattern in a predetermined pattern, flash green for the duration of machine introduction 3-2 of the customer waiting demo performance, and the customer waiting demo During the period of the machine introduction 2-3 that constitute the performance, the light illuminates in white, and the illumination pattern changes in a predetermined sequence. Afterward, it remains off for 500ms. During the main title part of the customer waiting demo performance, the illumination color changes to rainbow colors. At the start of subtitle 1 of the customer waiting demo performance, it blinks in white. During subtitle 1 of the customer waiting demo performance, the illumination color changes to rainbow colors. At the start of subtitle 2 of the customer waiting demo performance, it blinks in white. During subtitle 2 of the customer waiting demo performance, the illumination color changes to rainbow colors. Afterward, it remains off for 500ms. During the warning 1 and warning 2 parts of the customer waiting demo performance, it illuminates in white, then remains off for 500ms. It remains off until a new extended command is received, and upon receiving a new extended command, it switches to the illumination pattern based on the received extended command.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command BF01, it performs lamp control based on the extended command BF01 and the lamp data table: customer waiting demo. As a result, the main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c change their emission color and emission pattern according to each part of the customer waiting demo performance.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the customer waiting demo does not have child or grandchild tables set for button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

Furthermore, in the lamp data table for the customer waiting demo, sub-tables are specified for each of the following parts: company name part, model introduction part 1, model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, model introduction 2-3, main title part, subtitle part 1, subtitle part 2, and warning part. Therefore, lamp control can be performed so that the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c emit light in a manner appropriate to each part.

Furthermore, in the lamp data table for the customer waiting demo, for the main lamp 9a, a sub-table is specified for each of the following parts: company name part, model introduction part, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and warning part. However, for the parts that make up the model introduction part—model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, and model introduction 2-3—only one sub-table is specified, thus reducing the overall data volume.

Furthermore, the lamp data table for the customer waiting demo does not include a sub-table for button lamp 9e. Since lamp control for button lamp 9e is based on the first sub-table from before the customer waiting demo, the overall amount of data can be reduced.

Furthermore, for sub-tables that control the lights to be off or those that emit rainbow colors, a common table used in common with other parent tables is used for lamp control, thus reducing the overall data size. Sub-tables that temporarily emit white light can also be controlled using the common table.

[Lamp data table: Button lights up white]
Figure 109 shows the settings of the parent table for the lamp data table: button white light, which is used when the extended command: B001 is received. Figure 110 shows the settings of the child table for the lamp data table: button white light, and Figure 111 shows the settings of the grandchild table for the lamp data table: button white light.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 after power loss and recovery, the completion of the initialization notification associated with the initialization of the game state, and the completion of the operation promotion performance, specifies the parent table for the white button illumination based on the extended command B001. As shown in Figure 109, the parent table for the white button illumination is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e, referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Upon receiving the extended command B001, the CPU 120 performs lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the white button illumination.

The child table, XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 110.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU (Figure 111), which is set in the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table, XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 111. The CPU 120 for performance control then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, is set to a brightness that emits white light, causing the button lamp 9e to light up white.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command (B002 or B003) to change the lighting pattern of the button lamp 9e before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the button that lights up white does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp data table: Button flashes white]
Figure 112 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button blinking white, which is used when the extended command: B002 is received. Figure 113 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: button blinking white, and Figure 114 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: button blinking white.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command B002 transmitted in conjunction with the control of displaying an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, specifies the parent table for button white flashing based on the extended command B002. As shown in Figure 112, the parent table for button white flashing is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e, referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, upon receiving the extended command B002, the CPU 120 performs lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for button white flashing.

The child table, XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 113.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU (Figure 114), which is set in the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table, XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 114. The CPU 120 for performance control then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table, XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table, XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, includes settings for brightness levels that emit white light and an off state, causing the button lamp 9e to blink white.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command (B001) to change the lighting pattern of the button lamp 9e before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the white blinking button does not contain child or grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacker lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp data table: Button flashes red]
Figure 115 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: red blinking button, which is used when the extended command: B003 is received. Figure 116 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: red blinking button, and Figure 117 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: red blinking button.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command B003 transmitted in conjunction with the control of displaying an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash red during gameplay, specifies the parent table for the red button flashing based on the extended command B003. As shown in Figure 115, the parent table for the red button flashing is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e, referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, upon receiving the extended command B003, the CPU 120 performs lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the red button flashing.

The child table, XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 116.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU (Figure 117), which is set in the child table XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 117, the sub-table ::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table ::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table ::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU includes settings for brightness levels that emit red light and an off state, causing the button lamp 9e to blink red.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command (B001) to change the lighting pattern of the button lamp 9e before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the red flashing button does not contain child or grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacker lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp Data Table: Initialization Notification]
Figure 118 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: initialization notification used when the extended command: BFF is received, Figure 119 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: initialization notification, and Figure 120 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: initialization notification.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, it specifies the parent table for the initialization notification based on the extended command BFF. As shown in Figure 118, the parent table for the initialization notification is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a, referencing the child table XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP specified by the parent table for the initialization notification.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a being referenced, as shown in Figure 119.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA (Figure 120), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table, XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, contains the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced, as shown in Figure 120. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, is set to a brightness that causes red light to be emitted, and the main lamp 9a lights up red.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP again and repeats the same control process. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the newly received extended command and the lamp data table.

As shown in Figures 118 to 120, the parent table for initialization notification has child tables that reference the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. These child tables also have grandchild tables that they reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data and other information set in execution order. The CPU 120 for performance control controls the lamps of the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e using the same procedure as described above, by referencing the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

The child table of the initialization notification also references a grandchild table for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. The brightness data set in this grandchild table also includes a brightness setting that causes the lamps to emit red light. Therefore, the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e will also light up in red.

[Lamp data table: Error]
Figure 121 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: error used when the extended command: BFF1 is received, Figure 122 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: error, and Figure 123 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: error.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to an error, it specifies the error's parent table based on the extended command BFF1. As shown in Figure 121, the error's parent table is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a, referencing the child table XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, when the CPU 120 receives the extended command BFF1, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP specified by the error's parent table.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a being referenced, as shown in Figure 122.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_ERROR (Figure 123), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table XD___LMAIN_ERROR contains the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced, as shown in Figure 123. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_ERROR according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_ERROR contains settings for brightness levels that emit red light and an off state, causing the main lamp 9a to blink red.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP again and repeats the same control process. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the error does not contain child or grandchild tables for side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, or button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Common Table]
Common tables are grandchild tables that are referenced by child tables set in different parent tables, and as shown in Figures 124 to 128, they include common tables that turn off the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e (XD___L~_OFF), common tables that slowly change the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e into rainbow colors (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01), and common tables that rapidly change the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e into rainbow colors (XD___L~_RAINBOW_02).

These common tables are provided for each of the in-lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. It is possible to control some of the game effect lamps 9 using these common tables.

By providing a common table that can be referenced and used for lamp control from child tables set in different parent tables, data capacity can be reduced.

While embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are also included.

For example, in the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the first performance mode can be executed in a low-base state, the second performance mode in a low-probability, high-base state, and the third performance mode in a high-probability, high-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute two or more performance modes in a low-base state, three or more performance modes in a high-base state, or only one performance mode.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which vertical scrolling is performed in the first display mode, rotational display in the second display mode, and vertical scrolling display in the third display mode, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the manner of variable display of decorative patterns in each display mode can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a scenario where a jackpot state is applied as an example of a favorable state for the player, the present invention is not limited to this. Other favorable states such as a time-saving state, a probability variation state, or a minor win state may also be applied.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the normal state is set to a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to perform variable displays and have a shorter average variable display period than the normal state, are set to a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be set to a low-probability state and the special states to a high-probability state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the present invention was illustrated as being applied to a pachinko game machine 1 that has a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variation state (high probability high base state) as game states, and can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variation state at the end of a big win game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on the fact that the variable display result was displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result was not a miss in the low probability state, or a time-saving state based on the fact that the variable display was executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to an advantageous state in the low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after a RAM clear (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a big win can be designated as Time-Saving State A, the time-saving state controlled based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state during a low-probability state after the end of an advantageous state or a RAM clear (cold start of pachinko machine 1) can be designated as Time-Saving State B, and the time-saving state controlled based on a specific result being displayed during a portion of the cases where the variable display result was not a miss in the low-probability state can be designated as Time-Saving State C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine capable of controlling the aforementioned time-saving state C, multiple types of variable display results that result in winning time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may differ depending on the type of variable display result when time-saving state C is won.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used spherical game balls (pachinko balls) as an example of a game medium, it is not limited to spherical game media; for example, non-spherical game media such as tokens may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, it can also be applied to slot machines, for example, where a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, and one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device capable of displaying multiple types of identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded according to the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, Assist Time (AT), and the special state corresponds to Assist Time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of this invention can be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that enclose a gaming medium and award points based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of gameplay only needs to be one that allows for gameplay; it is not limited to pachinko machines or slot machines, but may also be a general-purpose game machine.

1... Pachinko game machine 4A... First special symbol display device 4B... Second special symbol display device 5... Image display device 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 100... Microcomputer for game control 101... ROM
102... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 104A, 104B... Random number circuit 120... CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that, upon fulfilling the activation conditions, displays variable special identification information and can be controlled to a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
In multiple performance modes, including a first performance mode and a second performance mode, it is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
The variable display of the performance identification information is capable of being displayed such that the period of time it takes for the transparency of the performance identification information to change from a first value to a second value differs depending on whether the start condition is met in the first performance mode or in the second performance mode.
The operation mode of the variable display of the performance identification information in the first performance mode and the operation mode of the variable display of the performance identification information in the second performance mode can be displayed differently.
When the aforementioned demonstration display is displayed and the activation condition is met, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value.
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means, which is different from the first light-emitting means and is provided in correspondence with the performance operation means.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means can be controlled using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the first light-emitting means can be controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the first and second periods, the second light-emitting means can be controlled using a luminance data table different from the background display luminance data table and the demonstration display luminance data table.
If a specific error occurs during gameplay, the first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the first light-emitting means controls the first light-emitting means by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information.
The demonstration display brightness data table includes brightness data for controlling the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting pattern when it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The number of luminance data points constituting the specified error luminance data table and the number of luminance data points constituting the demonstration display luminance data table are different.
The luminance data constituting the demonstration display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured to be different in terms of the light emission operation mode of the light emission means as seen by the player.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.